2010 Buick Enclave Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Performance and
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1
Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-40
Universal Remote System . . . . 5-47
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-36
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-17
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-24
Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-30
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-35
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-58
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
2010 Buick Enclave Owner Manual M
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-7
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-10
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-13
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Introduction
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the
GM Emblem, BUICK, the BUICK
Emblem are registered trademarks;
and the name ENCLAVE is a
trademark of General Motors.
This manual describes features that
may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are
options that you did not purchase
or due to changes subsequent to
the printing of this owner manual.
Please refer to the purchase
documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of
the features found on your vehicle.
For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited” for Buick
Motor Division wherever it appears
in this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for
quick reference.
iii
Canadian Vehicle Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this
manual can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer or from:
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
ce guide en français auprès du
concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
suivante:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue
française
www.helminc.com
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25851641 B Second Printing
©
2009 General Motors. All Rights Reserved.
iv
Introduction
Using this Manual
To quickly locate information
about the vehicle use the Index in
the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the
manual and the page number where
it can be found.
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions
{ WARNING
These mean there is something
that could hurt you or other
people.
Notice: This means there is
something that could result in
property or vehicle damage.
This would not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty.
Warning messages found on vehicle
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
Danger indicates a hazard with a
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a
hazard that could result in injury or
death.
Symbols
The vehicle has components and
labels that use symbols instead of
text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific
component, control, message,
gauge, or indicator.
M : This symbol is shown when
you need to see your owner manual
for additional instructions or
information.
* : This symbol is shown when
you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
information.
A circle with a slash through it
is a safety symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do this” or “Do not
let this happen.”
Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Chart
Here are some additional symbols
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more
information on the symbol, refer to
the index.
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio®Steering Wheel Controls
or OnStar
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
# : Fog Lamps
. : Fuel Gage
+ : Fuses
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer
j : LATCH System Child
Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
F : Traction Control/StabiliTrak
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
v
vi
Introduction
2 NOTES
In Brief
In Brief
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Heated and Ventilated
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-8
Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Sensing System for Passenger
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Steering Wheel
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Vehicle Features
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Portable Audio Devices . . . . . .
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . .
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage Compartments . . . . . .
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-14
1-15
1-15
1-15
1-16
1-16
1-17
1-17
1-18
1-18
1-1
Performance and Maintenance
StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-19
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-19
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Roadside Assistance
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1-2
In Brief
Instrument Panel
In Brief
A. Air Vents on page 8‑9.
L. Horn on page 5‑5.
B. Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑5.
M. Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5‑3.
C. Instrument Cluster on
page 5‑13.
N. Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 6‑4.
D. Driver Information Center (DIC)
Buttons. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑25.
O. Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8‑1.
E. Clock on page 5‑9.
P. Center Console Shift Lever.
See “Console Shift Lever” under
Shifting Into Park on page 9‑21.
F. AM-FM Radio on page 7‑6.
Navigation/Radio System
(If Equipped). See Navigation
System manual.
Q. Rear Window Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑6.
G. Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6‑1.
S. Heated Front Seats on
page 3‑7.
H. Hood Release. See Hood on
page 10‑5.
T. Passenger Air Bag Status
Indicator. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑37.
I.
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6‑5.
J. Cruise Control on page 9‑32.
K. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
page 5‑2.
R. Power Outlets on page 5‑10.
U. Glove Box on page 4‑1.
1-3
Initial Drive
Information
This section provides a brief
overview about some of the
important features that may or may
not be on your specific vehicle.
For more detailed information, refer
to each of the features which can be
found later in this owner manual.
1-4
In Brief
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System
The RKE transmitter is used to
remotely lock and unlock the doors
from up to 60 m (195 feet) away
from the vehicle.
Press
Q to lock all doors.
Lock and unlock feedback can be
personalized.
To open or close the liftgate, press
and hold & until the liftgate
begins to move.
Press L and release to locate the
vehicle.
Press L and hold for more than
two seconds to sound the panic
alarm.
Press L again to cancel the panic
alarm.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3.
Press K to unlock the driver door.
Press K again within five seconds
to unlock all remaining doors.
Remote Vehicle Start
Starting the Vehicle
With this feature the engine can be
started from outside of the vehicle.
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle.
2. Press
Q.
3. Immediately after completing
Step 2, press and hold / until
the parking lamps flash.
When the vehicle starts, the parking
lamps will turn on and remain on as
long as the engine is running. The
doors will be locked and the climate
control system may come on.
The engine will continue to run for
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
10-minute time extension. Remote
start can be extended only once.
In Brief
1-5
Canceling a Remote Start
Power Door Locks
Power Liftgate
To cancel a remote start:
On vehicles with power door locks,
the controls are located on the front
doors.
On vehicles with a power liftgate,
the vehicle must be in P (Park) to
operate it.
" (Unlock): Press to unlock the
doors.
.
Press and hold the liftgate
button & on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
.
Press the liftgate button on the
center console.
.
Press the touchpad switch on
the outside liftgate handle.
.
.
.
Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle and press and hold /
until the parking lamps turn off.
Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
Turn the ignition switch on and
then off.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2‑5.
Door Locks
To lock or unlock a door manually:
.
From the inside use the door
lock knob on the window sill.
.
From the outside turn the
key toward the front or rear
of the vehicle, or press
the Q or " button on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
Q (Lock):
Press to lock the doors.
See Power Door Locks on
page 2‑7.
Liftgate
To open the liftgate the vehicle must
be in P (Park). Press the touchpad
under the liftgate handle. To close
the liftgate, use the pull cup or pull
strap as an aid.
For more information see Liftgate
on page 2‑9.
1-6
In Brief
Windows
Seat Adjustment
Power Seats
Raise or lower the seat by moving
the control (A) up or down.
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑3.
To raise or recline the seatback, tilt
the top of the control (B) forward or
rearward.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑5.
Press the front or rear of the
control (C) to increase or decrease
lumbar support.
On vehicles with power windows,
the switches are on the driver door
armrest. Each passenger door has
a switch that controls only that
window.
Press the switch to lower the
window. Pull the switch up to
raise it.
For more information, see Power
Windows on page 2‑19.
A. Power Seat Adjustment Control
B. Reclining Seatbacks
C. Lumbar Adjustment
Move the seat forward or rearward
by moving the control (A) forward or
rearward.
See Lumbar Adjustment on
page 3‑4.
In Brief
Second Row Seats
Third Row Seats
Heated Seats
The third row seats can be folded
forward or removed.
Heated Front Seats
1-7
The heated seat controls are
located on the center console.
The engine must be running to
operate them.
I : Press to turn on the heated
seatback.
J : Press to turn on or off the
heated seat and seatback.
For more information see Heated
Front Seats on page 3‑7.
To access the third row, pull the
sliding seat lever forward so that the
seat cushion folds and the entire
seat slides forward.
See Rear Seats on page 3‑8.
Pull up on the release lever located
on the back of the seat and push
the seatback forward.
For detailed procedures see Third
Row Seats on page 3‑11.
1-8
In Brief
Heated and Ventilated
Seats
Safety Belt
Sensing System for
Passenger Airbag
On vehicles with this feature, the
controls are on the front doors near
the handle.
H:
z:
Press to ventilate the seat.
Press to heat the seat.
For more information see Heated
and Ventilated Front Seats on
page 3‑8.
Head Restraint
Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
For more information see Head
Restraints on page 3‑2.
United States
Refer to the following sections for
important information on how to use
safety belts properly.
.
Safety Belts on page 3‑13.
.
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly on page 3‑17.
.
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑22.
.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑53.
Canada
The passenger sensing system will
turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag under certain
In Brief
conditions. The driver airbag,
seat‐mounted side impact airbags,
and roof‐rail airbags are not affected
by the passenger sensing system.
1-9
Mirror Adjustment
To adjust each mirror:
Exterior Mirrors
1. Press (A) or (B) to select the
driver or passenger side mirror.
2. Press one of the four arrows
located on the control pad to
adjust the mirror.
The passenger airbag status
indicator will be visible on the
instrument panel when the vehicle is
started. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 3‑37 for more
information.
3. Press either (A) or (B) again to
deselect the mirror.
Folding Mirrors
To adjust each mirror:
1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out
to the driving position.
Controls for the outside power
mirrors are located on the driver
door armrest.
2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to
the folded position.
If equipped, manually fold the
mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic
car wash. To fold, push the mirror
toward the vehicle. Push the mirror
outward to return it to the original
position.
1-10
In Brief
Interior Mirror
The vehicle has an automatic
dimming rearview mirror. Automatic
dimming reduces the glare from the
headlamps of the vehicle behind
you. The dimming feature comes on
and the indicator light illuminates
each time the ignition is turned to
start.
Steering Wheel
Adjustment
Power Tilt Wheel
See Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror on page 2‑18.
The adjustment lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
For vehicles with the power tilt and
telescope wheel, the control is on
the left side of the steering column.
.
Push the control up or down
to tilt the steering wheel up
or down.
.
Push the control forward or
rearward to move the steering
wheel toward the front or rear of
the vehicle.
1. Pull the lever down to adjust the
steering wheel.
2. Move the steering wheel up or
down or backward or forward
into a comfortable position.
3. Pull the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
See Steering Wheel Adjustment on
page 5‑2.
In Brief
Interior Lighting
Dome Lamp Override
Dome Lamps
The dome lamp override button is
next to the exterior lamps control.
The dome lamps are located in the
overhead console and above the
rear seat passengers.
The dome lamps automatically
come on when a door is opened,
unless the dome lamp override
button is pressed in.
To manually turn them on, turn the
instrument panel brightness control
clockwise to the farthest position.
1-11
Exterior Lighting
E: Press the button in and the
dome lamps remain off when a door
is opened. Press the button again to
return it to the extended position so
that the dome lamps come on when
a door is opened.
Reading Lamps
Press the button near each lamp to
turn them on or off.
For more information, see:
.
Dome Lamps on page 6‑5.
.
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6‑5.
9 : Briefly turn to this position to
turn the automatic light control off or
on again.
AUTO : Automatic operation of the
headlamps at normal brightness and
other exterior lamps.
1-12
In Brief
;: Manual operation of the parking
lamps and other exterior lamps,
except the headlamps.
2: Manual operation of the
headlamps and other exterior
lamps.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
6:
The windshield wiper/washer lever
is located on the left side of the
steering column.
1 : Slow wipes.
2 : Fast wipes.
Windshield Washer
# (If Equipped): Push the fog lamp
button in to turn on the fog lamps.
J:
Press the button at the end
of the turn signal/lane change lever
to spray washer fluid on the
windshield.
For more information, see:
.
Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6‑1.
.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/
Automatic Headlamp System on
page 6‑3.
.
Delayed Headlamps on
page 6‑3.
.
Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.
Delays wiping cycle. Turn the
band up for more frequent wipes or
down for less frequent wipes.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑5.
Turn the band with the wiper symbol
to control the windshield wipers.
8:
9:
Use for a single wiping cycle.
Turns the wipers off.
In Brief
Climate Controls
See Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8‑1. For more
information about the rear climate
control, see Rear Climate Control
System (Rear Climate Control Only)
on page 8‑7 or Rear Climate
Control System (Rear Climate with
Rear Seat Audio) on page 8‑8.
A. Fan Control
H. Display
B. AUTO
I.
C. Defrost
J. Rear Window Defogger
D. Air Recirculation
K. Air Conditioning
E. REAR (Rear Climate Control)
L. PASS (Passenger)
F. Air Delivery Mode Control
M. Passenger Side Temperature
Control
G. Driver Side Temperature Control
1-13
Power (On/Off)
1-14
In Brief
4:
Vehicle Features
Change the display between the
radio station frequency and the
time, if equipped. While the ignition
is off, press 4 to display the time.
Radio(s)
For more information about these
and other radio features, see
Operation on page 7‑2.
Storing a Favorite Station
A maximum of 36 stations can be
stored as favorites using the six
softkeys located below the radio
station frequency tabs and by using
the radio FAV button. Press FAV to
go through up to six pages of
favorites, each having six favorite
stations available per page. Each
page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM
stations.
Radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port
O : Press to turn the system on
and off. Turn to increase or
decrease the volume.
BAND: Press to choose between
FM, AM, or XM™, if equipped.
f : Select radio stations.
© ¨ : Seek or scan stations.
See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑6.
In Brief
1-15
Setting the Clock
Satellite Radio
Portable Audio Devices
To set the time and date for the
radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port:
Vehicles with an XM™ Satellite
Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite
Radio subscription can receive XM
programming.
This vehicle may have an auxiliary
input located on the radio faceplate
and a USB port located in the center
console. External devices such as
iPod®, laptop computers, MP3
players, CD changers, USB storage
device, etc. can be connected
to the auxiliary port using a 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) input jack or the USB port
depending on the audio system.
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then
press O , to turn the radio on.
2. Press G to display HR, MIN,
MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute,
month, day, and year).
3. Press the pushbutton located
under any one of the labels to be
changed.
4. To increase or decrease the time
or date, turn f clockwise or
counter‐clockwise.
For detailed instructions on setting
the clock for the vehicles specific
audio system, see Clock on
page 5‑9.
XM Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service that is
based in the 48 contiguous United
States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM Satellite Radio has a wide
variety of programming and
commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality
sound. A fee is required to receive
the XM service.
For more information refer to:
.
www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 (U.S.).
.
www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 (Canada).
See Satellite Radio on page 7‑8.
See Auxiliary Devices on
page 7‑34.
Bluetooth®
The in-vehicle Bluetooth
system allows users with a
Bluetooth-enabled cell phone to
make and receive hands-free calls
using the vehicle’s audio system,
microphone and controls.
1-16
In Brief
The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
must be paired with the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system before it can be
used in the vehicle. Not all phones
will support all functions.
b g : Press to silence the vehicle
speakers only. Press again to turn
the sound on. Press and hold longer
than two seconds to interact with
OnStar® or Bluetooth systems.
See Bluetooth on page 7‑46.
+ e − e : Increases or decreases
volume.
Steering Wheel Controls
c : Press to reject an incoming
call, or to end a call.
SRCE : Press to switch between
the radio, CD, and for vehicles with,
DVD, front auxiliary, and rear
auxiliary.
¨:
Press to seek the next radio
station, the next track or chapter
while sourced to the CD or DVD
slot, or to select tracks and folders
on an iPod® or USB device.
w/x:
Press to change favorite
radio stations, select tracks on a
CD/DVD, or to navigate tracks or
folders on an iPod® or USB device.
For more information, see Steering
Wheel Controls on page 5‑3.
Navigation System
The vehicle's navigation system
provides detailed maps of most
major freeways and roads
throughout the United States and
Canada. After a destination has
been set, the system provides
turn-by-turn instructions for reaching
the destination. In addition, the
system can help locate a variety
of points of interest (POI), such
as banks, airports, restaurants,
and more.
See the vehicle's Navigation System
manual for more information.
In Brief
Cruise Control
T:
On/Off.
+ RES : Press to accelerate or
resume speed.
SET– : Press to set speed or
decrease speed.
[:
Press to cancel cruise control.
See Cruise Control on page 9‑32.
1-17
Storage Compartments
For vehicles with a second row
center console, open each area to
access the storage compartment
inside.
Press the buttons (B, C) on the front
of the consoles to access the upper
and lower storage areas.
Increase the storage area by folding
the top of the console forward. Lift
up on rear console handle (A) and
pull forward.
See Floor Console Storage on
page 4‑2.
1-18
In Brief
Power Outlets
Performance and
Maintenance
The vehicle has three 12‐volt
accessory power outlets which
can be used to plug in electrical
equipment, such as a cellular
telephone.
StabiliTrak®
The power outlets are located:
.
On the instrument panel below
the climate controls.
.
At the rear of the center floor
console.
.
In the rear cargo area.
To use the outlets, remove the
cover.
See Power Outlets on page 5‑10.
Sunroof
The ignition must be in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY to operate the
sunroof and power sunshade. See
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 9‑19
The switch to operate the front
sunroof is on the headliner above
the rearview mirror.
The traction control system limits
wheel spin and the StabiliTrak
system assists with directional
control of the vehicle in difficult
driving conditions. Both systems
turn on automatically every time the
vehicle is started.
.
To turn off the traction control
part of StabiliTrak, press and
release 5 located on the
instrument panel below the
climate controls. F illuminates
and the appropriate DIC
message is displayed. See
Vehicle Messages on page 5‑31.
.
The StabiliTrak system
remains on.
Vent: Press the front or rear of the
switch to vent or close the sunroof.
Express-open/Express-close:
From the closed position, press
and release the rear or front of
the switch to express-open or
express-close the sunroof.
For more information see Sunroof
on page 2‑21.
For more information, see
StabiliTrak System on page 9‑30.
In Brief
Tire Pressure Monitor
This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
alerts you when a significant
reduction in pressure occurs in one
or more of your vehicle’s tires by
illuminating the low tire pressure
warning light on the instrument
cluster. If the warning light comes
on, stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires to the recommended
pressure shown on the tire loading
information label located on the
driver side center pillar (B pillar).
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑12. The warning light will
remain on until the tire pressure is
corrected.
You may notice during cooler
conditions that the low tire pressure
warning light will appear when the
vehicle is first started and then
turn off as you drive. This may be
an early indicator that your tire
pressures are getting low and the
tires need to be inflated to the
proper pressure.
Note: The Tire Pressure Monitor
System can alert you about low tire
pressure, but it does not replace
normal monthly tire maintenance.
It is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressures.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 10‑45 and Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on page 10‑46.
1-19
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
This vehicle may come with a jack
and spare tire or a tire sealant and
compressor kit. The kit can be used
to seal small punctures in the tread
area of the tire.
See Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit on page 10‑59 for complete
operating information.
Engine Oil Life System
The engine oil life system calculates
engine oil life based on vehicle use
and displays the “Change Engine
Oil Soon” message when it is time
to change the engine oil and filter.
The oil life system should be reset
to 100% only following an oil
change.
1-20
In Brief
Resetting the Oil Life System
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
with the engine off.
2. Press the vehicle information
button until “Oil Life Remaining”
displays.
3. Press and hold the set/reset
button until “100%” is displayed.
Three chimes sound and the
“Change Engine Oil Soon”
message goes off.
.
Avoid idling the engine for long
periods of time.
.
When road and weather
conditions are appropriate, use
cruise control, if equipped.
.
.
Keep vehicle tires properly
inflated.
.
Combine several trips into a
single trip.
.
Replace the vehicle's tires with
the same TPC Spec number
molded into the tire's sidewall
near the size.
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑10.
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel
mileage. Here are some driving tips
to get the best fuel economy
possible.
.
Avoid fast starts and accelerate
smoothly.
.
Brake gradually and avoid
abrupt stops.
Always follow posted speed
limits or drive more slowly when
conditions require.
.
Follow recommended scheduled
maintenance.
Roadside Assistance
Program
U.S.: 1-800-252-1112
TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
As the owner of a new Buick, you
are automatically enrolled in the
Roadside Assistance program. This
program provides technically trained
advisors who are available 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year, minor repair
information or towing arrangements.
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
If you have a current OnStar
subscription, press the OnStar
button and the current GPS location
will be sent to an OnStar Advisor
who will assess your problem,
contact Roadside Assistance, and
relay exact location to get you the
help you need.
In Brief
Online Owner Center
Automatic Crash Response
The Online Owner Center is a
complimentary service that includes
online service reminders, vehicle
maintenance tips, online owner
manual, special privileges
and more.
In a crash, built in sensors can
automatically alert an OnStar
advisor who is immediately
connected to the vehicle to see if
you need help.
Sign up today at:
www.gmownercenter.com/buick
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
Q : This blue button connects you
to a specially trained OnStar advisor
to verify your account information
and to answer questions.
OnStar®
How OnStar Service Works
] : Push this red emergency
button to get priority help from
specially trained OnStar emergency
advisors.
X:
OnStar® uses several innovative
technologies and live advisors to
provide a wide range of safety,
security, navigation, diagnostics,
and calling services.
Push this button for hands‐free,
voice‐activated calling and to give
voice commands for turn‐by‐turn
navigation.
1-21
Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle
Assistance, Vehicle Diagnostics,
Remote Door Unlock, Roadside
Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn
Navigation and Hands‐Free
Calling are available on most
vehicles. Not all OnStar services are
available on all vehicles. For more
information see the OnStar Owner's
Guide or visit www.onstar.com
(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada),
contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY
1‐877‐248‐2080, or press Q to
speak with an OnStar advisor
24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
For a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations, see
the OnStar Owner's Guide in the
glove box.
OnStar service is subject to the
OnStar terms and conditions
included in the OnStar Subscriber
Information.
1-22
In Brief
OnStar service cannot work unless
the vehicle is in a place where
OnStar has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service
in that area. OnStar service also
cannot work unless the vehicle is in
a place where the wireless service
provider OnStar has hired for
that area has coverage, network
capacity and reception when the
service is needed, and technology
that is compatible with the OnStar
service. Not all services are
available everywhere, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas, or at all
times.
The OnStar system can record and
transmit vehicle information. This
information is automatically sent to
an OnStar call center when Q is
pressed, ] is pressed, or if the
airbags or ACR system deploy.
This information usually includes
the vehicle's GPS location and, in
the event of a crash, additional
information regarding the crash that
the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the
direction from which the vehicle was
hit). When the virtual advisor feature
of OnStar hands-free calling is
used, the vehicle also sends OnStar
the vehicle's GPS location so they
can provide services where it is
located.
OnStar Steering Wheel
Controls
Location information about the
vehicle is only available if the GPS
satellite signals are unobstructed
and available.
On some vehicles, the mute button
can be used to dial numbers into
voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's
Guide for more information.
The vehicle must have a working
electrical system, including
adequate battery power, for the
OnStar equipment to operate. There
are other problems OnStar cannot
control that may prevent OnStar
from providing OnStar service at
any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important
parts of the vehicle in a crash, hills,
tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute
button that can be used to interact
with OnStar hands-free calling.
See Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5‑3 for more information.
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if
the OnStar advisor cannot be heard.
If the light next to the OnStar
buttons is red, the system may
not be functioning properly.
Press Q and request a vehicle
diagnostic. If the light appears
clear (no light is appearing), your
OnStar subscription has expired and
all services have been deactivated.
Press Q to confirm that the OnStar
equipment is active.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys, Doors and
Windows
Doors
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . .
Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . .
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . .
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior Mirrors
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Vehicle Security
Keys and Locks
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-5
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-8
2-8
2-8
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . .
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . .
2-12
2-12
2-13
2-13
Exterior Mirrors
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Windows
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Roof
2-15
2-16
2-16
2-17
2-17
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2-2
Keys, Doors and Windows
If you are locked out of the vehicle,
call the Roadside Assistance
Center. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 13‑6.
Keys and Locks
Keys
{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the ignition key is dangerous for
many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even
killed. They could operate the
power windows or other controls
or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the
keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System
The key is used for the ignition and
all door locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag
that the dealer/retailer or qualified
locksmith can use to make new
keys. Store this information in a safe
place, not in the vehicle.
See your dealer/retailer if a
replacement key or additional
key is needed.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys
in the vehicle, you may have to
damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑16 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry
Canada.
Changes or modifications to
this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
If there is a decrease in the RKE
operating range:
.
Check the distance. The
transmitter may be too far from
the vehicle.
.
Check the location. Other
vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
Keys, Doors and Windows
.
Check the transmitter's battery.
See “Battery Replacement” later
in this section.
.
If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your
dealer/retailer or a qualified
technician for service.
when Q is pressed again within
five seconds. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑40
for additional information.
Pressing Q may arm the
content theft‐deterrent system.
See Anti-Theft Alarm System on
page 2‑12.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter functions work up to
60 m (195 feet) away from the
vehicle.
There are other conditions which
can affect the performance of the
transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2.
2-3
With Remote Start and Power
Liftgate Shown, Without Similar
/ (Remote Vehicle Start):
For
vehicles with this feature, see
Remote Vehicle Start on page 2‑5
for additional information.
Q (Lock):
Press to lock all
the doors.
If enabled through the Driver
Information Center (DIC), the
parking lamps flash once to indicate
locking has occurred. If enabled
through the DIC, the horn sounds
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock
only the driver door. If K is pressed
again within five seconds, all
remaining doors unlock. The interior
lamps come on and stay on for
20 seconds or until the ignition is
turned on.
If enabled through the DIC, the
parking lamps flash twice to indicate
unlocking has occurred. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑40.
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter
disarms the content theft‐deterrent
system. See Anti-Theft Alarm
System on page 2‑12.
2-4
Keys, Doors and Windows
& (Power Liftgate): Press
and hold until the liftgate begins to
move to open or close the liftgate.
The taillamps flash and a chime
sounds to indicate when the liftgate
is opening or closing.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic
Alarm): Press and release to
locate the vehicle. The parking
lamps flash and the horn sounds
three times.
Press and hold L for more than
two seconds to activate the panic
alarm. The parking lamps flash and
the horn sounds repeatedly for
30 seconds. The alarm turns off
when the ignition is moved to
ON/RUN or L is pressed again.
The ignition must be in LOCK/OFF
for the panic alarm to work.
Programming Transmitters to
the Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed
to this vehicle will work. If a
transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased and
programmed through your dealer/
retailer. When the replacement
transmitter is programmed to this
vehicle using the DIC, all remaining
transmitters must also be
reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters will no longer work
once the new transmitter is
programmed. Each vehicle can
have up to eight transmitters
programmed to it. See “Relearn
Remote Key” under Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑25 for instructions on
how to program transmitters to
this vehicle.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the REPLACE
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
message displays in the DIC.
Notice: When replacing the
battery, do not touch any of the
circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the
transmitter.
1. Separate the transmitter with a
flat, thin object inserted into the
notch on the side.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not
use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive
side facing down. Replace with a
CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back
together.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Remote Vehicle Start
This vehicle may have a remote
starting feature that starts the
engine from outside of the vehicle.
There are other conditions which
can affect the performance of the
transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2
for additional information.
/ (Remote Start): This button is
located on the RKE transmitter if the
vehicle has remote start.
Starting the Engine Using
Remote Start
Laws in some communities may
restrict the use of remote starters.
For example, some laws may
require a person using the remote
start to have the vehicle in view
when doing so. Check local
regulations for any requirements
on remote starting of vehicles.
To start the vehicle:
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle.
2. Press
Q on the RKE transmitter.
Do not use the remote start feature
if the vehicle is low on fuel. The
vehicle could run out of fuel.
3. Immediately after completing
Step 2, press and hold / until
the parking lamps flash. If the
vehicle's lights can not be seen,
press and hold / for at least
four seconds.
If the vehicle has the remote start
feature, the RKE transmitter
functions have an increased range
of operation. However, the range
may be less while the vehicle is
running.
When the vehicle starts the parking
lamps will turn on and remain on
as long as the engine is running.
The doors will be locked and the
climate control system will operate
automatically if the vehicle has the
2-5
automatic system, or at the same
setting as when the vehicle was last
turned off.
If the vehicle has an automatic
climate control system and heated
seats, the heated seats turn on
during colder outside temperatures
and shut off when the key is turned
to ON/RUN. See Heated Front
Seats on page 3‑7 or Heated
and Ventilated Front Seats on
page 3‑8 for more information.
The rear window defogger and
heated mirrors, if the vehicle has
them, turn on during colder outside
temperatures and turn off when the
key is turned to ON/RUN.
After entering the vehicle during a
remote start, insert and turn the
key to the ON/RUN position to drive
the vehicle.
If the vehicle is left running it
automatically shuts off after
10 minutes unless a time extension
has been done.
2-6
Keys, Doors and Windows
Extending Engine Run Time
To extend the engine run time by
10 minutes, repeat Steps 1 though 3
while the engine is still running.
The engine run time can only be
extended if it is the first remote start
since the vehicle has been driven.
Remote start can be extended
one time.
If the remote start procedure is
used again before the first
10 minute time frame has ended,
the first 10 minutes will immediately
expire and the second 10 minute
time frame will start.
For example, if the lock button and
then the remote start buttons are
pressed again after the vehicle has
been running for five minutes,
10 minutes are added, allowing
the engine to run for a total of
15 minutes.
A maximum of two remote starts or
remote start attempts are allowed
between ignition cycles.
After the vehicle's engine has been
started two times using the remote
start button, the ignition must be
turned on and then back off before
the remote start procedure can be
used again.
Shutting the Engine Off After a
Remote Start
To manually shut off a remote start:
.
Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle and press / until the
parking lamps turn off.
.
Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
.
Turn the ignition switch on and
then off.
Conditions in Which the
Remote Start Will Not Work
The vehicle cannot be started using
the remote start feature if the key is
in the ignition, the hood is open, or if
there is an emission control system
malfunction.
The engine turns off during a remote
start if the coolant temperature gets
too high or if the oil pressure
gets low.
Vehicles that have the remote
vehicle start feature are shipped
from the factory with the remote
vehicle start system enabled.
The system may be enabled or
disabled through the DIC if the
vehicle has DIC buttons. See
“REMOTE START” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑40 for
additional information. If the vehicle
does not have DIC buttons, see
your dealer/retailer to enable or
disable the remote start system.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Door Locks
{ WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
.
Unlocked doors can be
dangerous.
.
Passengers, especially
children, can easily open the
doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not
open it. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash is increased if the
doors are not locked. So, all
passengers should wear
safety belts properly and the
doors should be locked
whenever the vehicle
is driven.
(Continued)
.
Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock the
vehicle whenever leaving it.
Outsiders can easily enter
through an unlocked door
when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this
from happening.
To lock or unlock a door, use the
key from the outside or the door
lock from the inside.
2-7
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches
are located on the front doors.
" (Unlock): Press to unlock
the doors.
Q (Lock):
Remove the key
from the ignition and press to
lock the doors.
Delayed Locking
When locking the doors with the
power lock switch and a door or the
liftgate is open, the doors will lock
five seconds after the last door is
closed. You will hear three chimes
to signal that the delayed locking
feature is in use.
2-8
Keys, Doors and Windows
Pressing the power lock switch
twice or the lock button on the
RKE transmitter twice will override
the delayed locking feature and
immediately lock all the doors.
This feature will not operate if the
key is in the ignition.
This feature can be programmed by
using the Driver Information Center
(DIC). See “DELAY DOOR LOCK”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40.
Automatic Door Locks
Vehicles with an automatic
lock/unlock feature enable you
to program the vehicle's power
door locks. This feature can be
programmed through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40 for more information.
Lockout Protection
This feature protects you from
locking the key in the vehicle when
the key is in the ignition and a front
door is open.
If the driver side power door lock
switch is pressed when the driver's
door is open and the key is in the
ignition, all of the doors will lock and
then the driver door will unlock.
If the passenger side power door
lock switch is pressed when the
front passenger door is open and
the key is in the ignition, all of the
doors will lock and then the front
passenger door will unlock.
Safety Locks
The vehicle has rear door security
locks to prevent passengers from
opening the rear doors from the
inside.
Open the rear doors to access the
security locks on the inside edge of
each door.
To set the locks, insert a key into
the slot and turn it to the horizontal
position. The door can only be
opened from the outside with the
door unlocked. To return the door to
normal operation, turn the slot to the
vertical position.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Doors
WARNING (Continued)
Liftgate
Manual Liftgate Operation
{ WARNING
Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
any objects that pass through the
seal between the body and the
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
(Continued)
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
.
Close all of the windows.
.
Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
.
Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
.
If the vehicle is equipped with
a power liftgate, disable the
power liftgate function.
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑23.
2-9
To unlock the liftgate, use the
power door lock switch or press
the door unlock button on the
RKE transmitter twice. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3.
To open the liftgate, press the
touchpad under the liftgate handle.
The vehicle must be in P (Park) to
open the liftgate. To close the
liftgate, use the pull cup or pull strap
as an aid.
The liftgate will not open if the
battery is disconnected or has low
voltage. The liftgate will resume
operation when the battery is
reconnected and charged.
If the battery is properly connected
and has adequate voltage, and the
liftgate still will not function, the
vehicle should be taken to a
dealers/retailer for service.
2-10
Keys, Doors and Windows
Power Liftgate Operation
The vehicle may have a power
liftgate. The vehicle must be in
P (Park) to use this feature.
The power liftgate can be power
opened and closed in the
following ways:
.
The taillamps will flash and a chime
will sound when the power liftgate
is used.
Pressing the buttons or touchpad a
second time while the liftgate is
moving reverses the direction.
Press and hold the power liftgate
button on the RKE transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on
page 2‑3 for more information.
{ WARNING
You or others could be injured if
caught in the path of the power
liftgate. Make sure there is no one
in the way of the liftgate as it is
opening and closing.
Notice: If you open the liftgate
without checking for overhead
obstructions such as a garage
door, you could damage the
liftgate or the liftgate glass.
Always check to make sure the
area above and behind the liftgate
is clear before opening it.
Power Liftgate Button near
Liftgate Latch
.
Press the liftgate button on the
center console.
.
Press the touchpad on the
outside liftgate handle.
The liftgate can also be closed by
pressing the power liftgate button
next to the liftgate latch. Press the
button a second time during liftgate
operation to reverse that operation.
The power liftgate may be
temporarily disabled under extreme
temperatures or under low battery
conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate
can still be operated manually.
Keys, Doors and Windows
If the transmission is shifted out of
P (Park) while the power function is
in progress, the liftgate power
function will continue to completion.
If the transmission is shifted out of
P (Park) and the vehicle accelerates
before the power liftgate latches
closed, the liftgate may reverse to
the open position. Cargo could fall
out of the vehicle. Always make
sure the power liftgate is closed and
latched before you drive away.
If you power open the liftgate and
the liftgate support struts have lost
pressure, the lights will flash and a
chime will sound. The liftgate will
stay open temporarily, then slowly
close. See your dealer/retailer for
service before using the liftgate if
this occurs.
Obstacle Detection Features
A warning chime will sound and the
liftgate will automatically reverse
direction to the full closed or open
position if the liftgate encounters an
obstacle during a power open or
2-11
close cycle. After removing the
obstruction, the power liftgate
operation can be used again.
closed manually. Do not force the
liftgate open or closed during a
power cycle.
If the liftgate comes across more
obstacles on the same power cycle,
the power function deactivates, and
you must manually open or close
the liftgate. A message displays,
LIFTGATE OPEN, to indicate that
the liftgate is open. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑25 for more information.
After removing the obstructions,
manually open the liftgate to the full
open position or close the liftgate to
the fully closed and latched position.
The liftgate resumes normal power
operation.
Manual Operation of Power
Liftgate
The vehicle has pinch sensors
located on the side edges of the
liftgate. If an object is caught
between the liftgate and the body
and presses against this sensor, the
liftgate will reverse direction and
open fully. The liftgate will remain
open until it is activated again or
To change the liftgate to manual
operation, press the switch on the
center console to the OFF position.
With the power liftgate disabled and
all of the doors unlocked, the liftgate
can be manually opened and
closed.
2-12
Keys, Doors and Windows
To open the liftgate, press the
touchpad on the handle on the
outside of the liftgate and lift the
gate open. To close the liftgate, use
the pull cup to lower the liftgate and
close. The liftgate latch will power
close. Always close the liftgate
before driving.
If the RKE button or the power close
button on the liftgate is pressed
while power operation is disabled,
the lights will flash three times, but
the liftgate will not move.
It is not recommended that you
drive with the liftgate open.
However, if you must drive with the
liftgate open, the liftgate should be
set to manual operation by pressing
the OFF switch on the center
console.
When the door is closed, the
security light stops flashing and
stays on solid for approximately
30 seconds. The content theft
deterrent alarm is not armed
until the security light goes off.
Vehicle Security
Vehicle theft is big business,
especially in some cities. This
vehicle has theft-deterrent features,
however, they do not make it
impossible to steal.
If the delayed locking feature is
active, the alarm is not activated
until all doors are closed and the
security light goes off.
Anti-Theft Alarm System
On vehicles with an anti-theft alarm
system, to activate the system:
.
Press Q on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter or the
power door lock switch when
any door is open.
.
Press Q when the driver door is
closed. The security light comes
on solid for approximately
30 seconds and then goes off.
The content theft deterrent alarm
is not armed until the security
light goes off.
The theft-deterrent system will not
activate if the doors are locked with
the vehicle's key or the manual
door lock.
The security light flashes.
Keys, Doors and Windows
If a locked door is opened without
using the RKE transmitter, a
ten second pre-alarm occurs.
The horn chirps and the lights
flash. If the key is not placed in
the ignition and turned to START
or the door is not unlocked by
pressing Q during the ten second
pre-alarm, the alarm goes off.
The headlamps flash and the horn
sounds for about 30 seconds, then
turns off to save the battery power.
The vehicle can be started with the
correct ignition key if the alarm has
been set off.
To avoid setting off the alarm by
accident:
.
.
Lock the vehicle with the door
key after the doors are closed.
Unlock the door with the RKE
transmitter. Unlocking a door any
other way sets off the alarm if
the system has been armed.
Press K or place the key in the
ignition and turn it to START to turn
off the alarm.
2-13
Testing the Alarm
Immobilizer
To test the alarm:
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑16 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry
Canada.
1. From inside the vehicle, lower
the driver side window and open
the driver door.
2. Press
Q.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the
door and wait for the security
light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the
window, unlock the door with the
manual door lock and open the
door. This should set off the
alarm.
If the alarm does not sound when it
should, but the vehicle's headlamps
flash, check to see if the horn
works. The horn fuse may be blown.
To replace the fuse, see Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 10‑31.
If the alarm does not sound or the
vehicle's headlamps do not flash,
see your dealer/retailer for service.
Immobilizer Operation
This vehicle has PASS-Key® III+
(Personalized Automotive Security
System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive
theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed
when the key is removed from the
ignition.
The system is automatically
disarmed when the key is turned to
ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or
START from the LOCK/OFF
position.
2-14
Keys, Doors and Windows
You do not have to manually arm or
disarm the system.
The security light comes on if
there is a problem with arming or
disarming the theft-deterrent
system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system
senses an incorrect key, the vehicle
does not start. Anyone using a
trial-and-error method to start the
vehicle will be discouraged because
of the high number of electrical
key codes.
If the engine does not start and the
security light on the instrument
panel comes on when trying to start
the vehicle, there may be a problem
with your theft-deterrent system.
Turn the ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and
the key appears to be undamaged,
try another ignition key and check
the fuses. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 10‑31 for
additional information. If the engine
still does not start with the other key,
the vehicle needs service. If the
vehicle does start, the first key may
be faulty. See your dealer/retailer
who can service the PASS-Key® III+
to have a new key made. In an
emergency, contact Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 13‑6.
®
It is possible for the PASS-Key III+
decoder to learn the transponder
value of a new or replacement key.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed
to the vehicle. The following
procedure is for programming
additional keys only. If all the
currently programmed keys are lost
or do not operate, you must see
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith
who can service PASS-Key® III+ to
have keys made and programmed
to the system.
See your dealer/retailer or a
locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key
blank that is cut exactly as the
ignition key that operates the
system.
To program the new additional key:
1. Verify that the new key has
a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the already programmed
key in the ignition and start the
engine. If the engine does not
start, see your dealer/retailer for
service.
Keys, Doors and Windows
3. After the engine has started,
turn the key to LOCK/OFF,
and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed
and turn it to the ON/RUN
position within five seconds of
the original key being turned to
the LOCK/OFF position.
The security light turns off once
the key has been programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if
additional keys are to be
programmed.
If the PASS-Key® III+ key is lost or
damaged, see your dealer/retailer
or a locksmith to have a new
key made.
The SERVICE THEFT
DETERRENT SYSTEM message
displays on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) when there is a
problem with the theft-deterrent
system. See Anti-Theft Alarm
System Messages on page 5‑37
for additional information.
Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the theft
deterrent system in the vehicle.
2-15
Exterior Mirrors
Convex Mirrors
{ WARNING
A convex mirror can make things,
like other vehicles, look farther
away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane,
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
2-16
Keys, Doors and Windows
Power Mirrors
To adjust each mirror:
1. Press (A) or (B) to select the
driver or passenger side mirror.
For vehicles with outside power
foldaway mirrors:
2. Press one of the four arrows
located on the control pad to
adjust the mirror.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so
that a little of the vehicle and the
area behind it can be seen.
4. Press either (A) or (B) again to
deselect the mirror.
Controls for the outside power
mirrors are located on the driver
door armrest.
Folding Mirrors
For vehicles with manual folding
mirrors, fold the mirrors inward
to prevent damage when going
through an automatic car wash.
To fold, push the mirror toward the
vehicle. Push the mirror outward to
return it to the original position.
The controls for power foldaway
mirrors are located on the driver
door armrest.
1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out
to the driving position.
2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to
the folded position.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Resetting the Power Foldaway
Mirrors
Reset the power foldaway mirrors if:
.
The mirrors are accidentally
obstructed while folding.
.
They are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded.
.
The mirrors vibrate at normal
driving speeds.
Fold and unfold the mirrors one time
using the mirror controls to reset
them to their normal position.
A popping noise may be heard
during the resetting of the power
foldaway mirrors. This sound is
normal after a manual folding
operation.
2-17
Automatic Dimming Feature
Park Tilt Mirrors
The driver outside mirror adjusts for
the glare of the headlamps behind
you. See Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror on page 2‑18 for
information on how to turn this
feature on.
If the vehicle has the memory
package, the outside mirrors have a
park tilt feature. This feature tilts the
outside mirrors to a preselected
position when the vehicle is in
R (Reverse). This allows the driver
to view the curb for parallel parking.
Turn Signal Indicator
The vehicle may have a turn signal
indicator lamp that is built into the
mirror housing. The turn signal lamp
flashes with the use of the vehicle's
turn signal and hazard flashers.
Heated Mirrors
For vehicles with heated mirrors:
< (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to heat the mirrors.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8‑1 for more
information.
The passenger and/or driver mirror
returns to its original position
when the vehicle is shifted out
of R (Reverse), or the ignition is
turned off or to OFF/LOCK.
This feature can be turned on or
off through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑40
for more information.
2-18
Keys, Doors and Windows
Interior Mirrors
O (On/Off): Press to turn the
dimming feature on or off.
Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror
The vehicle may also have a Rear
Vision Camera (RVC). See Rear
Vision Camera (RVC) on page 9‑36
for more information.
The vehicle has an automatic
dimming inside rearview mirror.
Automatic dimming reduces the
glare from the headlamps of the
vehicle behind you. The dimming
feature comes on and the indicator
light illuminates each time the
ignition is turned to start.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three
additional control buttons located at
the bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer/retailer for more information
about OnStar® and how to
subscribe to it. See the OnStar®
owner guide for more information
about the services OnStar®
provides.
If the vehicle has RVC, the O
button for turning the dimming
feature on or off will not be
available.
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.
Windows
{ WARNING
Leaving children, helpless adults,
or pets in a vehicle with the
windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by
the extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a
child, a helpless adult, or a pet
alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-19
WARNING (Continued)
They could operate the power
windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function and
they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a
closing window. Do not leave
keys in a vehicle with children.
Power Windows
{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the keys is dangerous for many
reasons, children or others could
be badly injured or even killed.
(Continued)
When there are children in the
rear seat use the window lockout
button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
Uplevel shown, base similar
The power window controls are
located on each of the side doors.
The driver door also has switches
that control the passenger and
rear windows. The power windows
work with the ignition in ACC/
ACCESSORY, ON/RUN or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9‑19.
Press the switch to lower the
window. Pull up on the front edge of
the switch to raise the window.
2-20
Keys, Doors and Windows
Express-Up/Express-Down
Windows
Programming the Power
Windows
A window with the express‐up/down
feature allows it to be raised or
lowered without holding the switch.
Press or pull the window switch fully
and release it to activate the
express feature. The express mode
can be canceled by pressing or
pulling the switch.
If the battery on the vehicle has
been recharged, disconnected,
or replaced, windows with the
express-up feature need to be
reprogrammed for this feature to
work. To program the window:
1. Close all doors with the ignition
in the ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/
RUN position, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is
active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9‑19.
2. Press and continue to hold the
window switch until the window
is fully open.
3. Pull up and hold the window
switch to close the window.
Continue to hold it briefly after
the window is fully closed.
4. Repeat for each window that has
the express-up feature.
Anti-Pinch Feature
The anti-pinch feature is on
windows with the express-up
feature. If an object is in the way of
the window as it is express-closing,
or in certain weather conditions like
severe icing, the window will stop
and open to a factory preset
position. The window functions
normally once the obstruction is
removed.
Window Lockout
o (Window Lockout): The window
lockout switch is located with the
power window switches on the
driver door armrest. This feature
prevents the rear windows from
being operated, except from the
driver position. Press the switch to
turn the lockout feature on or off.
An indicator light will come on to
show the lockout feature is on.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Sun Visors
Pull the sun visor down to block
glare. Detach the sun visor from the
center mount and slide it along the
rod from side-to-side to cover the
driver or passenger side of the front
window. Swing the sun visor to the
side to cover the side window.
It can be moved along the rod from
side-to-side in this position also.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
The vehicle has lighted visor vanity
mirrors on both the driver and
passenger sun visors. Pull the sun
visor down and lift the mirror cover
to turn the lamps on.
2-21
Roof
Sunroof
The ignition must be in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY to operate the
sunroof and power sunshade. See
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 9‑19
The vehicle may have a sunroof
over the front seats and a rear
sunroof over the second row seats.
The rear sunroof does not open.
The switch to operate the front
sunroof is on the headliner above
the rearview mirror.
Do not keep the sunroof open for
long periods of time while the
vehicle is not in use. Debris can
collect in the tracks, damage the
sunroof operation and plug the
water draining system.
Vent: From the closed position,
press and hold the front of the
switch to vent the sunroof. Press
and hold the rear of the switch to
close the sunroof.
2-22
Keys, Doors and Windows
Express-open/Express-close:
From the closed position, press and
release the rear of the switch to
express-open the sunroof. Press
and release the front of the switch to
express-close the sunroof.
Rear Power Sunshade
On vehicles with a rear power
sunshade, the switch is on the
headliner above the rearview mirror.
To open the rear sunshade, located
over the second row seats, press
and release the rear of the switch.
Press and release the front of the
switch to close the sunshade.
Do not keep the sunroof open for
long periods of time while the
vehicle is not in use. Debris can
collect in the tracks, damage the
sunroof operation, and plug the
water draining system.
The front sunshade must be opened
and closed manually. Push up on
the sunshade handle to open the
sunshade.
Manual Sunshades
On a vehicle with only manual
sunshades, press the button on the
sunshade handle to release it and
guide it back. Pull the sunshade
forward until it latches to close it.
Notice: The rear sunshade could
be damaged if you attempt to
open or close it manually. Do not
manually open or close the rear
sunshade.
Seats and Restraints
Seats and
Restraints
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . .
Safety System Check . . . . . . . .
Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . .
Head Restraints
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front Seats
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-3
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Rear Seats
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Safety Belts
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-13
3-17
3-22
3-27
3-28
3-28
3-28
3-29
Airbag System
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-31
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-42
Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-43
Replacing Airbag System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3-1
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child Restraint Systems . . . . .
Where to Put the Restraint . . .
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . .
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing Child Restraints
(Right Front
Passenger Seat) . . . . . . . . . . .
3-44
3-47
3-49
3-51
3-53
3-59
3-60
3-62
3-2
Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
The vehicle's front seats have
adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of the restraint is at the same
height as the top of the occupant's
head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
1. Pull the head restraint up to
raise it. To lower the head
restraint, press the release
button, located on the head
restraint post on the top of the
seatback, while you push the
head restraint down.
2. Push down on the head restraint
after the button is released to
make sure that it is locked in
place.
Seats and Restraints
Front Seats
Power Seat Adjustment
If the vehicle has power seats, the
controls are located on the outboard
side of the seats.
Move the seat forward or rearward
by sliding the power seat
adjustment control (A) forward or
rearward.
The vehicle may have additional
features to adjust the power seat:
.
Driver Seat with Power Seat
Control, Power Recline,
and Power Lumbar shown
A. Power Seat Adjustment Control
B. Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑5.
C. Lumbar Adjustment on
page 3‑4.
Raise or lower the entire seat
by moving the power seat
adjustment control (A) up
or down.
.
Raise or lower the front part of
the seat cushion by moving the
front of the control up or down.
.
Raise or lower the rear part of
the seat cushion by moving the
rear of the control up or down.
The vehicle may have a memory
function which allows seat settings
to be saved and recalled. See
“Memory Seat and Mirrors” later in
this section for more information.
3-3
Memory Seat and Mirrors
On vehicles with the memory
package, the controls are located on
the driver door.
1: Saves the seating position for
driver 1.
2: Saves the seating position for
driver 2.
S:
Recalls the easy exit position.
To save a position in memory:
1. Adjust the driver seat, including
the seatback recliner, both
outside mirrors, and the power
steering column to a comfortable
position.
See Power Mirrors on
page 2‑16 for more information.
Not all vehicles will have the
ability to save and recall the
mirror positions.
2. Press and hold button 1 until
two beeps sound to let you
know that the position has been
stored.
3-4
Seats and Restraints
A second seating and mirror
position can be programmed by
repeating the above steps and
pressing button 2.
To recall the memory positions, the
vehicle must be in P (Park). Press
and release either button 1 or 2.
The seat, outside mirrors, and
power steering column will move
to the position previously stored.
You will hear a single beep.
If the RKE transmitter is used to
enter the vehicle and the remote
recall memory feature has been
turned on, automatic seat and
mirror movement will occur.
See “MEMORY SEAT RECALL”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40 for more information.
To stop recall movement of the
memory feature at any time, press
one of the power seat controls,
memory buttons, or power mirror
buttons.
If something has blocked the driver
seat while recalling a memory
position, the driver seat recall may
stop working. If this happens,
remove the obstruction and press
the appropriate control for the area
that is not recalling for two seconds.
Try pressing the memory button
again. If the memory position is still
not being recalled, see your dealer/
retailer for service.
Lumbar Adjustment
Manual Lumbar
Easy Exit Seat
S : With the vehicle in P (Park),
press the exit button. You will hear
a single beep. The driver seat will
move back into the exit position.
If the easy exit seat feature has
been turned on in the Driver
Information Center (DIC), automatic
seat movement will occur when the
key is removed from the ignition.
For programming information,
see Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40 for more information.
On vehicles with this feature, the
handle is located on the inboard
side of the seatback.
Turn the handle rearward to
decrease lumbar support. Turn the
handle forward to increase lumbar
support.
The lumbar support may need to be
adjusted when changing the seating
position.
Seats and Restraints
Power Lumbar
Reclining Seatbacks
On vehicles with power lumbar, the
controls used to operate this feature
are located on the outboard side of
the seats. See “Power Lumbar”
under Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑3 for more information.
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
To increase or decrease lumbar
support, press and hold the front or
rear of the control (C).
Release the control when the
seatback reaches the desired level
of lumbar support.
The lumbar support may need to be
adjusted when changing the seating
position.
3-5
{ WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver's seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
{ WARNING
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
On vehicles with seats that have
manual reclining seatbacks, the
lever used to operate them is
located on the outboard side of
the seat.
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, then release
the lever to lock the seatback in
place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
3-6
Seats and Restraints
To return the seatback to an upright
position:
1. Lift the lever without applying
pressure to the seatback and
the seatback will return to the
upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
On vehicles with seats that have
power reclining seatbacks, the
control used to recline them is
located on the outboard side of the
seat behind the power seat control.
See “Reclining Seatbacks” under
Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑3 for more information.
.
To recline the seatback, tilt the
top of the control (B) rearward.
.
To bring the seatback forward,
tilt the top of the control forward.
{ WARNING
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job when reclined like this.
WARNING (Continued)
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly.
The shoulder belt cannot do its
job because it will not be against
your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash, you could
go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job
either. In a crash, the belt could
go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at
your pelvic bones. This could
cause serious internal injuries.
(Continued)
Do not have a seatback reclined if
the vehicle is moving.
Seats and Restraints
Heated Front Seats
{ WARNING
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures.
To reduce the risk of burns,
people with such a condition
should use care when using the
seat heater, especially for long
periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a
blanket, cushion, cover or similar
item. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. An
overheated seat heater may
cause a burn or may damage
the seat.
On vehicles with heated front seats,
the controls are located on the
center console. To operate the
heated seats the engine must be
running.
I (Heated Seatback): Press to
turn on the heated seatback.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback):
Press to turn on or off the heated
seat and seatback.
The light on the button will come
on to indicate that the feature is on.
Each time the button is pressed,
the temperature settings change
from high, to medium, to low, to off.
Indicator lights above the button will
show the level of heat selected:
three for high, two for medium, and
one for low.
3-7
The passenger seat may take
longer to heat up.
If the vehicle has remote vehicle
start and is started using the RKE
transmitter, the front heated seats
will be turned on to the high setting
if it is cold outside. See “Remote
Vehicle Start” under Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3. When
the ignition is turned on, the heated
seat feature will turn off. To turn the
heated seat feature back on, press
the desired button.
3-8
Seats and Restraints
Heated and Ventilated
Front Seats
{ WARNING
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures.
To reduce the risk of burns,
people with such a condition
should use care when using the
seat heater, especially for long
periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such
as a blanket, cushion, cover
or similar item. This may cause
the seat heater to overheat.
An overheated seat heater may
cause a burn or may damage
the seat.
On vehicles with the heated and
ventilated seat feature, the controls
are located on the front doors near
the door handle.
H (Ventilated Seat):
Press to
ventilate the entire seat.
Rear Seats
This symbol appears on the climate
control display to indicate that the
feature is on.
z (Heated Seat and Seatback):
Press to heat the entire seat.
This symbol appears on the climate
control display to indicate that the
feature is on.
For either feature press the button
once for the highest setting. With
each press of the switch, the seat
changes to the next lower setting,
and then the off setting. The lights
indicate three for the highest setting
and one for the lowest.
The heated and ventilated seats are
canceled after the ignition is turned
off. To use the heated and ventilated
seat feature after the vehicle is
started, you will need to press the
appropriate seat button again.
A. Seat Adjustment Handle
B. Reclining Seatback Strap
C. Sliding Seat Lever
Seats and Restraints
Entering and Exiting the
Third Row
3. Place folding armrests in the
upright position.
4. Ensure that the safety belt is
unfastened and in the stowed
position.
{ WARNING
Using the third row seating
position while the second row is
folded, or folded and tumbled,
could cause injury in a sudden
stop or crash. Be sure to return
the seat to the passenger seating
position. Push and pull on the
seat to make sure it is locked into
place.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
3-9
5. Pull the sliding seat lever (C)
forward and move the seatback
forward. The seat cushion will
fold, and the entire seat will slide
forward.
To access the third row:
1. Remove objects on the floor in
front of or on the second row
seat, or in the seat tracks on the
floor.
2. Move the front center console
armrest completely forward.
See Center Console Storage
on page 4‑1.
Returning the Seat to the
Seating Position
To return the second row seat to its
normal seating position:
1. Remove objects on the floor
behind the second row seat or in
the seat tracks on the floor.
2. Pull the seatback rearward until
it is locked in place.
3. Slide the seat rearward by
pushing on the seatback until it
is locked into place.
3-10
Seats and Restraints
4. Push down on the rear of the
seat cushion until it is locked in
place.
5. Push and pull on the seatback
and seat cushion to make sure
they are locked in place.
6. Check that the safety belt is not
under the seat cushion.
Reclining the Seatbacks
To recline the seatback:
1. Leaning forward in the seat, pull
the reclining seatback strap (B).
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, then release
the strap to lock the seatback in
place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
Folding the Rear Seat
To fold the second row seats:
1. Remove anything on or under
the seat.
2. Place the armrest in the upright
position, and unfasten the
safety belt.
3. Pull forward on the reclining
seatback strap (B) and push
down on the seatback.
If the headrest touches the front
seat, slide the second row seat
rearward.
To return the seatback to the
seating position, lift the upper
corner of the seatback and push it
rearward until it locks into place.
Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
Adjusting the Seats
To adjust the second row seats, pull
outward on the seat adjustment
handle (A). Slide the seat forward or
rearward to the desired position.
Release the handle and push and
pull on the seat to make sure it is
locked.
Seats and Restraints
Third Row Seats
{ WARNING
To fold the seatback:
1. Remove anything on or under
the seat.
Using the third row seating
position while the second row
is folded, or pushed forward in
the entry position, could cause
injury in a sudden stop or crash.
Be sure to return the seat to the
passenger seating position. Push
and pull on the seat to make sure
it is locked into place.
The third row seats can be folded
forward or removed.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
3-11
3. Pull up on the release lever
located on the back of the seat.
The headrest moves forward
automatically.
2. Disconnect the rear safety belt
mini-latch, using a key in the slot
on the mini-buckle, let the belt
retract into the headliner. Stow
the mini-latch in the holder
located in the headliner.
4. Push the seatback forward to
lay flat.
3-12
Seats and Restraints
To return the seatback to the
seating position:
1. Raise the seatback into place by
using the pullstrap from the rear
of the vehicle, or by pushing it
into place from inside the
vehicle.
2. The headrest must be locked
into place before sitting in
the seat.
{ WARNING
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked in place.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is improperly
routed, not properly attached,
or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could
be seriously injured. After raising
the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts
are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
4. Reconnect the center safety belt
mini-latch to the mini-buckle.
Do not let it twist.
5. Pull on the safety belt to be sure
the mini-latch is secure.
Removing the Third Row Seats
1. Remove the cargo management
system, if it is in the vehicle.
See Cargo Management System
on page 4‑3.
2. Remove anything on or under
the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
3. Fold the seatback down. See
“Folding the Seatback” earlier in
this section.
4. Remove the rear bolts located
on the floor on each side of
the seat.
5. Remove the seat by tilting it
slightly upward, and then pulling
it out of the rear of the vehicle in
one motion.
6. Replace the bolts in the floor
holes for storage.
Installing the Third Row Seats
1. Before installing the seat the
seatback must be folded
forward. See “Folding the
Seatback” earlier in this section.
Seats and Restraints
The seats must be placed in
the proper locations to attach
correctly. The wider seat must
be installed on the driver side
and the narrower seat on the
passenger side. Remove the
bolts from the holes in the floor
before installing the seats.
2. Place the seat on the vehicle
floor so that the front seat hooks
are on the vehicle bars.
3. Reinstall the bolts, and torque to
55 Y (41 lb ft). Pull up on the
seat to make sure it is locked in
place.
4. Raise the seatback to its upright
position. Push and pull on the
seatback to make sure it is
locked into place.
5. Push the headrest up into
position. Push and pull on the
headrest to make sure it is
locked into place.
6. Reconnect the center safety belt
mini-latch to the mini-buckle.
Do not let it twist.
Safety Belts
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts
properly. It also describes some
things not to do with safety belts.
{ WARNING
Do not let anyone ride where
a safety belt cannot be worn
properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing
safety belts, the injuries can be
much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be
ejected from the vehicle. You
and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be,
if you are buckled up. Always
fasten your safety belt, and check
that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
3-13
{ WARNING
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that
is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using
a safety belt properly.
This vehicle has indicators as a
reminder to buckle the safety belts.
See Safety Belt Reminders on
page 5‑16 for additional
information.
3-14
Seats and Restraints
In most states and in all Canadian
provinces, the law requires wearing
safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in
a crash. If you do have a crash,
you do not know if it will be a
serious one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything,
you go as fast as it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some
crashes can be so serious that even
buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people
who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety
belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose
it is just a seat on wheels.
Seats and Restraints
Get it up to speed. Then stop the
vehicle. The rider does not stop.
The person keeps going until
stopped by something. In a real
vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
3-15
3-16
Seats and Restraints
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down
as the vehicle does. You get more
time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety
belts make such good sense.
A: You could be — whether you are
wearing a safety belt or not. But
your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is
much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a
safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
should I have to wear safety
belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of
them. Whether or not an airbag
is provided, all occupants still
have to buckle up to get the
most protection. That is true not
only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other
collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I
never drive far from home,
why should I wear safety
belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver,
but if you are in a crash — even
one that is not your fault — you
and your passenger(s) can be
hurt. Being a good driver does
not protect you from things
beyond your control, such as
bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within
40 km (25 miles) of home.
And the greatest number of
serious injuries and deaths
occur at speeds of less than
65 km/h (40 mph).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Seats and Restraints
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly
This section is only for people of
adult size.
First, before you or your
passenger(s) wear a safety belt,
there is important information you
should know.
Be aware that there are special
things to know about safety belts
and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and
infants. If a child will be riding in
the vehicle, see Older Children on
page 3‑44 or Infants and Young
Children on page 3‑47. Follow
those rules for everyone's
protection.
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that
unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety
belts.
3-17
If you slid under it, the belt would
apply force on your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are
best able to take belt restraining
forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a
sudden stop or crash.
Sit up straight and always keep
your feet on the floor in front of you.
The lap part of the belt should be
worn low and snug on the hips,
just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong
pelvic bones and you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt.
3-18
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING
Q: What is wrong with this?
You can be seriously hurt if your
shoulder belt is too loose. In a
crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase
injury. The shoulder belt should fit
snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose.
It will not give as much
protection this way.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will
not give nearly as much
protection this way.
Seats and Restraints
{ WARNING
Q: What is wrong with this?
You can be seriously hurt if your
lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
3-19
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured if
your belt is buckled in the wrong
place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there,
not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt
into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong
buckle.
3-20
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING
Q: What is wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured if
your belt goes over an armrest
like this. The belt would be much
too high. In a crash, you can slide
under the belt. The belt force
would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic
bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under
the arm. It should be worn over
the shoulder at all times.
Seats and Restraints
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured if
you wear the shoulder belt under
your arm. In a crash, your body
would move too far forward,
which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the
belt would apply too much force
to the ribs, which are not as
strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the
chest.
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is behind the body.
3-21
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured by
not wearing the lap-shoulder belt
properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder
belt. Your body could move too
far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
3-22
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured by a
twisted belt. In a crash, you would
not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it
can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across
the body.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt.
If you are using a rear seating
position with a detachable safety
belt and the safety belt is not
attached, see Third Row Seats on
page 3‑11 for instruction on
reconnecting the safety belt to the
mini-buckle.
The following instructions explain
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
adjustable, so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see “Seats”
in the Index.
Seats and Restraints
3-23
5. If equipped with a shoulder belt
height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you.
See “Shoulder Belt Height
Adjustment” later in this section
for instructions on use and
important safety information.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let it
get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
you pull the belt across you very
quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
4. Pull up on the latch plate to
make sure it is secure. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 3‑28.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull
up on the shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull the
stitching on the safety belt
through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
3-24
Seats and Restraints
Before a door is closed, be sure the
safety belt is out of the way. If a
door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height adjuster for the driver and
right front passenger seating
positions.
To unlatch the belt, push the button
on the buckle. The belt should
return to its stowed position. Slide
the latch plate up the safety belt
webbing when the safety belt is not
in use. The latch plate should rest
on the stitching on the safety belt,
near the guide loop on the side wall.
Adjust the height so that the
shoulder portion of the belt is
centered on the shoulder. The belt
should be away from the face and
neck, but not falling off of the
shoulder. Improper shoulder belt
height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a
crash.
To move it down, push down on the
button (A) and move the height
adjuster to the desired position.
You can move the height adjuster
up by pushing up on the shoulder
belt guide.
After the adjuster is set to the
desired position, try to move it down
without pushing the button to make
sure it has locked into position.
Seats and Restraints
Safety Belt Pretensioners
This vehicle has safety belt
pretensioners for the front outboard
occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
are part of the safety belt assembly.
They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal, near
frontal, or rear crash if the threshold
conditions for pretensioner
activation are met. And, for vehicles
with side impact airbags, safety belt
pretensioners can help tighten the
safety belts in a side crash or a
rollover event.
Pretensioners work only once. If the
pretensioners activate in a crash,
they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the
vehicle's safety belt system. See
Replacing Safety Belt System Parts
After a Crash on page 3‑29.
3-25
Here is how to install a comfort
guide to the safety belt:
Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides
This vehicle may have rear shoulder
belt comfort guides. If not, they are
available through your dealer/
retailer. The guides may provide
added safety belt comfort for older
children who have outgrown booster
seats and for some adults. When
installed and properly adjusted, the
comfort guide positions the shoulder
belt away from the neck and head.
Outboard Positions
1. For the outboard positions,
remove the guide from its
storage clip on the interior body.
For the third row center
position, locate the comfort
guide which is located in a
storage pocket, at the top of
the seat, under the headrest on
the driver's side of the vehicle.
3-26
Seats and Restraints
To access the comfort guide,
you will first need to move the
headrest forward by pulling on
the handle behind the seatback.
The comfort guide will now be
accessible.
2. Place the guide over the belt
and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
Third Row Center Position
Pull the comfort guide out of its
storage location and then return
the headrest to its upright
position.
3. Be sure that the belt is not
twisted and it lies flat. The
elastic cord must be under the
belt and the guide on top.
Seats and Restraints
3-27
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could
be seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
Safety belts work for everyone,
including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they do not
wear safety belts.
4. Buckle, position, and release
the safety belt as described
previously in this section. Make
sure that the shoulder belt
crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort
guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can
be removed from the guide. Slide
the guide into its storage location or
on its storage clip.
A pregnant woman should wear
a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
portion should be worn as low
as possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy.
3-28
Seats and Restraints
The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for
anyone, the key to making safety
belts effective is wearing them
properly.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long
enough, your dealer/retailer will
order you an extender. When you
go in to order it, take the heaviest
coat you will wear, so the extender
will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let
someone else use it, and use it only
for the seat it is made to fit. The
extender has been designed for
adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, attach it to
the regular safety belt. For more
information, see the instruction
sheet that comes with the extender.
Safety System Check
Safety Belt Care
Now and then, check that the safety
belt reminder light, safety belts,
buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working
properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job. See your dealer/
retailer to have it repaired. Torn or
frayed safety belts may not protect
you in a crash. They can rip apart
under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Keep belts clean and dry.
Make sure the safety belt reminder
light is working. See Safety Belt
Reminders on page 5‑16 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
See Safety Belt Care on
page 3‑28.
{ WARNING
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Seats and Restraints
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts After a
Crash
{ WARNING
A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle.
A damaged safety belt system
may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure the
safety belt systems are working
properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.
After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that
were used during any crash may
have been stressed or damaged.
See your dealer/retailer to have the
safety belt assemblies inspected or
replaced.
Airbag System
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Have the safety belt pretensioners
checked if the vehicle has been in a
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start the vehicle
or while you are driving. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5‑16.
3-29
The vehicle has the following
airbags:
.
A frontal airbag for the driver.
.
A frontal airbag for the right front
passenger.
.
A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the driver.
.
A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the right front
passenger.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the driver,
passenger seated directly
behind the driver, and the third
row outboard passenger
position.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the right
front passenger, passenger
seated directly behind the right
front passenger, and the third
row outboard passenger
position.
3-30
Seats and Restraints
All of the airbags in the vehicle will
have the word AIRBAG embossed
in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the middle
part of the steering wheel for the
driver and on the instrument panel
for the right front passenger.
With seat-mounted side impact
airbags, the word AIRBAG will
appear on the side of the seatback
closest to the door.
With roof-rail airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear along the
headliner or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement
the protection provided by safety
belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce
the risk of injury from the force of an
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:
{ WARNING
You can be severely injured or
killed in a crash if you are not
wearing your safety belt — even if
you have airbags. Airbags are
designed to work with safety
belts, but do not replace them.
Also, airbags are not designed to
deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only
restraint. See When Should an
Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑33.
Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance
of hitting things inside the vehicle
or being ejected from it. Airbags
are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. Everyone in your
vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
{ WARNING
Airbags inflate with great force,
faster than the blink of an eye.
Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it
inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would
be if you were sitting on the edge
of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in
position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.
Seats and Restraints
Where Are the Airbags?
{ WARNING
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag
when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection
for adults and older children, but
not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle's safety belt
system nor its airbag system
is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always
secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see
Older Children on page 3‑44 or
Infants and Young Children on
page 3‑47.
3-31
There is an airbag readiness light
on the instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5‑16 for
more information.
The driver frontal airbag is in the
middle of the steering wheel.
3-32
Seats and Restraints
The right front passenger frontal
airbag is in the instrument panel on
the passenger side.
Driver Side shown, Passenger
Side similar
The seat-mounted side impact
airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are in the side of the
seatbacks closest to the door.
Driver Side shown, Passenger
Side similar
The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
right front passenger, passengers
behind the driver and right front
passenger, and the third row
outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
Seats and Restraints
{ WARNING
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that
block the inflation path of a
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Never secure anything to the roof
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to
inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes to help
reduce the potential for severe
injuries mainly to the driver's or right
front passenger's head and chest.
However, they are only designed
to inflate if the impact exceeds
a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds
are used to predict how severe a
crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain
the occupants.
Whether the frontal airbags will
or should deploy is not based on
how fast your vehicle is traveling.
It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact, and how
quickly your vehicle slows down.
3-33
Frontal airbags may inflate
at different crash speeds.
For example:
.
If the vehicle hits a stationary
object, the airbags could inflate
at a different crash speed than if
the vehicle hits a moving object.
.
If the vehicle hits an object that
deforms, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object
that does not deform.
.
If the vehicle hits a narrow object
(like a pole), the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide
object (like a wall).
.
If the vehicle goes into an object
at an angle, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight
into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with
specific vehicle design.
3-34
Seats and Restraints
Frontal airbags are not intended to
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
the system's designed threshold
level. The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design.
In addition, the vehicle has
dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the
restraint according to crash severity.
The vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing
system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more
severe frontal impact. For moderate
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
inflate at a level less than full
deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags
are not intended to inflate in frontal
impacts, near-frontal impacts,
rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-rail
airbags are not intended to inflate in
rear impacts. A seat-mounted side
impact airbag is intended to deploy
on the side of the vehicle that is
struck. Both roof-rail airbags will
deploy when either side of the
vehicle is struck, or if the sensing
system predicts that the vehicle is
about to roll over, or in a severe
frontal impact.
The vehicle has seat-mounted side
impact and roof-rail airbags. See
Airbag System on page 3‑29.
Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags are intended to
inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. In addition, these roof-rail
airbags are intended to inflate
during a rollover or in a severe
frontal impact. Seat-mounted side
impact and roof-rail airbags will
inflate if the crash severity is above
In any particular crash, no one
can say whether an airbag should
have inflated simply because of
the damage to a vehicle or because
of what the repair costs were.
For frontal airbags, inflation is
determined by what the vehicle hits,
the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down.
For seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags, deployment is
determined by the location and
severity of the side impact. In a
rollover event, roof-rail airbag
deployment is determined by the
direction of the roll.
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing
system sends an electrical signal
triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
airbag causing the bag to break out
of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are
all part of the airbag module.
Frontal airbag modules are located
inside the steering wheel and
instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags,
there are airbag modules in the side
of the front seatbacks closest to
the door. For vehicles with roof-rail
airbags, there are airbag modules in
the ceiling of the vehicle, near the
side windows that have occupant
seating positions.
Seats and Restraints
How Does an Airbag
Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the steering
wheel or the instrument panel. In
moderate to severe side collisions,
even belted occupants can contact
the inside of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Frontal
airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the
occupant's upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually.
Seat‐mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags distribute the force
of the impact more evenly over the
occupant's upper body.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
are designed to help contain the
head and chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the
first and second rows. The rollover
capable roof-rail airbags are
designed to help reduce the risk of
full or partial ejection in rollover
events, although no system can
prevent all such ejections.
But airbags would not help in
many types of collisions, primarily
because the occupant's motion is
not toward those airbags. See When
Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 3‑33 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts.
3-35
What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates?
After the frontal airbags and
seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not
even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after
they deploy. Some components of
the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the
airbag modules, see What Makes
an Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑34.
The parts of the airbag that
come into contact with you may
be warm, but not too hot to
touch. There may be some
smoke and dust coming from
the vents in the deflated airbags.
3-36
Seats and Restraints
Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the
windshield or being able to steer the
vehicle, nor does it prevent people
from leaving the vehicle.
{ WARNING
When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust
could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of
asthma or other breathing trouble.
To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon
as it is safe to do so. If you have
breathing problems but cannot
get out of the vehicle after an
airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door.
If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
The vehicle has a feature that may
automatically unlock the doors, turn
on the interior lamps and hazard
warning flashers, and shut off the
fuel system after the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn off the
interior lamps and hazard warning
flashers by using the controls for
those features.
{ WARNING
A crash severe enough to inflate
the airbags may have also
damaged important functions in
the vehicle, such as the fuel
system, brake and steering
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
appears to be drivable after a
moderate crash, there may be
concealed damage that could
make it difficult to safely operate
the vehicle.
Use caution if you should attempt
to restart the engine after a crash
has occurred.
In many crashes severe enough to
inflate the airbag, windshields are
broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage
may also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
.
Airbags are designed to inflate
only once. After an airbag
inflates, you will need some
new parts for the airbag system.
If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there
to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly
other parts. The service manual
for your vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.
Seats and Restraints
.
The vehicle has a crash sensing
and diagnostic module which
records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data
Recording and Privacy on
page 13‑15 and Event Data
Recorders on page 13‑15.
.
Let only qualified technicians
work on the airbag systems.
Improper service can mean that
an airbag system will not work
properly. See your dealer/retailer
for service.
Passenger Sensing
System
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the right front
passenger position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible
on the instrument panel when the
vehicle is started.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the
symbol for on and off, are visible
during the system check. If you are
using remote start, if equipped, to
start the vehicle from a distance,
you may not see the system
check. When the system check is
complete, either the word ON or
OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will
be visible. See Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 5‑17.
3-37
The passenger sensing system
turns off the right front passenger
frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbag,
seat‐mounted side impact airbags
and the roof-rail airbags are not
affected by the passenger sensing
system.
The passenger sensing system
works with sensors that are part
of the right front passenger seat.
The sensors are designed to detect
the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right
front passenger frontal airbag
should be enabled (may inflate)
or not.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
secured in a rear seat in the correct
child restraint for their weight
and size.
3-38
Seats and Restraints
We recommend that children be
secured in a rear seat, including:
an infant or a child riding in a
rear-facing child restraint; a child
riding in a forward-facing child seat;
an older child riding in a booster
seat; and children, who are large
enough, using safety belts.
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the
airbag is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the
airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag if:
.
The right front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
.
The system determines that an
infant is present in a child
restraint.
.
A right front passenger takes
his/her weight off of the seat for
a period of time.
.
Or, if there is a critical problem
with the airbag system or the
passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front
passenger frontal airbag, the off
indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5‑17.
Seats and Restraints
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn on (may inflate) the
right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting
properly in the right front
passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing
system has allowed the airbag to be
enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the
airbag is active.
For some children, including
children in child restraints, and for
very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not
turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, depending upon
the person’s seating posture and
body build. Everyone in the
vehicle who has outgrown child
restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5‑16 for more
information, including important
safety information.
3-39
If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items
from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint
following the directions
provided by the child restraint
manufacturer and refer to
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat ) on page 3‑60 or
Securing Child Restraints (Right
Front Passenger Seat) on
page 3‑62.
3-40
Seats and Restraints
5. If, after reinstalling the child
restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
recline the vehicle seatback
and adjust the seat cushion,
if adjustable, to make sure that
the vehicle seatback is not
pushing the child restraint into
the seat cushion.
Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under
the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head
restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 3‑2.
6. Restart the vehicle.
The passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the
airbag for a child in a child
restraint depending upon the
child’s seating posture and body
build. It is better to secure the
child restraint in a rear seat.
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and
enable the right front passenger
frontal airbag:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material
from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully
upright position.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in
the right front passenger seat, but
the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting
properly in the seat. If this happens,
4. Have the person sit upright in
the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for
two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
Seats and Restraints
Additional Factors Affecting
System Operation
Safety belts help keep the
passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers
and braking, which helps the
passenger sensing system maintain
the passenger airbag status.
See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for
additional information about the
importance of proper restraint use.
A thick layer of additional material,
such as a blanket or cushion,
or aftermarket equipment such as
seat covers, seat heaters, and
seat massagers can affect how
well the passenger sensing system
operates. We recommend that
you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when
approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑42 for more information
about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
A wet seat can affect the
performance of the passenger
sensing system. Here is how:
.
.
The passenger sensing system
may turn off the passenger
airbag when liquid is soaked into
the seat. If this happens, the off
indicator will be lit, and the
airbag readiness light on the
instrument panel will also be lit.
Liquid pooled on the seat that
has not soaked in may make it
more likely that the passenger
sensing system will enable (turn
on) the passenger airbag while a
child restraint or child occupant
is on the seat. If the passenger
airbag is turned on, the on
indicator will be lit.
If the passenger seat gets wet, dry
the seat immediately. If the airbag
readiness light is lit, do not install a
child restraint or allow anyone to
occupy the seat. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5‑16 for
important safety information.
3-41
The on indicator may be lit if an
object, such as a briefcase,
handbag, grocery bag, laptop or
other electronic device, is put on
an unoccupied seat. If this is not
desired remove the object from
the seat.
{ WARNING
Stowing of articles under the
passenger seat or between the
passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the
proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
3-42
Seats and Restraints
Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle
should be serviced. There are parts
of the airbag system in several
places around the vehicle. Your
dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about
servicing the vehicle and the airbag
system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 13‑12.
{ WARNING
For up to 10 seconds after the
ignition is turned off and the
battery is disconnected, an airbag
can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you
are close to an airbag when it
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and
make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add
to or change about the vehicle
that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that
change the vehicle's frame,
bumper system, height, front end
or side sheet metal, they may
keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or
moving any parts of the front
seats, safety belts, the airbag
sensing and diagnostic module,
steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish
trim, overhead console, front
sensors, side impact sensors,
rollover sensor module, or airbag
wiring can affect the operation of
the airbag system.
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system
for the right front passenger
position, which includes sensors
that are part of the passenger
seat. The passenger sensing
system may not operate properly
if the original seat trim is
replaced with non-GM covers,
upholstery or trim, or with GM
covers, upholstery or trim
designed for a different vehicle.
Any object, such as an
aftermarket seat heater or a
comfort enhancing pad or
device, installed under or on top
of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of
the passenger sensing system.
Seats and Restraints
This could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the
passenger sensing system
from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See
Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑37.
If you have questions, call
Customer Assistance. The
phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are
in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual.
If the vehicle has rollover
roof-rail airbags, see Different
Size Tires and Wheels on
page 10‑54 for additional
important information.
Q: Because I have a disability,
I have to get my vehicle
modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my
airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call
Customer Assistance. The
phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are
in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and
the service manual have information
about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic
module and airbag wiring.
3-43
Airbag System Check
The airbag system does not need
regularly scheduled maintenance
or replacement. Make sure the
airbag readiness light is working.
See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 5‑16 for more information.
Notice: If an airbag covering is
damaged, opened, or broken, the
airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag
coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers,
have the airbag covering and/or
airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? on page 3‑34. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
3-44
Seats and Restraints
Replacing Airbag System
Parts After a Crash
If an airbag inflates, you will need to
replace airbag system parts. See
your dealer/retailer for service.
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light stays on
after the vehicle is started or comes
on when you are driving, the airbag
system may not work properly. Have
the vehicle serviced right away.
See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 5‑16 for more information.
A crash can damage the
airbag systems in your vehicle.
A damaged airbag system
may not work properly and
may not protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death.
To help make sure your airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.
Child Restraints
Older Children
Older children who have outgrown
booster seats should wear the
vehicle's safety belts.
Seats and Restraints
The manufacturer's instructions that
come with the booster seat, state
the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat
with a lap-shoulder belt until the
child passes the below fit test:
.
.
Sit all the way back on the seat.
Do the knees bend at the seat
edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
Does the shoulder belt rest on
the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If no, try using the rear safety
belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides”
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 3‑22 for more information.
If the shoulder belt still does not
rest on the shoulder, then return
to the booster seat.
.
Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
.
Can proper safety belt fit be
maintained for the length of the
trip? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Q: What is the proper way to
wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder
belt can provide. The shoulder
belt should not cross the face or
neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just
touching the top of the thighs.
3-45
This applies belt force to the
child's pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 3‑22.
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
3-46
Seats and Restraints
In a crash, children who are not
buckled up can strike other people
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.
WARNING (Continued)
{ WARNING
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear
the same safety belt. The safety
belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two
children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one
person at a time.
{ WARNING
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the
safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
(Continued)
The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
Seats and Restraints
Infants and Young
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs
protection! This includes infants
and all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and
size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety
restraints. In fact, the law in every
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the
safety belts.
Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts
offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle's
safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Every
time infants and young children ride
in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate
child restraints.
Children who are not restrained
properly can strike other people,
or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
{ WARNING
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it during a crash.
(Continued)
3-47
WARNING (Continued)
For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become
a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a
person's arms. An infant should
be secured in an appropriate
restraint.
3-48
Seats and Restraints
{ WARNING
Never do this.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also
better to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it
will go.
Q: What are the different types of
add-on child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which
are purchased by the vehicle's
owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be
sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Seats and Restraints
The restraint manufacturer's
instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular
child restraint. In addition, there
are many kinds of restraints
available for children with
special needs.
{ WARNING
To reduce the risk of neck and
head injury during a crash, infants
need complete support. This is
because an infant's neck is not
fully developed and its head
weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing child
restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest
part of an infant's body, the back
and shoulders. Infants should
always be secured in rear-facing
child restraints.
{ WARNING
A young child's hip bones are still
so small that the vehicle's regular
safety belt may not remain low
on the hip bones, as it should.
Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
always be secured in appropriate
child restraints.
3-49
Child Restraint Systems
(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat
A rear-facing infant seat (A)
provides restraint with the seating
surface against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
3-50
Seats and Restraints
Securing an Add-On Child
Restraint in the Vehicle
{ WARNING
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat
A forward-facing child seat (B)
provides restraint for the child's
body with the harness.
(C) Booster Seats
A booster seat (C) is a child restraint
designed to improve the fit of the
vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a
child to see out the window.
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured
in the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle's safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that
child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of
injury, the child restraint must be
secured in the vehicle. Child
restraint systems must be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder
belt, or by the LATCH system.
Seats and Restraints
See Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑53 for more information.
Children can be endangered in a
crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions
that come with the restraint which
may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual.
The child restraint instructions
are important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
the vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
{ WARNING
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Secure the child
properly following the instructions
that came with that child restraint.
3-51
Where to Put the
Restraint
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer
when properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
We recommend that children and
child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are
large enough, using safety belts.
3-52
Seats and Restraints
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child
restraint in the front.” This is
because the risk to the rear-facing
child is so great, if the airbag
deploys.
{ WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the
airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3‑37 for additional
information.
When securing a child restraint in
a rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the
child restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever a child restraint is
installed, be sure to secure the
child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
the vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
Seats and Restraints
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children
(LATCH System)
The LATCH system holds a child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier.
The LATCH system uses anchors in
the vehicle and attachments on the
child restraint that are made for use
with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the
vehicle's safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with
a top tether, you must also use
either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must
never be attached using only the top
tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system
in your vehicle, you need a
child restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint
manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the
child restraint and its attachments.
The following explains how to
attach a child restraint with these
attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or
child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
3-53
Lower Anchors
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars
built into the vehicle. There are
two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will
accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
3-54
Seats and Restraints
Top Tether Anchor
A top tether (A, C) anchors the
top of the child restraint to the
vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether
attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
Your child restraint may have
a single tether (A) or a dual
tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints with top
tethers are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether
be attached. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions for your child
restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a
top tether, one can be obtained, in
kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer
whether or not a kit is available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether
Anchor Locations
Second Row — Bucket
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
Seats and Restraints
3-55
To assist you in locating the lower
anchors, each second row anchor
position has a label, near the crease
between the seatback and the seat
cushion.
Second Row — 60/40 Bench
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
Third Row
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
To assist you in locating the top
tether anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is located on the cover or
near the anchor.
3-56
Seats and Restraints
Accident statistics show that
children are safer if they are
restrained in the rear rather than
the front seat. See Where to Put
the Restraint on page 3‑51 for
additional information.
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH
System
{ WARNING
Second Row — Bucket Shown,
Bench Similar
The top tether anchors are located
at the bottom rear of the seatback
for each seating position in the
second row. Open the cover to
access the anchors. Be sure to use
an anchor located on the same
side of the vehicle as the seating
position where the child restraint will
be placed.
Third Row Seat
The third row has one top tether
anchor located at the bottom rear of
the center seatback. This anchor
should be used for the center
seating position only. Never install
two top tethers using the same top
tether anchor.
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
If a LATCH-type child restraint is
not attached to anchors, the child
restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured
or killed. Install a LATCH-type
child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle's
safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with the child restraint
and the instructions in this
manual.
Seats and Restraints
{ WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
Do not attach more than one child
restraint to a single anchor.
Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment
to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others
could be injured. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries
during a crash, attach only one
child restraint per anchor.
Pull the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock,
if your vehicle has one, after the
child restraint has been installed.
{ WARNING
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Buckle any unused safety
belts behind the child restraint
so children cannot reach them.
(Continued)
Notice: Do not let the LATCH
attachments rub against the
vehicle’s safety belts. This may
damage these parts. If necessary,
move buckled safety belts to
avoid rubbing the LATCH
attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat
with a safety belt buckled. This
could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
safety belt to its stowed position,
before folding the seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments to the lower
anchors. If the child restraint
does not have lower
attachments or the desired
seating position does not have
lower anchors, secure the child
3-57
restraint with the top tether and
the safety belts. Refer to your
child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions
in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for
the desired seating
position.
1.2. Recline the seatback to the
full reclined position.
Make sure the second row
bench seatbacks are
aligned at the same angle
before placing the child
restraint on the seat. Make
sure the third row bench
seatbacks are both upright
before placing the child
restraint on the seat.
1.3. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
1.4. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child
restraint to the lower
anchors.
3-58
Seats and Restraints
2. If the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the top tether
be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether
anchor, if the vehicle has one.
Refer to the child restraint
instructions and the following
steps:
2.3. Route, attach and tighten
the top tether according to
your child restraint
instructions and the
following instructions:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. If the anchor is covered, flip
open the cover to expose
the anchor.
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
Seats and Restraints
3-59
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash
{ WARNING
If the position you are using
has a fixed headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether, route
the tether around the
headrest or head restraint.
If the position you are using
has a fixed headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a single tether, route
the tether over the headrest
or head restraint.
3. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.
A crash can damage the LATCH
system in the vehicle. A damaged
LATCH system may not properly
secure the child restraint,
resulting in serious injury or even
death in a crash. To help make
sure the LATCH system is
working properly after a crash,
see your dealer/retailer to have
the system inspected and any
necessary replacements made as
soon as possible.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system
and it was being used during a
crash, new LATCH system parts
may be needed.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
3-60
Seats and Restraints
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat)
When securing a child restraint in
a rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the
child restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑53 for how and
where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint
is secured in the vehicle using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑53 for top tether anchor
locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If the child restraint does not have
the LATCH system, you will be
using the safety belt to secure
the child restraint in this position.
Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
If more than one child restraint
needs to be installed in the rear
seat, be sure to read Where to Put
the Restraint on page 3‑51.
1. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
Seats and Restraints
3-61
6. If the child restraint has a top
tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑53 for more
information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to
set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top
tether anchor, disconnect it.
3-62
Seats and Restraints
Securing Child
Restraints (Right Front
Passenger Seat)
The vehicle has airbags. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure
a forward-facing child restraint.
See Where to Put the Restraint on
page 3‑51.
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system which is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑37 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 5‑17 for more information,
including important safety
information.
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the
airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag,
no system is fail-safe. No one
can guarantee that an airbag will
not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
(Continued)
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑53 for how and
where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint
is secured using a safety belt and
it uses a top tether, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑53 for
top tether anchor locations.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3‑37 for additional
information.
Seats and Restraints
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to
set the lock.
1. Move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal
airbag, the off indicator on
the passenger airbag status
indicator should light and stay
lit when the vehicle is started.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5‑17.
3-63
4. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
3-64
Seats and Restraints
If the airbags are off, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator will come on and
stay on when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit, see
“If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
System on page 3‑37 for more
information.
6. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
Storage
Storage
Storage Compartments
Instrument Panel Storage . . . .
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center Console Storage . . . . . .
Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . .
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-2
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo Tie Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo Management
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-3
Roof Rack System
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-1
Storage
Compartments
cupholders located at the rear of the
center console. To access, pull the
handle down.
Instrument Panel Storage
Armrest Storage
This vehicle has an instrument
panel storage area located above
the radio. To open the cover, press
the button.
Vehicles with a rear seat armrest,
have two cupholders. Pull the
armrest down from the rear
seatback to access the cupholders.
Glove Box
Center Console Storage
Lift the glove box handle to open it.
Use the key to lock and unlock the
glove box.
Cupholders
There are two cupholders, with
removable liners, located in front of
the center console. There may be
cupholders located in the second
row seat armrest. To access, pull
the armrest down. There are
additional cupholders located on
each side of the third row seat and
in each door. There may be
Pull up on the lever, located on the
front of the center console armrest,
to slide it forward and backward.
4-2
Storage
To open the armrest storage area,
press the button located on the front
of the armrest. There is additional
storage under the armrest. Move
the armrest all the way to the rear
position, slide the cover back and
remove the tray.
{ WARNING
Never open more than one of the
three latches at a time to help
avoid personal injury and damage
to the console.
Floor Console Storage
To access the upper storage area,
press the upper button (B) and lift
up. To access the lower storage
area, press the lower button (C) and
lift up. The top of the console can
be folded forward for increased
storage area. Lift up on handle on
the rear of the console (A) and pull
forward.
For vehicles with a second row
center console, open each area to
access the storage compartment
inside.
Notice: Slide the front console
as far forward as it will go before
folding the second row console
forward to help prevent damage
to the consoles.
Storage
Additional Storage
Features
WARNING (Continued)
always store it outside of the
vehicle. When it is replaced,
always be sure that it is securely
reattached.
Cargo Cover
For vehicles with a cargo cover, it
can be used to cover items in the
rear of the vehicle. To install the
cover, place the loops on each
corner of the cover on the four
hooks in the rear of the vehicle.
The cover should be stored securely
when not in use.
Cargo Tie Downs
Four cargo tie‐downs are located in
the rear compartment of the vehicle.
The tie-downs can be used to
secure small loads.
Cargo Management
System
This vehicle has a cargo
management system located
in the rear.
4-3
1. Open the cover. It remains open
when lifted.
To remove the cargo management
cover:
{ WARNING
An improperly latched and closed
cargo cover, or cargo cover left
in the open position, could be
thrown about the vehicle during a
collision or sudden maneuver.
Someone could be injured.
Be sure to return the cover to the
closed position and latch before
driving. If the cover is removed,
(Continued)
2. Pull the cover up making sure to
unhook the hinges at the rear of
the cover.
3. Remove the cover from the
vehicle and store outside of the
vehicle.
Convenience Net
For vehicles with a convenience
net in the rear, use it to store small
loads as far forward as possible.
The net should not be used to store
heavy loads.
4-4
Storage
Roof Rack System
{ WARNING
If something is carried on top of
the vehicle that is longer or wider
than the roof rack— like paneling,
plywood, or a mattress— the wind
can catch it while the vehicle is
being driven. The item being
carried could be violently torn off,
and this could cause a collision,
and damage the vehicle. Never
carry something longer or wider
than the roof rack on top of the
vehicle unless using a GM
Certified accessory carrier.
For vehicles with a roof rack, the
rack can be used to load items.
For roof racks that do not have
crossrails included, GM Certified
crossrails can be purchased as an
accessory. See your dealer/retailer
for additional information.
Notice: Loading cargo on the
roof rack that weighs more than
91 kg (200 lbs) or hangs over the
rear or sides of the vehicle may
damage the vehicle. Load cargo
so that it rests evenly between
the crossrails, making sure to
fasten cargo securely.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo
when driving, check to make sure
crossrails and cargo are securely
fastened. Loading cargo on the roof
rack will make the vehicle’s center
of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
braking or abrupt maneuvers,
otherwise it may result in loss of
control. If driving for a long distance,
on rough roads, or at high speeds,
occasionally stop the vehicle to
make sure the cargo remains in its
place. Do not exceed the maximum
vehicle capacity when loading the
vehicle.
For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑12.
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and
Controls
Controls
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-3
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-5
Rear Window Wiper/
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-14
5-14
5-14
5-15
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-16
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-16
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-18
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-22
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . 5-23
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-24
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
High-Beam on Light . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Information Displays
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5-1
Vehicle Messages
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake System Messages . . . .
Cruise Control Messages . . . .
Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . .
Engine Cooling System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . .
Engine Power Messages . . . .
Fuel System Messages . . . . . .
Key and Lock Messages . . . . .
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Object Detection System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ride Control System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag System Messages . . . .
Anti-Theft Alarm System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Vehicle Messages . . .
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Messages . . . . .
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Speed Messages . . . .
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . .
5-31
5-31
5-32
5-32
5-32
5-33
5-34
5-34
5-34
5-35
5-35
5-36
5-36
5-36
5-37
5-37
5-37
5-38
5-39
5-39
5-39
5-2
Instruments and Controls
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-40
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-47
Universal Remote System
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Universal Remote System
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Controls
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Steering Wheel
Adjustment
Power Tilt Wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted.
The adjustment lever is on the
outboard side of the steering
column.
For vehicles with the power tilt and
telescope wheel, the control is on
the outboard side of the steering
column.
Push the control up or down to tilt
the steering wheel up or down.
Pull the lever down to move the
steering wheel up or down and in or
out. Pull the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Instruments and Controls
Push the control forward or
rearward to move the steering wheel
toward the front or rear of the
vehicle. To set the memory position,
see Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40.
w / x (Next / Previous):
Steering Wheel Controls
To select preset or favorite radio
stations:
Press
to select preset or favorite radio
stations, select tracks on a CD/
DVD, or to select tracks and
navigate folders on an iPod® or
USB device.
.
Press and release w or x to go
to the next or previous radio
station stored as a preset or
favorite.
To select tracks on a CD/DVD:
Press and release w or x to go to
the next or previous track.
To select tracks on an iPod or USB
device for vehicles without a
navigation system:
Vehicles with audio steering wheel
controls could differ depending on
the vehicle's options. Some audio
controls can be adjusted at the
steering wheel.
1. Press and hold w or x while
listening to a song until the
contents of the current folder
display on the radio display.
5-3
2. Press and release w or x to
scroll up or down the list, then
press and hold w , or press ¨
to play the highlighted track.
To select tracks on an iPod or USB
device for vehicles with a navigation
system:
1. Press and hold w or x while
listening to a song listed in the
main audio page, to quickly
move forward or in reverse
through the tracks. See the
separate Navigation System
manual for more information.
Track information is displayed on
the screen. Release w or x
when the desired track is
reached.
2. Press and release x to begin
playing the track shown in the
display.
5-4
Instruments and Controls
To navigate folders on an iPod or
USB device for vehicles without a
navigation system:
To navigate folders on an iPod or
USB device for vehicles with a
navigation system:
b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press to
silence the vehicle speakers only.
Press again to turn the sound on.
1. Press and hold w or x while
listening to a song until the
contents of the current folder
display on the radio display.
1. Go to the Music Navigator by
first touching the center touch
screen folder button in the main
audio page.
2. Press and hold x to go back to
the previous folder list.
2. While in Music Navigator, select
the folder/artist/genre/category,
etc. using the touch screen.
For vehicles with Bluetooth or
OnStar® systems, press and hold
for longer than two seconds to
interact with those systems. See
Bluetooth on page 7‑46 and the
OnStar Owner's Guide for more
information.
3. Press and release w or x to
scroll up or down the list.
.
To select a folder, press
and hold w , or press ¨
when the folder is
highlighted.
3. Press and release x to scroll
through the selected music list.
Touch the track label on the
touch screen to highlight and
begin playing the track from
that list.
.
To go back further in the
folder list, press and
hold x .
4. Press and hold x to quickly
scroll through the selected
music list
c (End):
Press to reject an
incoming call, or end a current call.
Instruments and Controls
SRCE (Source/Voice
Recognition): Press to switch
between the radio, CD, and for
vehicles with, DVD, front auxiliary,
and rear auxiliary.
For vehicles with the navigation
system, press and hold this button
for longer than one second to
initiate voice recognition. See “Voice
Recognition” in the Navigation
System manual for more
information.
For vehicles with a navigation
system:
1. Press and hold ¨ until a beep
is heard, to place the radio into
SCAN mode, a station will play
for five seconds before moving
to the next station.
¨ (Seek):
Press to go to the
next radio station while in AM,
FM, or XM™.
For vehicles with or without a
navigation system:
+ e − e (Volume): Press to
increase or to decrease the volume.
Press ¨ to go to the next track or
chapter while sourced to the CD or
DVD slot.
Horn
Press ¨ to select a track or a
folder when navigating folders on an
iPod or USB device.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
The windshield wiper/washer lever
is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Turn the band with the wiper symbol
to control the windshield wipers.
2. To stop the SCAN function,
press ¨ again.
3. In CD/DVD, iPod, or AUX USB,
press and hold to quickly move
forward through the tracks.
Release to stop on the desired
track.
Press near the horn symbols or
press on the steering wheel pad to
sound the horn.
5-5
8 (Mist): Single wipe, turn the
band to 8 and then release.
Several wipes, hold the band
on 8 longer.
9 (Off):
Turns the wipers off.
5-6
Instruments and Controls
6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):
Turn the band up for more frequent
wipes or down for less frequent
wipes.
1 : Slow wipes.
2 : Fast wipes.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If frozen
to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades
should be replaced. See Wiper
Blade Replacement on page 10‑26.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wipers. A circuit breaker stops them
until the motor cools.
Windshield Washer
J (Washer Fluid):
Press the
button at the end of the turn signal/
lane change lever, to spray washer
fluid on the windshield. The wipers
clear the windshield and either
stop or return to the preset speed.
The ignition key must be in ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN for
this to work. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑20 Windshield Washer
Fluid.
{ WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use
your washer until the windshield
is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the
windshield, blocking your vision.
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
is displayed on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) when the
washer fluid is low. See Washer
Fluid Messages on page 5‑39.
Rear Window Wiper/
Washer
The rear wiper and rear wash button
is located on the instrument panel
below the climate control system.
Z (Rear Wiper): Press to turn the
rear wiper on and off. The wiper
speed cannot be changed.
Y (Wash): Press to spray
washer fluid on the rear window.
The window wiper will also come
on. Release the button when
enough fluid has been sprayed
on the window. The rear wiper will
run a few more cycles after it is
released. If the rear wiper function
was already on, prior to pressing the
wash button, it stays on until the
wiper button is pressed again.
The rear window washer uses the
same fluid that is in the windshield
washer reservoir. See Washer Fluid
on page 10‑20.
Instruments and Controls
Compass
Your vehicle may have a compass
in the Driver Information Center
(DIC). See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑25 for
more information about the DIC.
Compass Zone
Compass variance is the difference
between the earth's magnetic north
and true geographic north. If the
compass is not set to the zone
where you live, the compass may
give false readings. The compass
must be set to the variance zone in
which the vehicle is traveling.
The zone is set to zone eight upon
leaving the factory. Your dealer/
retailer will set the correct zone for
your location.
To adjust for compass variance, use
the following procedure:
Under certain circumstances,
such as during a long distance
cross-country trip or moving to a
new state or province, it will be
necessary to compensate for
compass variance by resetting the
zone through the DIC if the zone is
not set correctly.
1. Do not set the compass zone
when the vehicle is moving.
Only set it when the vehicle is
in P (Park).
Compass Variance (Zone)
Procedure
Press the vehicle information
button until PRESS V TO
CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
displays.
2. Find the vehicle's current
location and variance zone
number on the map.
Zones 1 through 15 are
available.
3. Press the set/reset button to
scroll through and select the
appropriate variance zone.
5-7
5-8
Instruments and Controls
4. Press the trip/fuel button
until the vehicle heading,
for example, N for North,
is displayed in the DIC.
5. If calibration is necessary,
calibrate the compass.
See “Compass Calibration
Procedure” following.
Compass Calibration
The compass can be manually
calibrated. Only calibrate the
compass in a magnetically clean
and safe location, such as an open
parking lot, where driving the
vehicle in circles is not a danger.
It is suggested to calibrate away
from tall buildings, utility wires,
manhole covers, or other industrial
structures, if possible.
If CAL should ever appear in the
DIC display, the compass should be
calibrated.
If the DIC display does not show a
heading, for example, N for North,
or the heading does not change
after making turns, there may be a
strong magnetic field interfering with
the compass. Such interference
may be caused by a magnetic CB
or cell phone antenna mount, a
magnetic emergency light, magnetic
note pad holder, or any other
magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,
move the magnetic item, then turn
on the vehicle and calibrate the
compass.
To calibrate the compass, use the
following procedure:
Compass Calibration Procedure
1. Before calibrating the compass,
make sure the compass zone
is set to the variance zone in
which the vehicle is located.
See “Compass Variance (Zone)
Procedure” earlier in this
section.
Do not operate any switches
such as window, sunroof,
climate controls, seats, etc.
during the calibration procedure.
2. Press the vehicle information
button until PRESS V TO
CALIBRATE COMPASS
displays.
3. Press the set/reset button to
start the compass calibration.
4. The DIC will display
CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle
in tight circles at less than
5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the
calibration. The DIC will display
CALIBRATION COMPLETE
for a few seconds when the
calibration is complete. The DIC
display will then return to the
previous menu.
Instruments and Controls
Clock
The vehicle has an analog clock
and a digital radio clock. The digital
radio clock can be enabled or
disabled.
Setting the Analog Clock
The analog clock is located on the
instrument panel above the radio.
The clock is not connected with any
other vehicle system and runs by
itself. To adjust the time:
1. Push and hold the button
located directly above the clock
to advance the clock hands.
Holding the button down causes
the clock to advance faster.
2. Push and release the button to
increase the time by one minute
increments.
Enabling/Disabling the Digital
Radio Clock
To enable or disable the radio clock
display:
1. Press H until the clock and date
setting menus appear.
2. Press the pushbutton located
under the forward arrow label
until the menu for default clock
and date settings appear.
3. Press the pushbutton located
under the currently displayed
status of either ON or OFF to
toggle the radio clock display on
or off. The ON display indicates
the radio clock display is
disabled and the OFF display
indicates the radio clock display
is enabled.
.
If the radio clock display is
turned on, the screen
displays Radio Clock ON
for 10 seconds, then returns
to the original clock
display menu.
.
5-9
If the radio clock display is
turned off, the screen
displays Radio Clock OFF
for 10 seconds. The menus
for clock and date settings
are removed, and ON
displays as a current status
indicating that the clock
display can be turned on.
If the radio clock and analog clock
are not synchronized. Use the
procedure below to synchronize
both clocks.
Setting the Digital Radio Clock
Adjusting the Time and Date
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then
press O , to turn the radio on.
2. Press G to display HR, MIN,
MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute,
month, day, and year).
5-10
Instruments and Controls
3. Press the pushbutton located
under any one of the labels to
be changed.
4. To increase the time or date, do
one of the following:
.
.
.
.
Press the pushbutton below
the selected label.
¨ SEEK.
Press \ FWD.
Turn f clockwise.
Press
5. To decrease the time or date, do
one of the following:
.
.
.
© SEEK.
Press s REV.
Turn f counter‐clockwise.
Press
Changing the Time and Date
Display Setting
To change the time default setting
from 12 hour to 24 hour or to
change the date default display
setting from month/day/year to day/
month/year:
1. Press G and then the
pushbutton located under the
forward arrow that displays on
the radio screen until the time
12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and
the date MM/DD (month and
day) and DD/MM (day and
month) displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located
under the desired option.
3. Press G again to apply the
selected default, or let the
screen time out.
Power Outlets
The vehicle has three 12‐volt outlets
which can be used to plug in
electrical equipment, such as a
cellular telephone, a compact disc
player, etc.
The power outlets are located on
the instrument panel below the
climate controls, at the rear of the
center console, and in the rear
cargo area. Lift the cover to access
the outlet. Close the cover when not
using the outlet.
Notice: Leaving electrical
equipment plugged in for an
extended period of time while
the vehicle is off will drain the
battery. Power is always supplied
to the outlets. Always unplug
electrical equipment when not in
use and do not plug in equipment
that exceeds the maximum
20 ampere rating.
Instruments and Controls
Certain accessory plugs may not be
compatible to the accessory power
outlet and could result in blown
vehicle and adapter fuses.
If a problem is experienced, see
your dealer/retailer for additional
information on the power accessory
outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical
equipment to the vehicle can
damage it or keep other
components from working as
they should. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage
rating of 20 amperes. Check with
your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
5-11
When adding electrical equipment,
be sure to follow the proper
installation instructions included
with the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not hang any type
of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug because
the power outlets are designed
for accessory power plugs only.
Power Outlet 120 Volt
Alternative Current
The vehicle may have a power
outlet that can be used to plug in
electrical equipment that uses a
maximum limit of 150 watts.
The power outlet is located on the
rear of the center console.
An indicator light on the outlet turns
on to show it is in use. The light
comes on when the ignition is in
ON/RUN and equipment requiring
less than 150 watts is plugged into
the outlet, and no system fault is
detected.
The indicator light does not come on
when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF or
if no equipment is plugged into the
outlet.
5-12
Instruments and Controls
If equipment is connected using
more than 150 watts or a system
fault is detected, a protection circuit
shuts off the power supply and the
indicator light turns off. To reset the
circuit, unplug the item and plug
it back in or turn the Remote
Accessory Power (RAP) off and
then back on. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑19. The power restarts
when equipment using 150 watts or
less is plugged into the outlet and a
system fault is not detected.
The power outlet is not designed for
the following electrical equipment
and may not work properly if these
items are plugged into the power
outlet:
.
.
Equipment with high initial peak
wattage such as:
compressor-driven refrigerators
and electric power tools.
Other equipment requiring
an extremely stable
power supply such as:
microcomputer-controlled
electric blankets, touch
sensor lamps, etc.
See High Voltage Devices and
Wiring on page 10‑30.
Warning Lights,
Gages, and Indicators
Warning Lights, Gauges,
and Indicators
Warning lights come on when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Gages can indicate when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.
When one of the warning lights
comes on and stays on while
driving, or when one of the gauges
shows there may be a problem,
check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual's advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly
and even dangerous.
Instruments and Controls
Instrument Cluster
United States version shown, Canada similar
5-13
5-14
Instruments and Controls
Speedometer
The speedometer shows the
vehicle's speed in both kilometers
per hour (km/h) and miles
per hour (mph).
Odometer
be damaged, and the damages
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in
the shaded warning area.
Fuel Gauge
Here are some situations that can
occur with the fuel gauge. None of
these indicate a problem with the
fuel gauge.
The odometer shows how far the
vehicle has been driven, in either
kilometers or miles.
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant
odometer. If the vehicle needs a
new odometer installed, the new
one is set to the mileage of the old
odometer. If this is not possible, it is
set at zero and a label is put on the
driver's door to show the old
mileage reading.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the
engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Notice: If the engine is operated
with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area, the vehicle could
United States
When the fuel tank is low on fuel,
the FUEL LEVEL LOW message
appears on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). For more information
see Fuel System Messages on
page 5‑34.
.
At the gas station, the fuel pump
shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
.
It takes a little more or less fuel
to fill up than the fuel gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than
half the tank's capacity to fill
the tank.
.
The gauge goes back to empty
when the ignition is turned off.
Canada
When the ignition is on, the fuel
gauge shows about how much fuel
the vehicle has left in the fuel tank.
An arrow on the fuel gauge
indicates the side of the vehicle the
fuel door is on.
The gauge will first indicate empty
before the vehicle is out of fuel, but
the vehicle's fuel tank should be
filled soon.
Instruments and Controls
Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge
United States
Canada
This gauge shows the engine
coolant temperature. Under normal
driving conditions the gauge will
read 210°F (100 °C) or less. If the
gauge pointer is near 260°F
(125 °C), the engine is too hot.
It means that the engine coolant has
overheated. If the vehicle has been
operating under normal driving
conditions, pull off the road, stop the
vehicle and turn off the engine as
soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on
page 10‑17 for more information.
Voltmeter Gauge
When the engine is not running, but
the ignition is on, this gauge shows
the battery's state of charge in
DC volts.
When the engine is running, this
gauge shows the condition of the
charging system. The vehicle's
charging system regulates voltage
based on the state of charge of the
battery. The voltmeter may fluctuate.
This is normal. Readings between
the low and high warning zones
indicate the normal operating range.
5-15
Readings in the low warning zone
may occur when a large number of
electrical accessories are operating
in the vehicle and the engine is left
idling for an extended period.
If there is a problem with the battery
charging system, a SERVICE
BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM
message appears in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) and/or the
charging system light comes on.
See Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages on page 5‑31 for more
information.
However, readings in either warning
zone can indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system.
Have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible.
5-16
Instruments and Controls
Safety Belt Reminders
Driver Safety Belt Reminder
Light
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
The driver safety belt reminder light
on the instrument panel cluster.
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery
bag, laptop or other electronic
device. To turn off the warning light
and or chime, remove the object
from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.
Airbag Readiness Light
When the engine is started this light
and the chime come on and stay on
for several seconds to remind the
driver to fasten the safety belt.
The light also begins to flash.
When the engine is started this light
and the chime come on and stay on
for several seconds to remind the
passenger to fasten their safety belt.
The light also begins to flash.
This only occurs if the passenger
airbag is enabled. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑37 for
more information.
This cycle repeats if the driver
remains unbuckled and the vehicle
is moving.
This cycle repeats if the passenger
remains unbuckled and the vehicle
is moving.
If the driver safety belt is already
buckled, neither the light nor chime
comes on.
If the passenger safety belt is
buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt
warning light and chime may turn on
if an object is put on the seat such
This light shows if there is an
electrical problem. The system
check includes the airbag sensor,
the pretensioners, the airbag
modules, the wiring and the crash
sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag
system, see Airbag System on
page 3‑29.
This light will come on and stay
on for several seconds when the
vehicle is started. Then the light
should go out.
Instruments and Controls
If the airbag readiness light stays on
after the vehicle has been started
or comes on when while driving,
the airbag system may not work
properly. Have the vehicle serviced
right away.
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started or
comes on while driving, it means
the airbag system might not be
working properly. The airbags in
the vehicle might not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced
right away.
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑37
for important safety information.
The instrument panel has a
passenger airbag status indicator.
United States
Canada
5-17
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. If you are using
remote start to start the vehicle from
a distance, if equipped, you may not
see the system check. Then, after
several more seconds, the status
indicator will light either ON or OFF,
or either the on or off symbol to let
you know the status of the right front
passenger frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is
lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the right
front passenger frontal airbag is
enabled (may inflate).
If the word OFF or the off symbol
is lit on the passenger airbag
status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
5-18
Instruments and Controls
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there
are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the
passenger sensing system. See
your dealer/retailer for service.
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5‑16 for more
information, including important
safety information.
Charging System Light
When this light comes on, the Driver
Information Center (DIC) also
displays the SERVICE BATTERY
CHARGING SYSTEM message.
See Vehicle Messages on
page 5‑31 for more information.
The charging system light comes on
briefly when the ignition is turned
on, but the engine is not running, as
a check to show the light is working.
It should go out when the engine is
started.
If the light stays on, or comes on
while driving, there may be a
problem with the electrical charging
system. Have it checked by your
dealer/retailer. Driving while this
light is on could drain the battery.
If a short distance must be driven
with the light on, be sure to turn off
all accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
Instruments and Controls
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
A computer system called OBD II
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second
Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems. It ensures that
emissions are at acceptable levels
for the life of the vehicle, helping to
produce a cleaner environment.
This light comes on when the
ignition is on, but the engine is not
running, as a check to show it is
working. If it does not, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer.
If the check engine light comes on
and stays on, while the engine is
running, this indicates that there is
an OBD II problem and service is
required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by
the system before any problem is
apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage
to the vehicle. This system assists
the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is
continually driven with this light
on, after a while, the emission
controls might not work as well,
the vehicle's fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine
might not run as smoothly. This
could lead to costly repairs that
might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
5-19
Notice: Modifications made to the
engine, transmission, exhaust,
intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than
those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can
affect the vehicle's emission
controls and can cause this light
to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by
the vehicle warranty. This could
also result in a failure to pass a
required Emission Inspection/
Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications on
page 10‑3.
This light comes on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition
has been detected. A misfire
increases vehicle emissions and
could damage the emission control
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
5-20
Instruments and Controls
The following can prevent more
serious damage to the vehicle:
.
Reduce vehicle speed.
.
Avoid hard accelerations.
.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
.
If towing a trailer, reduce the
amount of cargo being hauled as
soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when
it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.
Find a safe place to park the
vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at
least 10 seconds, and restart the
engine. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps and see
your dealer/retailer for service as
soon as possible.
Light On Steady: An emission
control system malfunction has
been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be
required.
An emission system malfunction
might be corrected.
.
.
Make sure the fuel cap is fully
installed. See Filling the Tank on
page 9‑45. The diagnostic
system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel cap allows fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn the
light off.
If the vehicle has been driven
through a deep puddle of water,
the vehicle's electrical system
might be wet. The condition is
usually corrected when the
electrical system dries out.
A few driving trips should turn
the light off.
.
Make sure to fuel the vehicle
with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality
causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and may
cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is
changed into gear, misfiring,
hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration.
These conditions might go away
once the engine is warmed up.
If one or more of these
conditions occurs, change the
fuel brand used. It will require at
least one full tank of the proper
fuel to turn the light off.
See Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑42.
If none of the above have made
the light turn off, your dealer/retailer
can check the vehicle. The dealer/
retailer has the proper test
equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that might have
developed.
Instruments and Controls
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local
governments have or might begin
programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on the vehicle.
Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things to know to
help the vehicle pass an inspection:
.
The vehicle will not pass this
inspection if the check engine
light is on with the engine
running, or if the key is in ON/
RUN and the light is not on.
.
The vehicle will not pass this
inspection if the OBD II
(on-board diagnostic) system
determines that critical emission
control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the
system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen if
the battery has recently been
replaced or if the battery has run
down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take
several days of routine driving.
If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the
inspection for lack of OBD II
system readiness, your dealer/
retailer can prepare the vehicle
for inspection.
5-21
Brake System Warning
Light
This vehicle's hydraulic brake
system is divided into two parts.
If one part is not working, the other
part can still work and stop the
vehicle. For good braking both
parts need to be working.
If the warning light comes on, there
is a brake problem. Have the brake
system inspected right away.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly
when the ignition key is turned to
ON/RUN. If it does not come on
then, have it fixed so it will be ready
to warn if there is a problem.
This light may also come on due to
low brake fluid. See Brakes on
page 10‑21 for more information.
5-22
Instruments and Controls
When the ignition is on, the brake
system warning light will also come
on when the parking brake is set.
The light will stay on if the parking
brake does not release fully. If it
stays on after the parking brake is
fully released, it means there is a
brake problem.
If the light comes on while driving,
pull off the road and stop carefully.
Make sure the parking brake is fully
released. The pedal may be harder
to push or, the pedal may go closer
to the floor. It may take longer to
stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. See
Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑84.
{ WARNING
The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake
system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
the vehicle has been pulled off
the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for
service.
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
Then start the engine again to reset
the system. If the light still stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the
vehicle needs service. If the regular
brake system warning light is not
on, there are still brakes, but no
antilock brakes. If the regular brake
system warning light is also on,
there are no antilock brakes and
there is a problem with the regular
brakes. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 5‑21.
Tow/Haul Mode Light
United States
Canada
The ABS warning light comes on
briefly when the ignition key is
turned to ON/RUN. This is normal.
If the light does not come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to
warn you if there is a problem.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition
to LOCK/OFF. If the light comes on
while driving, stop as soon as
possible and turn the ignition off.
This light comes on when the Tow/
Haul mode has been activated.
For more information, see Tow/Haul
Mode on page 9‑27.
Instruments and Controls
StabiliTrak® Indicator
Light
This light comes on briefly while
starting the engine. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is
working normally the indicator light
goes off.
If it stays on, or comes on while
driving, there could be a problem
with the StabiliTrak system and the
vehicle might need service. When
this warning light is on, the system
is off and will not limit wheel spin.
This light flashes when the
StabiliTrak system is active.
See StabiliTrak System on
page 9‑30 for more information.
Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning
Light
The engine coolant temperature
warning light comes on briefly when
the engine is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the light comes on and stays on
while driving, the vehicle may have
a problem with the cooling system.
Stop the vehicle and turn off the
engine to avoid damage to the
engine. A warning chime sounds
when this light is on.
See Engine Overheating on
page 10‑17 for more information.
5-23
Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with a tire pressure
monitoring system, this light comes
on briefly when the engine is
started. It provides information
about tire pressures and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System.
When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more
of the tires are significantly
underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC),
can accompany the light. See Tire
Messages on page 5‑37 for more
information. Stop as soon as
possible, and inflate the tires to the
pressure value shown on the tire
5-24
Instruments and Controls
loading information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑44 for more
information.
When the Light Flashes First and
Then is On Steady
This indicates that there may be a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System. The light flashes
for about a minute and stays on
steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence
repeats with every ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 10‑46 for more
information.
Engine Oil Pressure Light
{ WARNING
Do not keep driving if the oil
pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check
the oil as soon as possible and
have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance can damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
Security Light
This light flashes when the security
system is activated.
For more information, see Anti-Theft
Alarm System on page 2‑12.
The oil pressure light should come
on briefly as the engine is started.
If it does not come on have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer.
If the light comes on and stays on, it
means that oil is not flowing through
the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and might have
some other system problem.
High-Beam on Light
The high-beam on light comes on
when the high-beam headlamps are
in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 6‑2 for more
information.
Instruments and Controls
Fog Lamp Light
Cruise Control Light
5-25
Information Displays
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver
Information Center (DIC).
The fog lamp light comes on when
the fog lamps are in use.
This light comes on whenever the
cruise control is set.
The light goes out when the fog
lamps are turned off. See Fog
Lamps on page 6‑5 for more
information.
The light goes out when the cruise
control is turned off. See Cruise
Control on page 9‑32 for more
information.
The DIC displays information
about your vehicle. It also displays
warning messages if a system
problem is detected.
All messages will appear in the DIC
display located at the top of the
instrument panel cluster.
The DIC comes on when the ignition
is on. After a short delay, the DIC
will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine
was turned off.
The DIC also displays a shift lever
position indicator on the bottom
line of the display. See Automatic
Transmission on page 9‑24 for
more information.
5-26
Instruments and Controls
The outside air temperature and
compass, if equipped, also display
on the DIC when viewing the trip
and fuel information. The outside air
temperature automatically appears
in the top right corner of the DIC
display. If there is a problem with
the system that controls the
temperature display, the numbers
will be replaced with dashes. If this
occurs, have the vehicle serviced.
The compass will be shown in the
bottom right corner of the DIC
display. See Compass on
page 5‑7 for more information.
The DIC has different displays
which can be accessed by pressing
the DIC buttons located on the
instrument panel.
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and
vehicle system information, and
warning messages if a system
problem is detected.
The DIC also allows some features
to be customized. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑40 for
more information.
DIC Buttons
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter programming, and
compass calibration and zone
setting on vehicles with this feature.
3 (Trip/Fuel):
The buttons are the set/reset,
customization, vehicle information,
and trip/fuel buttons. The button
functions are detailed in the
following pages.
V (Set/Reset):
Press this button to
set or reset certain functions and to
turn off or acknowledge messages
on the DIC.
U (Customization):
Press this
button to customize the feature
settings on your vehicle. See
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40 for more information.
T (Vehicle Information): Press
this button to display the oil life,
park assist on vehicles with this
feature, units, tire pressure readings
on vehicles with this feature,
Press this button
to display the odometer, trip
odometers, fuel range, average
economy, timer, fuel used, and
average speed.
Vehicle Information Menu
Items
T (Vehicle Information): Press
this button to scroll through the
following menu items:
OIL LIFE
Press the vehicle information
button until OIL LIFE REMAINING
displays. This display shows an
estimate of the oil's remaining
useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the display, that
means 99% of the current oil life
remains. The engine oil life system
will alert you to change the oil on
a schedule consistent with your
driving conditions.
Instruments and Controls
When the remaining oil life is low,
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message will appear on the display.
See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”
under Engine Oil Messages on
page 5‑34. You should change the
oil as soon as you can. See Engine
Oil on page 10‑8. In addition to the
engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance
Schedule in this manual. See
Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2 for more information.
Remember, you must reset the OIL
LIFE display yourself after each oil
change. It will not reset itself. Also,
be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE
display accidentally at any time
other than when the oil has just
been changed. It cannot be reset
accurately until the next oil change.
To reset the engine oil life system,
see Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑10.
5-27
PARK ASSIST
UNITS
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
press the vehicle information button
until PARK ASSIST displays. This
display allows the system to be
turned on or off. Once in this
display, press the set/reset button to
select between ON or OFF. If you
choose ON, the system will be
turned on. If you choose OFF, the
system will be turned off. The URPA
system automatically turns back on
after each vehicle start. When the
URPA system is turned off and the
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park), the
DIC will display the PARK ASSIST
OFF message as a reminder that
the system has been turned off. See
Object Detection System Messages
on page 5‑36 and Ultrasonic
Parking Assist on page 9‑35 for
more information.
Press the vehicle information button
until UNITS displays. This display
allows you to select between
English or Metric units of
measurement. Once in this display,
press the set/reset button to select
between ENGLISH or METRIC
units. All of the vehicle information
will then be displayed in the unit of
measurement selected.
FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), the
pressure for each tire can be viewed
in the DIC. The tire pressure will be
shown in either pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
Press the vehicle information button
until the DIC displays FRONT
TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ##
RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle
information button again until the
DIC displays REAR TIRES
PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
5-28
Instruments and Controls
If a low tire pressure condition is
detected by the system while
driving, a message advising you
add air to a specific tire will appear
in the display. See Tire Pressure on
page 10‑44 and Tire Messages on
page 5‑37 for more information.
If the tire pressure display shows
dashes instead of a value, there
may be a problem with your vehicle.
If this consistently occurs, see your
dealer/retailer for service.
RELEARN REMOTE KEY
This display allows you to match
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitters to your vehicle. This
procedure will erase all previously
learned transmitters. Therefore, they
must be relearned as additional
transmitters.
To match an RKE transmitter to your
vehicle:
1. Press the vehicle information
button until PRESS V TO
RELEARN REMOTE KEY
displays.
2. Press the set/reset button until
REMOTE KEY LEARNING
ACTIVE is displayed.
3. Press and hold the lock and
unlock buttons on the first
transmitter at the same time for
about 15 seconds.
COMPASS ZONE SETTING
This display will be available
if the vehicle has a compass.
See Compass on page 5‑7
for more information.
COMPASS RECALIBRATION
On vehicles with memory recall
seats, the first transmitter
learned will match driver 1 and
the second will match driver 2.
This display will be available
if the vehicle has a compass.
See Compass on page 5‑7
for more information.
A chime will sound indicating
that the transmitter is matched.
Blank Display
4. To match additional transmitters
at this time, repeat Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a
maximum of eight transmitters
matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode,
you must cycle the key to
LOCK/OFF.
This display shows no information.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel):
Press this button
to scroll through the following menu
items:
ODOMETER
Press the trip/fuel button until
ODOMETER displays. This display
shows the distance the vehicle has
been driven in either miles (mi) or
kilometers (km).
Instruments and Controls
To switch between English and
metric measurements, see “UNITS”
earlier in this section.
TRIP A and TRIP B
Press the trip/fuel button until
TRIP A or TRIP B displays. This
display shows the current distance
traveled in either miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) since the last reset
for each trip odometer. Both trip
odometers can be used at the
same time.
Each trip odometer can be reset to
zero separately by pressing the set/
reset button while the desired trip
odometer is displayed.
The trip odometer has a feature
called retroactive reset. This can be
used to set the trip odometer to the
number of miles (kilometers) driven
since the ignition was last turned
on. This can be used if the trip
odometer is not reset at the
beginning of the trip.
To use the retroactive reset feature,
press and hold the set/reset button
for at least four seconds. The trip
odometer will display the number of
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) driven
since the ignition was last turned on
and the vehicle was moving. Once
the vehicle begins moving, the trip
odometer will accumulate mileage.
For example, if the vehicle was
driven 5 miles (8 km) before it is
started again, and then the
retroactive reset feature is activated,
the display will show 5 miles (8 km).
As the vehicle begins moving,
the display will then increase to
5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles
(8.4 km), etc.
If the retroactive reset feature is
activated after the vehicle is started,
but before it begins moving, the
display will show the number of
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) that
were driven during the last ignition
cycle.
5-29
RANGE
Press the trip/fuel button until
RANGE displays. This display
shows the approximate number
of remaining miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) the vehicle can
be driven without refueling. The
display will show LOW if the fuel
level is low.
The fuel range estimate is based on
an average of the vehicle's fuel
economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining in
the fuel tank. This estimate will
change if driving conditions change.
For example, if driving in traffic and
making frequent stops, this display
may read one number, but if the
vehicle is driven on a freeway, the
number may change even though
the same amount of fuel is in the
fuel tank. This is because different
driving conditions produce different
fuel economies. Generally, freeway
driving produces better fuel
economy than city driving. Fuel
range cannot be reset.
5-30
Instruments and Controls
AVG (Average) ECONOMY
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG
ECONOMY displays. This display
shows the approximate average
miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km). This
number is calculated based on
the number of mpg (L/100 km)
recorded since the last time this
menu item was reset. To reset AVG
ECONOMY, press and hold the set/
reset button.
TIMER
Press the trip/fuel button until
TIMER displays. This display
can be used as a timer.
To start the timer, press the set/
reset button while TIMER is
displayed. The display will show the
amount of time that has passed
since the timer was last reset, not
including time the ignition is off.
Time will continue to be counted as
long as the ignition is on, even if
another display is being shown
on the DIC. The timer will record
up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and
59 seconds (99:59:59) after which
the display will return to zero.
To stop the timer, press the set/reset
button briefly while TIMER is
displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and
hold the set/reset button while
TIMER is displayed.
FUEL USED
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL
USED displays. This display shows
the number of gallons (gal) or
liters (L) of fuel used since the last
reset of this menu item. To reset the
fuel used information, press and
hold the set/reset button while FUEL
USED is displayed.
AVG (Average) SPEED
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG
SPEED displays. This display
shows the average speed of the
vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or
kilometers per hour (km/h). This
average is calculated based on the
various vehicle speeds recorded
since the last reset of this value.
To reset the value to zero, press
and hold the set/reset button.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
Instruments and Controls
Vehicle Messages
Messages are displayed on the DIC
to notify the driver that the status of
the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the
driver to correct the condition.
Multiple messages may appear
one after another.
Some messages may not require
immediate action, but you can press
any of the DIC buttons on the
instrument panel to acknowledge
that you received the messages and
to clear them from the display.
Some messages cannot be cleared
from the DIC display because they
are more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be
cleared. You should take any
messages that appear on the
display seriously and remember
that clearing the messages will
only make the messages disappear,
not correct the problem.
The following are the possible
messages that can be displayed
and some information about them.
Battery Voltage and
Charging Messages
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This message displays when the
system detects that the battery
voltage is dropping below expected
levels. The battery saver system
starts reducing certain features of
the vehicle that you may be able to
notice. At the point that the features
are disabled, this message is
displayed. It means that the vehicle
is trying to save the charge in the
battery.
Turn off all unnecessary
accessories to allow the battery to
recharge.
The normal battery voltage range is
11.5 to 15.5 volts.
5-31
SERVICE BATTERY
CHARGING SYSTEM
On some vehicles, this message
displays if there is a problem with
the battery charging system. Under
certain conditions, the charging
system light may also turn on in
the instrument panel cluster.
See Charging System Light on
page 5‑18. Driving with this
problem could drain the battery.
Turn off all unnecessary
accessories. Have the electrical
system checked as soon as
possible. See your dealer/retailer.
5-32
Instruments and Controls
Brake System Messages
Door Ajar Messages
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
This message displays along with
the brake system warning light if
there is a problem with the brake
system. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 5‑21. If this message
appears, stop as soon as possible
and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message
is still displayed or appears again
when you begin driving, the brake
system needs service as soon as
possible. See your dealer/retailer.
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the driver door is not fully
closed and the vehicle is shifted out
of P (Park). Stop and turn off the
vehicle, check the door for
obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC.
Cruise Control Messages
CRUISE SET TO XXX
This message displays whenever
the cruise control is set. See Cruise
Control on page 9‑32 for more
information.
HOOD OPEN
On some models, this message
displays and a chime sounds if the
hood is not fully closed. Stop and
turn off the vehicle, check the hood
for obstructions, and close the hood
again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC.
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the driver side rear door is
not fully closed and the vehicle is
shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn
off the vehicle, check the door for
obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC.
LIFTGATE OPEN
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the liftgate is open while
the ignition is in ON/RUN. Turn off
the vehicle and check the liftgate.
Restart the vehicle and check for
the message on the DIC display.
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the passenger door is not
fully closed and the vehicle is
shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn
off the vehicle, check the door for
obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC.
Instruments and Controls
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the passenger side rear
door is not fully closed and the
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check
the door for obstructions, and close
the door again. Check to see if the
message still appears on the DIC.
Engine Cooling System
Messages
ENGINE HOT A/C (Air
Conditioning) OFF
This message displays when the
engine coolant becomes hotter than
the normal operating temperature.
See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge on page 5‑15. To avoid
added strain on a hot engine,
the air conditioning compressor
automatically turns off. When the
coolant temperature returns to
normal, the air conditioning
compressor turns back on. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
If this message continues to appear,
have the system repaired by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible
to avoid damage to the engine.
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE
ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle
while the engine is overheating,
severe engine damage may
occur. If an overheat warning
appears on the instrument panel
cluster and/or DIC, stop the
vehicle as soon as possible.
Do not increase the engine speed
above normal idling speed. See
Engine Overheating on page 10‑17
for more information.
This message displays when the
engine coolant temperature is too
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down. See Engine
Coolant Temperature Gauge on
page 5‑15.
See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 10‑19 for
information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
5-33
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP
ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle
while the engine is overheating,
severe engine damage may
occur. If an overheat warning
appears on the instrument panel
cluster and/or DIC, stop the
vehicle as soon as possible.
Do not increase the engine speed
above normal idling speed. See
Engine Overheating on page 10‑17
for more information.
This message displays and a
continuous chime sounds if the
engine cooling system reaches
unsafe temperatures for operation.
Stop and turn off the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so to avoid
severe damage. This message
clears when the engine has cooled
to a safe operating temperature.
5-34
Instruments and Controls
Engine Oil Messages
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when the
engine oil needs to be changed.
When you change the engine oil, be
sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message. See Engine
Oil Life System on page 10‑10 for
information on how to reset the
message. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑8 and Scheduled
Maintenance on page 11‑2 for
more information.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP
ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle
while the engine oil pressure is
low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure
warning appears on the
instrument panel cluster and/or
DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not drive the vehicle
until the cause of the low oil
pressure is corrected. See Engine
Oil on page 10‑8 for more
information.
This message displays if low oil
pressure levels occur. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible
and do not operate it until the cause
of the low oil pressure has been
corrected. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
See Engine Oil on page 10‑8.
Engine Power Messages
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays and a chime
sounds when the cooling system
temperature gets too hot and the
engine further enters the engine
coolant protection mode. See
Engine Overheating on page 10‑17
for further information.
This message also displays when
the vehicle's engine power is
reduced. Reduced engine power
can affect the vehicle's ability to
accelerate. If this message is on,
but there is no reduction in
performance, proceed to your
destination. The performance may
be reduced the next time the vehicle
is driven. The vehicle may be driven
at a reduced speed while this
message is on, but acceleration and
speed may be reduced. Anytime
this message stays on, the vehicle
should be taken to your dealer/
retailer for service as soon as
possible.
Fuel System Messages
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the fuel level is low. Refuel
as soon as possible. See Fuel
Gauge on page 5‑14 and Fuel on
page 9‑42 for more information.
Instruments and Controls
5-35
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
Key and Lock Messages
Lamp Messages
This message may display along
with the check engine light on the
instrument panel cluster if the
vehicle's fuel cap is not tightened
properly. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 5‑19. Reinstall the
fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tank
on page 9‑45. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap
has been left off or improperly
installed. A loose or missing fuel
cap allows fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. A few driving trips with
the cap properly installed should
turn this light and message off.
REMOTE KEY LEARNING
ACTIVE
AUTOMATIC LIGHT
CONTROL OFF
This message displays while
you are matching a Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
to your vehicle. See “Matching
Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3
and Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 5‑25 for more information.
This message displays when the
automatic headlamps are turned off.
This message clears itself after
10 seconds.
REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY
This message displays if a Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
battery is low. The battery needs
to be replaced in the transmitter.
See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3.
AUTOMATIC LIGHT
CONTROL ON
This message displays when the
automatic headlamps are turned on.
This message clears itself after
10 seconds.
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays and a chime
sounds if a turn signal is left on for
3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the turn
signal/multifunction lever to the off
position.
5-36
Instruments and Controls
Object Detection System
Messages
Ride Control System
Messages
retailer for service. See StabiliTrak
System on page 9‑30 for more
information.
PARK ASSIST OFF
SERVICE STABILITRAK
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
after the vehicle has been started
and shifted out of P (Park), this
message displays to remind the
driver that the URPA system has
been turned off or to notify the driver
that the system has turned itself off.
Press the set/reset button or the
trip odometer reset stem to
acknowledge this message and
clear it from the DIC display. For
more information see Ultrasonic
Parking Assist on page 9‑35.
This message displays if there is
a problem with the StabiliTrak ®
system. If this message appears, try
to reset the system. Stop; turn off
the engine for at least 15 seconds;
then start the engine again. If this
message still comes on, it means
there is a problem. See your dealer/
retailer for service. The vehicle is
safe to drive, however, you do not
have the benefit of StabiliTrak, so
reduce your speed and drive
accordingly.
This message displays when the
Traction Control System (TCS) is
turned off. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See StabiliTrak System
on page 9‑30 for more information.
This message clears itself after
10 seconds.
SERVICE PARK ASSIST
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
this message displays if there is a
problem with the URPA system.
Do not use this system to help you
park. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist
on page 9‑35 for more information.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL
This message displays when there
is a problem with the Traction
Control System (TCS). When this
message is displayed, the system
will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
driving accordingly. See your dealer/
Airbag System Messages
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays if there is a
problem with the airbag system.
Have your dealer/retailer inspect the
system for problems. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5‑16 and
Airbag System on page 3‑29 for
more information.
Instruments and Controls
Anti-Theft Alarm System
Messages
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT
SYSTEM
This message displays when there
is a problem with the theft-deterrent
system. The vehicle may or may
not restart so you may want to take
the vehicle to your dealer/retailer
before turning off the engine.
See Immobilizer Operation on
page 2‑13 for more information.
THEFT ATTEMPTED
This message displays if the content
theft-deterrent system has detected
a break-in attempt while you were
away from your vehicle. See
Anti-Theft Alarm System on
page 2‑12 for more information.
5-37
Service Vehicle Messages
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
SERVICE A/C (Air
Conditioning) SYSTEM
This message displays when a
non-emissions related malfunction
occurs. Have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer as soon as
possible.
This message displays when the
electronic sensors that control the
air conditioning and heating
systems are no longer working.
Have the climate control system
serviced by your dealer/retailer if
you notice a drop in heating and air
conditioning efficiency.
SERVICE POWER STEERING
This message displays when a
problem is detected with the power
steering system. When this
message is displayed, you may
notice that the effort required to
steer the vehicle increases or feels
heavier, but you will still be able to
steer the vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer
immediately.
STARTING DISABLED
SERVICE THROTTLE
This message displays when your
vehicle's throttle system is not
functioning properly. Have your
vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer.
Tire Messages
TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this
message displays when the
pressure in one or more of the
vehicle's tires is low.
5-38
Instruments and Controls
This message also displays
LEFT FRT (left front), RIGHT FRT
(right front), LEFT RR (left rear),
or RIGHT RR (right rear) to indicate
the location of the low tire.
The low tire pressure warning
light will also come on. See Tire
Pressure Light on page 5‑23.
If a tire pressure message appears
on the DIC, stop as soon as you
can. Inflate the tires by adding air
until the tire pressure is equal to the
values shown on the Tire Loading
Information label. See Tires on
page 10‑37, Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑12, and Tire Pressure on
page 10‑44.
You can receive more than one tire
pressure message at a time. To
read the other messages that may
have been sent at the same time,
press the set/reset button or the trip
odometer reset stem. The DIC also
shows the tire pressure values. See
Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑25.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
SYSTEM
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this
message displays if a part on the
TPMS is not working properly. The
tire pressure light also flashes and
then remains on during the same
ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure
Light on page 5‑23. Several
conditions may cause this message
to appear. See Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on page 10‑46 for
more information. If the warning
comes on and stays on, there may
be a problem with the TPMS. See
your dealer/retailer.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays when the
Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) is re-learning the tire
positions on your vehicle. The tire
positions must be re-learned after
rotating the tires or after replacing a
tire or sensor. See Tire Rotation on
page 10‑50, Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 10‑44, and Tire
Pressure on page 10‑44 for more
information.
Transmission Messages
ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF
If your vehicle has the All-Wheel
Drive (AWD) system, this message
displays when there is a compact
spare tire on the vehicle, when the
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
warning light comes on, or when the
rear differential fluid is overheating.
This message turns off when the
differential fluid cools.
The AWD system is disabled until
the compact spare tire is replaced
by a full-size tire. If the warning
message is still on after putting on
the full-size tire, you need to reset
the warning message. To reset the
warning message, turn the ignition
off and then back on again after
30 seconds. If the message stays
on, see your dealer/retailer right
away. See All-Wheel Drive on
page 9‑28 for more information.
Instruments and Controls
SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE
If your vehicle has the All-Wheel
Drive (AWD) system, this message
displays if there is a problem with
this system. If this message
appears, stop as soon as possible
and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
vehicle after 30 seconds and check
for the message on the DIC display.
If the message is still displayed or
appears again when you begin
driving, the AWD system needs
service. See your dealer/retailer.
costly repairs that would not
be covered by your warranty.
Do not drive your vehicle with
overheated transmission fluid
or while the transmission
temperature warning is displayed.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the transmission fluid in
the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the
transmission fluid temperature high
can cause damage to the vehicle.
Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
allow the transmission to cool.
This message clears when the fluid
temperature reaches a safe level.
This message displays when there
is a problem with the transmission.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
Vehicle Reminder
Messages
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE
ENGINE
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE
WITH CARE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle
while the transmission fluid is
overheating and the transmission
temperature warning is displayed
on the instrument panel cluster
and/or DIC, you can damage the
transmission. This could lead to
This message displays when the
outside air temperature is cold
enough to create icy road
conditions. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
5-39
Vehicle Speed Messages
SPEED LIMITED TO
XXX MPH (KM/H)
This message displays when your
vehicle speed is limited to 80 mph
(128 km/h) because the vehicle
detects a problem in the speed
variable assist steering system.
Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
Washer Fluid Messages
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD
FLUID
This message displays when the
windshield washer fluid is low. Fill
the windshield washer fluid reservoir
as soon as possible. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6 for the location of the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
Also, see Washer Fluid on
page 10‑20 for more information.
5-40
Instruments and Controls
Vehicle
Personalization
Your vehicle may have
customization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to
one preferred setting. Customization
features can only be programmed to
one setting on the vehicle and
cannot be programmed to a
preferred setting for two different
drivers.
All of the customization options may
not be available on your vehicle.
Only the options available will be
displayed on the DIC.
The default settings for the
customization features were set
when your vehicle left the factory,
but may have been changed from
their default state since then.
The customization preferences are
automatically recalled.
To change customization
preferences, use the following
procedure.
Entering the Feature
Settings Menu
1. Turn the ignition on and place
the vehicle in P (Park).
To avoid excessive drain on the
battery, it is recommended that
the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press the customization button
to enter the feature settings
menu. If the menu is not
available, FEATURE SETTINGS
AVAILABLE IN PARK will
display. Before entering the
menu, make sure the vehicle is
in P (Park).
Feature Settings Menu Items
The following are customization
features that allow you to program
settings to the vehicle:
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
This feature will only display if a
language other than English has
been set. This feature allows you to
change the language in which the
DIC messages appear to English.
Press the customization button until
the PRESS V TO DISPLAY IN
ENGLISH screen appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to display all DIC
messages in English.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
This feature allows you to select the
language in which the DIC
messages will appear.
Press the customization button until
the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen
appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access
the settings for this feature. Then
press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages
will appear in English.
FRANCAIS: All messages will
appear in French.
ESPANOL: All messages will
appear in Spanish.
Instruments and Controls
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
AUTO DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select
when the vehicle's doors will
automatically lock. See Automatic
Door Locks on page 2‑8 for more
information.
Press the customization button until
AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):
The doors will automatically lock
when the vehicle is shifted out of
P (Park).
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors
will automatically lock when the
vehicle speed is above 8 mph
(13 km/h) for three seconds.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select
whether or not to turn off the
automatic door unlocking feature.
It also allows you to select which
doors and when the doors will
automatically unlock. See Automatic
Door Locks on page 2‑8 for more
information.
5-41
Press the customization button until
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF: None of the doors will
automatically unlock.
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the
driver's door will unlock when the
key is taken out of the ignition.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the
driver's door will unlock when the
vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors
will unlock when the key is taken
out of the ignition.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the
doors will unlock when the vehicle is
shifted into P (Park).
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
5-42
Instruments and Controls
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps
will flash when you press the lock
button on the RKE transmitter.
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound
on the second press of the lock
button on the RKE transmitter.
This feature allows you to select the
type of feedback you will receive
when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. You will not receive
feedback when locking the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter if the doors
are open. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 2‑3 for more information.
Press the customization button until
REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF: There will be no feedback
when you press the lock button on
the RKE transmitter.
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The
exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the RKE
transmitter, and the horn will sound
when the lock button is pressed
again within five seconds of the
previous command.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
vehicle with the RKE transmitter if
the doors are open. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3 for more
information.
Press the customization button until
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears
on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button once to access the
settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps
will not flash when you press
the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior
lamps will flash when you press
the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter.
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
This feature allows you to select the
type of feedback you will receive
when unlocking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. You will not receive
feedback when unlocking the
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
Instruments and Controls
DELAY DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select
whether or not the locking of the
vehicle's doors and liftgate will be
delayed. When locking the doors
and liftgate with the power door lock
switch and a door or the liftgate is
open, this feature will delay locking
the doors and liftgate until
five seconds after the last door is
closed. You will hear three chimes
to signal that the delayed locking
feature is in use. The key must be
out of the ignition for this feature to
work. You can temporarily override
delayed locking by pressing the
power door lock switch twice or the
lock button on the RKE transmitter
twice. See Delayed Locking on
page 2‑7 for more information.
5-43
Press the customization button until
DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
Press the customization button until
EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF: There will be no delayed
locking of the vehicle's doors.
OFF: The exterior lamps will not
turn on.
ON (default): The doors will not
lock until five seconds after the last
door or the liftgate is closed.
30 SECONDS (default): The
exterior lamps will stay on for
30 seconds.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will
stay on for one minute.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
EXIT LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select
the amount of time you want the
exterior lamps to remain on when
it is dark enough outside. This
happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will
stay on for two minutes.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
5-44
Instruments and Controls
APPROACH LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select
whether or not to have the exterior
lights turn on briefly during low light
periods after unlocking the vehicle
using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
Press the customization button until
APPROACH LIGHTING appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF: The exterior lights will not
turn on when you unlock the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
ON (default): If it is dark enough
outside, the exterior lights will turn
on briefly when you unlock the
vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
The lights will remain on for
20 seconds or until the lock button
on the RKE transmitter is pressed,
or the vehicle is no longer off. See
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3 for
more information.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
NO CHANGE : No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
There is no default for chime
volume. The volume will stay at
the last known setting.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
CHIME VOLUME
PARK TILT MIRRORS
This feature allows you to select the
volume level of the chime.
If your vehicle has this feature, it
allows you to select whether or
not the outside mirror(s) will
automatically tilt down when the
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2‑17
for more information.
Press the customization button until
CHIME VOLUME appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
NORMAL: The chime volume will
be set to a normal level.
LOUD: The chime volume will be
set to a loud level.
Press the customization button until
PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
Instruments and Controls
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF (default): Neither outside
mirror will be tilted down when the
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
DRIVER MIRROR: The driver's
outside mirror will be tilted down
when the vehicle is shifted into
R (Reverse).
PASSENGER MIRROR: The
passenger's outside mirror will be
tilted down when the vehicle is
shifted into R (Reverse).
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver's and
passenger's outside mirrors will be
tilted down when the vehicle is
shifted into R (Reverse).
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
EASY EXIT SEAT
If your vehicle has this feature, it
allows you to select your preference
for the automatic easy exit seat
feature. See Delayed Locking on
page 2‑7 for more information.
Press the customization button until
EASY EXIT SEAT appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF (default): No automatic seat
exit recall will occur.
ON: The driver's seat will move
back when the key is removed from
the ignition. The steering column will
also move up and forward on
vehicles with the power tilt and
telescopic steering feature. See
Steering Wheel Adjustment on
page 5‑2 for more information.
The automatic easy exit seat
movement will only occur one time
after the key is removed from the
5-45
ignition. If the automatic movement
has already occurred, and you put
the key back in the ignition and
remove it again, the seat and
steering column will stay in the
original exit position, unless a
memory recall took place prior to
removing the key again.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
MEMORY SEAT RECALL
If your vehicle has this feature, it
allows you to select your preference
for the remote memory seat recall
feature. See Delayed Locking on
page 2‑7 for more information.
5-46
Instruments and Controls
Press the customization button until
MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears
on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button once to access the
settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF (default): No remote memory
seat recall will occur.
ON: The driver's seat and outside
mirrors will automatically move to
the stored driving position when the
unlock button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
pressed. The steering column will
also move on vehicles with the
power tilt and telescopic steering
feature. See Steering Wheel
Adjustment on page 5‑2 for more
information. See “Relearn Remote
Key” under Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑25 for
more information on matching
transmitters to driver ID numbers.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
REMOTE START
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
If your vehicle has this feature, it
allows you to turn the remote start
off or on. The remote start feature
allows you to start the engine from
outside of the vehicle using the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
Start on page 2‑5 for more
information.
Press the customization button until
REMOTE START appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF: The remote start feature will
be disabled.
ON (default): The remote start
feature will be enabled.
FACTORY SETTINGS
This feature allows you to set all of
the customization features back to
their factory default settings.
Press the customization button until
FACTORY SETTINGS appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
RESTORE ALL (default): The
customization features will be set to
their factory default settings.
DO NOT RESTORE: The
customization features will not be
set to their factory default settings.
Instruments and Controls
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
This feature allows you to exit the
feature settings menu.
Press the customization button until
FEATURE SETTINGS PRESS V
TO EXIT appears in the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button once to
exit the menu.
If you do not exit, pressing the
customization button again will
return you to the beginning of the
feature settings menu.
Exiting the Feature
Settings Menu
The feature settings menu will be
exited when any of the following
occurs:
.
The vehicle is shifted out of
P (Park).
.
The vehicle is no longer in
ON/RUN.
.
The trip/fuel or vehicle
information DIC buttons are
pressed.
.
The end of the feature settings
menu is reached and exited.
.
A 40 second time period has
elapsed with no selection made.
5-47
Universal Remote
System
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑16 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry
Canada.
Universal Remote System
Programming
This system provides a way to
replace up to three remote control
transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door
openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
5-48
Instruments and Controls
Do not use the Universal Home
Remote with any garage door
opener that does not have the stop
and reverse feature. This includes
any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Read the instructions completely
before attempting to program the
Universal Home Remote. Because
of the steps involved, it may be
helpful to have another person
available to assist you with
programming the Universal Home
Remote.
Keep the original hand-held
transmitter for use in other vehicles
as well as for future Universal Home
Remote programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale
of the vehicle, the programmed
Universal Home Remote buttons
should be erased for security
purposes. See “Erasing Universal
Home Remote Buttons” later in this
section.
When programming a garage door,
park outside of the garage. Park
directly in line with and facing the
garage door opener motor-head or
gate motor-head. Be sure that
people and objects are clear of the
garage door or gate that is being
programmed.
To program up to three devices:
It is recommended that a new
battery be installed in your
hand-held transmitter for quicker
and more accurate transmission of
the radio-frequency signal.
Programming the Universal
Home Remote System
For questions or help programming
the Universal Home Remote
System, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or go
to www.homelink.com.
Programming a garage door opener
involves time-sensitive actions, so
read the entire procedure before
starting. Otherwise, the device will
time out and the procedure will have
to be repeated.
1. From inside the vehicle, press
and hold down the two outside
buttons at the same time,
releasing only when the
Universal Home Remote
indicator light begins to flash,
after 20 seconds. This step will
erase the factory settings or all
previously programmed buttons.
Do not hold down the buttons for
longer than 30 seconds and do
not repeat this step to program
the remaining two Universal
Home Remote buttons.
Instruments and Controls
2. Hold the end of your hand-held
transmitter about 3 to 8 cm
(1 to 3 inches) away from the
Universal Home Remote buttons
while keeping the indicator
light in view. The hand-held
transmitter was supplied by the
manufacturer of your garage
door opener receiver (motor
head unit).
3. At the same time, press and
hold both the Universal Home
Remote button to be used to
control the garage door and the
hand-held transmitter button.
Do not release the Universal
Home Remote button or the
hand-held transmitter button until
Step 4 has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage
door openers may require
substitution of Step 3 with the
procedure noted in “Gate
Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this
section.
4. The indicator light on the
Universal Home Remote will
flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after Universal Home
Remote successfully receives
the frequency signal from the
hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons.
5-49
continue with the
programming Steps 6
through 8.
It may be helpful to have
another person assist with
the remaining steps.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained
Universal Home Remote button
and observe the indicator light.
.
.
If the indicator light
stays on continuously, the
programming is complete
and the garage door should
move when the Universal
Home Remote button is
pressed and released.
There is no need to
continue programming
Steps 6 through 8.
If the Universal Home
Remote indicator light
blinks rapidly for
two seconds and then
turns to a constant light,
6. After Steps 1 through 5 have
been completed, locate inside
the garage the garage door
opener receiver (motor-head
unit). Locate the “Learn” or
“Smart” button. The name and
color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
5-50
Instruments and Controls
7. Firmly press and release the
“Learn” or “Smart” button. After
you press this button, you will
have 30 seconds to complete
Step 8.
8. Immediately return to the
vehicle. Firmly press and hold
the Universal Home Remote
button, selected in Step 3 to
control the garage door, for
two seconds, and then release
it. If the garage door does not
move, press and hold the
same button a second time for
two seconds, and then release
it. Again, if the door does not
move, press and hold the
same button a third time for
two seconds, and then release.
The Universal Home Remote
should now activate the
garage door.
To program the remaining two
Universal Home Remote buttons,
begin with Step 2 of “Programming
the Universal Home Remote
System.” Do not repeat Step 1,
as this will erase all previous
programming from the Universal
Home Remote buttons.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
If you have questions or need
help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call
1-800-355-3515 or go to
www.homelink.com.
Canadian radio-frequency laws
require transmitter signals to time
out or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long
enough for Universal Home Remote
to pick up the signal during
programming. Similarly, some U.S.
gate operators are manufactured to
time out in the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are
having difficulty programming a gate
operator or garage door opener by
using the “Programming Universal
Home Remote” procedures,
regardless of where you live,
replace Step 3 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” with the
following:
Continue to press and hold the
Universal Home Remote button
while you press and release every
two seconds (cycle) the hand-held
transmitter button until the
frequency signal has been
successfully accepted by the
Universal Home Remote. The
Universal Home Remote indicator
light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly. Proceed with Step 4 under
“Programming Universal Home
Remote” to complete the training
procedure.
Instruments and Controls
Universal Remote System
Operation
To erase all programmed buttons on
the Universal Remote device:
Reprogramming a Single
Universal Remote Button
To reprogram any of the three
Universal Remote buttons, repeat
the programming instructions earlier
in this section, beginning with
Step 2.
Using Universal Remote
Press and hold the appropriate
Universal Remote button for at least
half of a second. The indicator light
will come on while the signal is
being transmitted.
For help or information on the
Universal Home Remote System,
call the customer assistance phone
number under Customer Assistance
Offices (US, Can) on page 13‑3.
Erasing Universal Remote
Buttons
All programmed buttons should be
erased when the vehicle is sold or
the lease ends.
5-51
1. Press and hold down the two
outside buttons until the
indicator light begins to flash,
after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
5-52
Instruments and Controls
2 NOTES
Lighting
Lighting
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL)/Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Interior Lighting
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6-1
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls
Lighting Features
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . .
Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . .
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Load Management . . . .
Battery Power Protection . . . . . .
6-6
6-6
6-6
6-7
6-7
6-8
The exterior lamps control is located
on the instrument panel to the left of
the steering wheel.
6-2
Lighting
It controls the following systems:
;(Parking Lamps): Turns the
parking lamps on together with
the following:
.
Headlamps
.
Taillamps
.
.
Parking Lamps
Taillamps
.
.
License Plate Lamps
License Plate Lamps
.
.
Instrument Panel Lights
Instrument Panel Lights
.
Fog Lamps
The exterior lamps control has
four positions:
9 (Off): Briefly turn to this position
to turn the automatic light control off
or on again.
AUTO (Automatic): Turns the
headlamps on automatically at
normal brightness, together with
the following:
2(Headlamps): Turns the
headlamps on together with the
following lamps listed below.
A warning chime sounds if the
driver's door is opened when the
ignition switch is off and the
headlamps are on.
.
Parking Lamps
.
Taillamps
.
License Plate Lamps
.
Instrument Panel Lights
.
Parking Lamps
.
Taillamps
.
License Plate Lamps
# (Fog Lamps): Push the fog
lamps control in to turn on the
fog lamps.
.
Instrument Panel Lights
See Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.
Headlamp High/
Low-Beam Changer
2 3 Headlamp High/Low Beam
Changer: Push the turn signal/lane
change lever away from you to turn
the high beams on.
Pull the lever towards you to return
to low beams.
This indicator light turns on in the
instrument panel cluster when the
high beam headlamps are on.
Lighting
Flash-to-Pass
This feature is used to signal to the
vehicle ahead that you want
to pass.
If the headlamps are off or in the
low‐beam position, pull the turn
signal lever toward you to
momentarily switch to high‐beams.
Release the lever to turn the
high-beam headlamps off.
Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL)/Automatic
Headlamp System
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running
lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
A light sensor on top of the
instrument panel makes the DRL
work, so do not cover the sensor.
The DRL system's automatic control
makes the DRL lights come on
when the following conditions
are met:
.
The ignition is in the ON/RUN
position.
.
The exterior lamps control is
in AUTO.
.
The engine is running.
When the DRL are on, only the DRL
lights will be on. The headlamps,
taillamps, sidemarker, and other
lamps will not be on. The instrument
panel and cluster will also not be lit.
When it is dark enough outside, the
DRL lights will turn off and the
headlamps and parking lamps will
turn on. The other lamps that come
on with the headlamps will also
come on.
When it is bright enough outside,
the headlamps will go off and the
DRL will come on.
The regular headlamp system
should be turned on when it is
needed.
6-3
Delayed Headlamps
Delayed headlamps provide a
period of exterior lighting as you
leave the area around the vehicle.
This feature is activated when the
headlamps are on due to the
automatic headlamps control
feature, and when the ignition is
turned off. The headlamps remain
on until the exterior lamps control is
moved to the parking lamps position
or until the pre-selected delayed
headlamp lighting period has ended.
If the ignition is turned off with the
exterior lamp control in the parking
lamps or headlamps position, the
delayed headlamps cycle will
not occur.
To disable the delayed headlamps
feature or change the time of delay,
see Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40.
6-4
Lighting
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL)
Vehicles with the Adaptive Forward
Lighting System (AFS) have
headlamps that swivel to the left or
right when making a turn to provide
better lighting. To enable AFS, set
the exterior lamp switch to the
AUTO position. Move the switch out
of the AUTO position to turn off the
system. See Exterior Lamp Controls
on page 6‑1.
turn signal lamps flash on and off.
This warns others that you are
having trouble. Press again to turn
the flashers off.
The turn signals do not work while
the hazard warning flashers are on.
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals
Press this button located on the
instrument panel below the audio
system, to make the front and rear
Raise or lower the lever until the
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
change. Hold it there until the lane
change is completed. If the lever is
briefly pressed and released, the
turn signal flashes three times.
The lever returns to its starting
position whenever it is released.
If after signaling a turn or lane
change the arrow flashes rapidly or
does not come on, a signal bulb
might be burned out.
AFS operates when the vehicle
speed is greater than 2 mph
(3 km/h). AFS does not operate
when the transmission is in
R (Reverse). AFS is not immediately
operable after starting the vehicle;
driving a short distance is required
to calibrate the AFS.
Hazard Warning Flashers
| Hazard Warning Flasher:
Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb
is not burned out, check the fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 10‑31.
Turn Signal On Chime
An arrow on the instrument panel
cluster flashes in the direction of the
turn or lane change.
If either one of the turn signals are
left on and the vehicle has been
driven more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km), a
chime will sound.
Lighting
Fog Lamps
Use the fog lamps for better vision
in foggy or misty conditions.
The fog lamps button is on the
exterior lamps control to the left of
the steering column.
# (Fog Lamps): Press the exterior
lamps button to turn the fog lamps
on or off. A light comes on in the
instrument panel cluster when the
fog lamps are in use. The ignition
must be on for the fog lamps
to work.
When the headlamps are changed
to high-beam, the fog lamps turn off.
The fog lamps come back on again
when the high-beam headlamps are
turned off.
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be on
along with the fog lamps.
Interior Lighting
Instrument Panel
Illumination Control
D (Instrument Panel
Brightness): The knob with this
symbol on it is next to the exterior
lamps control to the left of the
steering wheel. Push the knob in
all the way until it extends out and
then turn the knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to brighten or dim
the lights. Push the knob back in
when finished.
6-5
The lamps can also be turned on
and off by turning the instrument
panel brightness control clockwise
to the farthest position.
Dome Lamp Override
The dome lamp override button is
next to the exterior lamps control.
E (Dome Lamp Override): Press
the button in and the dome lamps
remain off when a door is opened.
Press the button again to return it to
the extended position so that the
dome lamps come on when a door
is opened.
Dome Lamps
Reading Lamps
The dome lamps are located in the
overhead console and above the
rear seat passengers.
Press the button near each lamp to
turn them on or off.
The dome lamps automatically
come on when a door is opened,
unless the dome lamp override
button is pressed in.
6-6
Lighting
Lighting Features
Entry Lighting
For vehicles with courtesy lamps,
they come on and stay on for a set
time whenever the unlock symbol is
pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the
vehicle has one.
If a door is opened, the lamps stay
on while it is open and then turn off
automatically about 20 seconds
after the door is closed. If the unlock
symbol is pressed and no door is
opened, the lamps turn off after
about 20 seconds.
Entry lighting includes a feature
called theater dimming. With theater
dimming, the lamps do not turn off
at the end of the delay time.
Instead, they slowly dim and then
go out. The delay time is canceled if
the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN
or the power door lock switch is
pressed. The lamps will dim
right away.
When the ignition is on, illuminated
entry is inactive, which means the
courtesy lamps will not come on
unless a door is opened.
Delayed Exit Lighting
Delayed Entry Lighting
The ignition must be off for delayed
exit lighting to work. When the key
is removed, interior illumination
activates and remains on until one
of the following occurs:
Delayed entry lighting illuminates
the interior for a period of time after
all the doors have been closed.
The ignition must be off for delayed
entry lighting to work. Immediately
after all the doors have been closed,
the delayed entry lighting feature
continues to work until one of the
following occurs:
.
The ignition is in ON/RUN.
.
The doors are locked.
.
An illumination period of about
25 seconds has elapsed.
If during the illumination period
a door is opened, the timed
illumination period is canceled
and the interior lamps remain on.
Delayed exit lighting illuminates the
interior for a period of time after the
key is removed from the ignition.
.
The ignition is in ON/RUN.
.
The power door locks are
activated.
.
An illumination period of
20 seconds has elapsed.
If during the illumination period
a door is opened, the timed
illumination period will be canceled
and the interior lamps will remain on
because a door is open.
Lighting
Parade Dimming
This feature automatically prohibits
the dimming of the instrument panel
displays in daylight while the
headlamps are on so that the
displays are still able to be seen.
Battery Load
Management
The vehicle has Electric Power
Management (EPM) that estimates
the battery's temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage
for best performance and extended
life of the battery.
When the battery's state of charge
is low, the voltage is raised slightly
to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high,
the voltage is lowered slightly to
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle
has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage
display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may see the
voltage move up or down. This is
normal. If there is a problem, an
alert will be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at
idle if the electrical loads are very
high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator
(alternator) may not be spinning fast
enough at idle to produce all the
power that is needed for very high
electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when
several of the following are on, such
as: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger,
climate control fan at high speed,
heated seats, engine cooling fans,
trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive
discharge of the battery. It does this
by balancing the generator's output
and the vehicle's electrical needs.
6-7
It can increase engine idle speed to
generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce
the power demands of some
accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in
steps or levels, without being
noticeable. In rare cases at the
highest levels of corrective action,
this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information
Center (DIC) message might be
displayed, such as BATTERY
SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY
VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.
If one of these messages displays, it
is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much
as possible. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑25.
6-8
Lighting
Battery Power Protection
This feature helps prevent the
battery from being drained, if the
interior courtesy lamps, reading/map
lamps, visor vanity lamps or trunk
lamp are accidentally left on. If any
of these lamps are left on, they
automatically turn off after
10 minutes, if the ignition is off.
The lamps will not come back on
again until one of the following
occurs:
.
The ignition is turned on.
.
The exterior lamps control is
turned off, then on again.
The headlamps will timeout after
10 minutes, if they are manually
turned on while the ignition is on
or off.
Infotainment System
Infotainment
System
Introduction
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Radio
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Audio Players
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MP3 (Radio with CD and
Radio with CD/USB) . . . . . . .
MP3 (Radio with CD/DVD) . . .
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-12
7-14
7-21
7-27
7-34
Introduction
Read the following pages to
become familiar with the audio
system's features.
{ WARNING
Rear Seat Infotainment
Taking your eyes off the road
for extended periods could cause
a crash resulting in injury or
death to you or others. Do not
give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Phone
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
7-1
This system provides access to
many audio and non audio listings.
To minimize taking your eyes off the
road while driving, do the following
while the vehicle is parked:
.
Become familiar with the
operation and controls of the
audio system.
.
Set up the tone, speaker
adjustments, and preset radio
stations.
7-2
Infotainment System
For more information, see Defensive
Driving on page 9‑2.
Operation
The vehicle has Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9‑19 for more
information.
Navigation/Radio System
For vehicles with a navigation radio
system, see the separate Navigation
System manual.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to
discourage theft of the vehicle's
radio by learning a portion of the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
The radio does not operate if it is
stolen or moved to a different
vehicle.
Radio with CD, Radio with CD/USB similar
Infotainment System
7-3
See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System on page 7‑36 for more
information on the vehicle's RSE
system.
The DVD player is the top slot on
the radio faceplate. The player is
capable of reading the DTS
programmed DVD Audio or DVD
Video media. DTS and DTS Digital
Surround are registered trademarks
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc..
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the
double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
Radio with CD, DVD, and USB
The vehicle may have one of these
radios as its audio system.
Radios with CD, DVD, and USB
Radios with CD, DVD, and USB
have a Bose® Surround Sound
System. Some of its features are
explained later in this section
under, “Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade)”.
If the vehicle has a Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) system, it
has a CD, DVD, and USB radio.
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume):
Press to turn
the system on and off. Turn to
increase or decrease the volume.
For vehicles with a Rear
Entertainment System (RSE),
press and hold for more than
two seconds to turn off the entire
radio and RSE system and to
start the parental control feature.
7-4
Infotainment System
Parental control prevents the rear
seat occupant from operating the
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system or
remote control.
information displays on the bottom
line. When information is not
available, “NO INFO” is displayed.
A lock symbol displays next to the
clock display while the parental
control feature is being used.
The feature remains on until O is
pressed and held for more than
two seconds, or the driver turns the
ignition off and exits the vehicle.
Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service,
CD, MP3, and WMA features):
If additional information is available
for the current song being played,
Auto Text will automatically
page/scroll the information every
five seconds above the FAV presets
on the radio display.
4 (Information):
To activate Auto Text:
Press to switch
the display between the radio
station frequency and the time.
When the ignition is in the OFF
position, press 4 to display the time.
For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA or
RDS features, press 4 to display
additional text information related to
the current FM-RDS or XM station;
or CD, MP3 or WMA song.
If information is available during XM,
CD, MP3 or WMA playback, the
song title information displays on
the top line of the display and artist
1. Press MENU to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the softkey under AUTO
TXT tab on the radio display.
3. Press the softkey under the ON
tab on the radio display.
If 4 is pressed and the song title or
artist information is longer than
what can be displayed, the extra
information will page every
five seconds when Auto Text is
activated.
Speed Compensated Volume
(SCV): The Speed Compensated
Volume (SCV) feature automatically
adjusts the radio volume to
compensate for road and wind noise
as the vehicle speeds up or slows
down, so that the volume level is
consistent.
To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume.
2. Press the MENU button to
display the radio setup menu.
3. Press the softkey under the
AUTO VOLUM (automatic
volume) tab on the radio display.
4. Press the softkey under the
Speed Compensated Volume
setting (OFF, Low, Med, or High)
to select the level of radio
volume compensation.
Press the softkey located
below the BACK tab on the
MENU SETUP display or
let the display time out after
approximately 10 seconds.
Infotainment System
Each higher setting allows
for more radio volume
compensation at faster
vehicle speeds.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,
or Treble): To adjust bass,
midrange, or treble:
1.
Press f until the tone control
tabs display.
2. Continue pressing f to highlight
the tab, or press the softkey
under the tab.
3. To adjust the highlighted setting,
do one of the following until the
levels are obtained.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange,
or treble to the middle position,
press the softkey under the BASS,
MID, or TREB tab for more than
two seconds. A beep sounds and
the level adjusts to the middle
position.
Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade)
To quickly adjust all tone and
speaker controls to the middle
position, press f for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
2. Continue pressing f to highlight
the tab, or press the softkey
under the tab.
EQ (Equalization): Press to
choose bass and treble equalization
settings designed for different types
of music. The choices are pop, rock,
country, talk, jazz, and classical.
Selecting MANUAL or changing
bass or treble, returns the EQ to the
manual bass and treble settings.
.
Turn f clockwise or
counterclockwise.
Unique EQ settings can be saved
for each source.
.
Press \ FWD,
or s REV.
If the radio has a Bose® audio
system, the EQ settings are either
MANUAL or TALK.
If a station's frequency is weak or if
there is static, decrease the treble.
7-5
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To
adjust the balance or fade:
1. Press f until the speaker control
tabs display.
3. To adjust the highlighted setting,
do one of the following until the
levels are obtained.
.
Turn f clockwise or
counterclockwise.
.
Press \ FWD,
or s REV.
To quickly adjust balance or fade
to the middle position, press the
softkey under the BAL or FADE tab
for more than two seconds. A beep
sounds and the level adjusts to the
middle position.
7-6
Infotainment System
To quickly adjust all speaker and
tone controls to the middle position,
press f for more than two seconds
until a beep sounds.
Radios with CD and DVD fade
differently depending on the DVD
Media type:
.
.
With DVD‐A 5.1 Surround
media, the left front and right
front speakers fade rearward,
leaving the center front speakers
unaffected until the last
fade step, then all front
speakers mute.
With DVD‐V 5.1 Surround
media, surround sound is
maintained until Step 4 of the
Fade control is reached while
fading rearward. At that point the
audio system output changes to
Stereo to prevent the loss of
Center channel output when the
full rearward fade position is
reached.
If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is
turned on, the radio disables FADE
and mutes the rear speakers.
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: The audio
system has been calibrated
for the vehicle from the factory.
If Calibration Error displays, it
means that the radio has not been
configured properly for the vehicle
and it must be returned to your
dealer/retailer for service.
Locked: This message displays
when the THEFTLOCK® system
has locked up the radio. Take the
vehicle to your dealer/retailer for
service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if
an error cannot be corrected,
contact your dealer/retailer.
Radio
AM-FM Radio
Radio Data System (RDS)
The Radio Data System (RDS)
feature is available for use only on
FM stations that broadcast RDS
information. This system relies upon
receiving specific information from
these stations and only works when
the information is available. While
the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS
station, the station name or call
letters display. In rare cases, a radio
station could broadcast incorrect
information that causes the radio
features to work improperly. If this
happens, contact the radio station.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to switch between
AM, FM, or XM. The selection
displays.
f (Tune): Turn to select radio
stations.
Infotainment System
© SEEK ¨ : Press to go to the
previous or to the next station and
stay there.
To scan stations, press and
hold © or ¨ until a beep sounds.
The radio goes to a station, plays
for a few seconds, then goes to the
next station. Press either arrow
again to stop scanning.
The radio only seeks and scans
stations with a strong signal that are
in the selected band.
Storing a Radio Station as a
Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up
their radio station favorites while
the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to
favorite stations using the presets,
favorites button, and steering wheel
controls. See Steering Wheel
Controls on page 5‑3.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of
36 stations can be programmed as
favorites using the six softkeys
below the radio station frequency
tabs and by using the radio favorites
page button (FAV button). Press
to go through up to six pages of
favorites, each having six favorite
stations available per page. Each
page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM
stations.
The balance/fade and tone settings
that were previously adjusted, are
stored with the favorite stations.
To store a station as a favorite:
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press FAV to display the page to
store the station.
3. Press and hold one of the
six softkeys until a beep sounds.
When that softkey is pressed
and released, the station that
was set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each radio
station to be stored as a favorite.
7-7
To setup the number of favorites
pages:
1. Press MENU to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the softkey below the
FAV 1-6 tab.
3. Select the desired number of
favorites pages by pressing the
softkey below the displayed
page numbers.
4. Press FAV, or let the menu time
out, to return to the original
main radio screen showing the
radio station frequency tabs
and to begin the process of
programming favorites for the
chosen amount of numbered
pages.
7-8
Infotainment System
Satellite Radio
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service
that is based in the 48 contiguous
United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM Satellite Radio
has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality
sound. For more information,
contact XM at www.xmradio.com
or call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.
and www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to switch between
AM, FM, or XM. The selection
displays.
f (Tune):
Turn to select radio
stations.
© SEEK ¨ :
Press to go to the
previous or to the next station and
stay there.
To scan stations, press and
hold © or ¨ until a beep sounds.
The radio goes to a station, plays
for a few seconds, then goes to the
next station. Press either arrow
again to stop scanning.
The radio only seeks and scans
stations with a strong signal that are
in the selected band.
Finding a Category (CAT)
Station
CAT (Category): The CAT button is
used to find XM™ stations when the
radio is in the XM mode. To find XM
channels within a desired category:
1. Press BAND until the XM
frequency displays.
2. Press CAT to display the
category tabs.
3. Continue pressing CAT until the
desired category name displays.
.
Radios with CD and DVD
can also navigate the
category list by pressing
s REV or \ FWD.
4. Press either of the two buttons
below the desired category tab
to immediately tune to the first
XM station associated with that
category.
5. To go to the next or previous
XM station within the selected
category, do one of the
following:
f.
.
Turn
.
Press the buttons below the
right or left arrows on the
display.
.
Press either SEEK arrow.
6. To exit the category search
mode, press the FAV button or
BAND button to display the
favorites again.
Infotainment System
Undesired XM categories can be
removed through the setup menu.
To remove an undesired category,
perform the following:
1. Press MENU to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the softkey below the
XM CAT tab.
3. Turn f to display the category to
be removed.
4. Press the softkey under the
Remove tab until the category
name along with the word
Removed displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove
more categories.
Removed categories can be
restored by pressing the softkey
under the Add tab when a removed
category is displayed or by pressing
the softkey under the Restore
All tab.
Categories cannot be removed or
added while the vehicle is moving
faster than 8 km/h (5 mph).
7-9
Storing a Radio Station as a
Favorite
To store a station as a favorite:
Drivers are encouraged to set up
their radio station favorites while
the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to
favorite stations using the presets,
favorites button, and steering wheel
controls. See Steering Wheel
Controls on page 5‑3.
2. Press FAV to display the page to
store the station.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of
36 stations can be programmed as
favorites using the six softkeys
below the radio station frequency
tabs and by using the radio favorites
page button (FAV button). Press
to go through up to six pages of
favorites, each having six favorite
stations available per page. Each
page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM
stations.
The balance/fade and tone settings
that were previously adjusted, are
stored with the favorite stations.
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
3. Press and hold one of the
six softkeys until a beep sounds.
When that softkey is pressed
and released, the station that
was set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each radio
station to be stored as a favorite.
To setup the number of favorites
pages:
1. Press MENU to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the softkey below the
FAV 1-6 tab.
3. Select the desired number of
favorites pages by pressing the
softkey below the displayed
page numbers.
7-10
Infotainment System
4. Press FAV, or let the menu time
out, to return to the original
main radio screen showing the
radio station frequency tabs
and to begin the process of
programming favorites for the
chosen amount of numbered
pages.
XM™ Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language
Channels): These channels, or
any others, can be blocked at a
customer's request, by calling
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating: The encryption code
in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process
should take no longer than
30 seconds.
No XM Signal: The system is
functioning correctly, but the vehicle
is in a location that is blocking the
XM™ signal. When the vehicle is
moved into an open area, the signal
should return.
Loading XM: The audio system is
acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This
message should disappear shortly.
No CAT Info: No category
information is available at this time
on this channel. The system is
working properly.
Channel Off Air: This channel is
not currently in service. Tune in to
another channel.
No Information: No text or
informational messages are
available at this time on this
channel. The system is working
properly.
Channel Unauth : This channel is
blocked or cannot be received with
your XM Subscription package.
Channel Unavail: This previously
assigned channel is no longer
assigned. Tune to another station.
If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for
that preset button.
No Artist Info: No artist
information is available at this time
on this channel. The system is
working properly.
No Title Info: No song title
information is available at this time
on this channel. The system is
working properly.
CAT Not Found: There are no
channels available for the selected
category. The system is working
properly.
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver
in the vehicle could have previously
been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM receivers cannot be
swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having
the vehicle serviced, check with
your dealer/retailer.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
this message alternates with the
XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the
service.
Infotainment System
Unknown: If this message is
received when tuned to channel 0,
there could be a receiver fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.
Check XM Receivr: If this
message does not clear within a
short period of time, the receiver
could have a fault. Consult with your
dealer/retailer.
XM Not Available: If this message
does not clear within a short period
of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/
retailer.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static
can occur during normal radio
reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic
devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is
interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power
outlet.
7-11
FM
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
FM signals only reach about 16 to
65 km (10 to 40 miles). Although the
radio has a built-in electronic circuit
that automatically works to reduce
interference, some static can occur,
especially around tall buildings or
hills, causing the sound to fade in
and out.
XM Satellite Radio Service gives
digital radio reception from
coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just
as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and
out. In addition, traveling or standing
under heavy foliage, bridges,
garages, or tunnels may cause loss
of the XM signal for a period of time.
AM
The range for most AM stations is
greater than for FM, especially at
night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere
with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations
boost the power levels during the
day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also
occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try
reducing the treble on the radio.
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause
interference with the vehicle's radio.
This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls,
charging the phone's battery,
or simply having the phone on. This
interference can cause an increased
level of static while listening to the
radio. If static is received while
listening to the radio, unplug the
cellular phone and turn it off.
7-12
Infotainment System
Multi-Band Antenna
The multi-band antenna is located
on the roof of the vehicle. This type
of antenna is used with the AM/FM
radio, as well as OnStar® and the
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
System, if the vehicle has these
features. Keep this antenna clear of
snow and ice build up for clear radio
reception. If the vehicle has a
sunroof, the performance of the
radio system may be affected if the
sunroof is open. Loading items onto
the roof of the vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the radio
system and, if the vehicle has this
feature, OnStar®. Make sure the
multi-band antenna is not
obstructed.
Audio Players
CD Player
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls it in
and the CD should begin playing.
Z EJECT : Press and release
to eject the disc that is currently
playing. A beep sounds and
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the
disc is ejected, Remove Disc
displays. The disc can be removed.
If the disc is not removed, after
several seconds, the disc
automatically pulls back into the
player.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on
the CD that is currently playing.
© SEEK ¨ :
Press © to go to
the start of the current track, if more
than ten seconds on the CD have
played. Press ¨ to go to the next
track.
If either arrow is held, or pressed
multiple times, the player continues
moving backward or forward
through the tracks on the CD.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press
and hold to reverse playback quickly
within a track. Sound will be heard
at a reduced volume. Release to
resume playing the track. The
elapsed time of the track displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press
and hold to advance playback
quickly within a track. Sound will be
heard at a reduced volume. Release
to resume playing the track. The
elapsed time of the track displays.
RDM (Random): CD tracks can be
listened to in random, rather than
sequential order with the random
setting. To use random, press the
softkey under the RDM label until
Random Current Disc displays.
Press the softkey again to turn off
random play.
Infotainment System
BAND: Press to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The CD
remains inside the radio for future
listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
select between CD, or Auxiliary.
.
.
When a CD is in the player
the CD icon and a message
showing the disc and/or track
number displays.
If an auxiliary input device is not
connected, “No Input Device
Found” displays.
Care of CDs
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality
can be reduced due to CD-R or
CD-RW quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music
that has been recorded, and the
way the CD-R or CD-RW has been
handled. Handle them carefully.
Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their
original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. The CD player scans
the bottom surface of the disc. If the
surface of a CD is damaged, such
as cracked, broken, or scratched,
the CD does not play properly or not
at all. Do not touch the bottom side
of a CD while handling it; this could
damage the surface. Pick up CDs
by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take
a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water,
and clean it. Make sure the wiping
process starts from the center to
the edge.
Care of the CD Player
Do not add any label to a CD, it
could get caught in the CD player.
If a CD is recorded on a personal
computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the
recorded CD with a marking pen.
The use of CD lens cleaners for
CDs is not advised.
7-13
Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, or more than one CD is
inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play
scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged.
While using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at
a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
If an error displays, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW Disc
The radio has the capability of
playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW disc. For more information
on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R
or CD-RW disc, see MP3 (Radio
with CD and Radio with CD/USB)
on page 7‑21 or MP3 (Radio with
CD/DVD) on page 7‑27.
7-14
Infotainment System
CD Messages
CHECK DISC: Radios with a
Single CD player display CHECK
DISC and/or ejects the CD if an
error occurs.
Optical Error: The disc was
inserted upside down.
Disk Read Error: A disc was
inserted with an invalid or unknown
format.
Player Error: There are disc LOAD
or disc EJECT problems.
.
It is very hot. When the
temperature returns to normal,
the CD should play.
.
The road is very rough. When
the road becomes smoother, the
CD should play.
.
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,
or upside down.
.
The air is very humid. If so, wait
about an hour and try again.
.
There could have been a
problem while burning the CD.
.
The label could be caught in the
CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly for
any other reason, try a known
good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if
an error cannot be corrected,
contact your dealer/retailer. If the
radio displays an error message,
write it down and provide it to your
dealer/retailer when reporting the
problem.
CD/DVD Player
Playing a CD (In Either the
DVD or CD Slot)
Insert a CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls it in
and the CD should begin playing
(loading a disc into the system,
depending on media type and
format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds
for a CD, and up to 30 seconds for a
DVD to begin playing).
If the ignition or radio is turned off,
while a CD is in the player, it stays
in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts
playing where it stopped, if it was
the last selected audio source. The
CD is controlled by the buttons on
the radio faceplate or by the RSA
unit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
System on page 7‑44 for more
information. The DVD/CD decks,
(upper slot is the DVD deck and the
lower slot is the CD deck) of the
radio are compatible with most
audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and
MP3/WMAs.
When a CD is inserted, the text
label DVD or CD symbol displays on
the left side of the radio display. As
each new track starts to play, the
track number displays.
Z CD (Eject):
Press and release
to eject the disc that is currently
playing. The disc ejects from the
bottom slot. A beep sounds and
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the
disc is ejected, Remove Disc
displays. The disc can be removed.
Infotainment System
If the disc is not removed, after
several seconds, the disc
automatically pulls back into the
player.
Z DVD (Eject):
Press and
release to eject the disc that is
currently playing in the top slot.
A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc
displays.
If loading and reading of a disc
cannot be completed, and the
disc fails to eject, press and
hold Z DVD for more than
five seconds to force the disc to
eject.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on
the CD that is currently playing.
© SEEK ¨ :
Press © to go
to the start of the current track if
the track has played more than
five seconds. If the track has played
less than five seconds the previous
track will play.
Press
¨ to go to the next track.
If either arrow is held, or pressed
multiple times, the player continues
moving backward or forward
through the tracks on the CD.
s REV (Fast Reverse):
Press
and hold to reverse playback quickly
within a track. Sound will be heard
at a reduced volume. Release to
resume playing the track. The
elapsed time of the track displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press
and hold to advance playback
quickly within a track. Sound will be
heard at a reduced volume. Release
to resume playing the track. The
elapsed time of the track displays.
RDM (Random): CD tracks can be
listened to in random, rather than
sequential order with the random
setting. To use random, press the
softkey under the RDM tab until
Random Current Disc displays.
Press the softkey again to turn off
random play.
7-15
BAND: Press to listen to the radio
when a CD or DVD is playing. The
CD or DVD remains inside the radio
for future listening or for viewing
entertainment.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to
select between DVD, CD,
or Auxiliary.
.
If an auxiliary input device is
not connected, “No Aux Input
Device” displays.
.
When a disc is in either slot, the
DVD/CD text tab and a message
showing the track or chapter
number displays.
.
If an auxiliary input device is not
connected, and a disc is in both
the DVD slot and the CD slot the
DVD/CD AUX button only cycles
between the two sources and
does not indicate “No Aux Input
Device”.
.
If a front auxiliary input device is
connected, the DVD/CD AUX
button cycles through all
available options.
7-16
Infotainment System
If a disc is inserted into the top DVD
slot, the rear seat operator can turn
on the video screen and use the
remote control to only navigate the
CD tracks through the remote
control.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input
Jack(s)” later in this section,
or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System on page 7‑36 for more
information.
Care of CDs and DVDs
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality
can be reduced due to CD-R or
CD-RW quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music
that has been recorded, and the
way the CD-R or CD-RW has been
handled. Handle them carefully.
Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their
original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. The CD or DVD player
scans the bottom surface of the
disc. If the surface of a CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD does not play
properly or not at all. Do not touch
the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the
surface. Pick up CDs by grasping
the outer edges or the edge of the
hole and the outer edge.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take
a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water,
and clean it. Make sure the wiping
process starts from the center to
the edge.
Care of the CD and DVD Player
Do not add any label to a CD, it
could get caught in the CD or DVD
player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description
label is needed, try labeling the
top of the recorded CD with a
marking pen.
The use of CD lens cleaners for
CDs is not advised.
Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, or more than one CD is
inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play
scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged.
While using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at
a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
If an error displays, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
Radios with CD and DVD
Audio Output
Only one audio source can be heard
through the speakers at one time.
An audio source is defined as
DVD slot, CD slot, XM, FM/AM,
Front Auxiliary Jack, or Rear
Auxiliary Jack.
Press O to turn the radio on. The
radio can be heard through all of the
vehicle speakers.
Infotainment System
Front seat passengers can listen to
the radio (AM, FM, or XM) by
pressing BAND or DVD/CD AUX to
select the CD slot, DVD slot, front or
rear auxiliary input (if available).
If a playback device is plugged into
the radio’s front auxiliary input jack
or the rear auxiliary jack, the front
seat passengers are able to listen to
playback from this source through
the vehicle speakers. See “Using
the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in
this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V)
Jacks” under, Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on
page 7‑36 for more information.
In some vehicles, depending on
audio options, the rear speakers
can be muted when the RSA power
is turned on. See Rear Seat Audio
(RSA) System on page 7‑44 for
more information.
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW Disc
The radio has the capability of
playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW disc. For more information
on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R
or CD-RW disc, see MP3 (Radio
with CD and Radio with CD/USB)
on page 7‑21 or MP3 (Radio with
CD/DVD) on page 7‑27.
CD Messages
Optical Error: The disc was
inserted upside down.
Disk Read Error: A disc was
inserted with an invalid or unknown
format.
Player Error: There are disc LOAD
or disc EJECT problems.
.
It is very hot. When the
temperature returns to normal,
the CD should play.
.
The road is very rough. When
the road becomes smoother, the
CD should play.
7-17
.
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,
or upside down.
.
The air is very humid. If so, wait
about an hour and try again.
.
There could have been a
problem while burning the CD.
.
The label could be caught in the
CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly for
any other reason, try a known
good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or
if an error cannot be corrected,
contact your dealer/retailer. If the
radio displays an error message,
write it down and provide it to your
dealer/retailer when reporting the
problem.
7-18
Infotainment System
Using the DVD Player
Playing a DVD
The DVD player can be controlled
by the buttons on the remote
control, the RSA system, or by the
buttons on the radio faceplate. See
“Remote Control”, under Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on
page 7‑36 and Rear Seat Audio
(RSA) System on page 7‑44 for
more information.
f (Tune):
The DVD player is only compatible
with DVDs of the appropriate region
code that is printed on the jacket of
most DVDs.
The DVD slot of the radio is
compatible with most audio CDs,
CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW,
DVD+R/RW media along with
MP3 and WMA formats.
If an error message displays on the
video screen or the radio, see “DVD
Display Error Messages” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System on page 7‑36 and “DVD
Radio Error Messages” in this
section for more information.
Turn to change tracks on
a CD or DVD, to manually tune a
radio station, or to change clock or
date settings, while in the clock
or date setting mode. See the
information given earlier in this
section specific to the radio, CD,
and the DVD. Also, see “Setting the
Clock” in the index, for setting the
clock and date.
© SEEK (Previous Track/
Chapter): Press to return to the
start of the current track or chapter.
Press © again to go to the
previous track or chapter. This
button may not work when the DVD
is playing the copyright information
or the previews.
SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter):
Press to go to the next track or
chapter. This button may not work
when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the
previews.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press
to quickly reverse the DVD at
five times the normal speed. The
radio displays the elapsed time
while in fast reverse. To stop fast
reversing, press again. This button
may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or
the previews.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press to
fast forward the DVD. The radio
displays the elapsed time and fast
forwards five times the normal
speed. To stop fast forwarding,
press again. This button may not
work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the
previews.
Z (Eject):
Press to eject a DVD.
If the DVD is ejected, but not
removed, the player automatically
pulls it back in after 15 seconds.
Infotainment System
If loading and reading of a DVD
cannot be completed, because of an
unknown format, etc., and the disc
fails to eject, press and hold for
more than five seconds to force the
disc to eject.
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either
the play or pause icon displayed on
the radio system, to toggle between
pausing or restarting playback of
a DVD.
.
If the forward arrow is showing
on display, the system is in
pause mode.
.
If the pause icon is showing
on display, the system is in
playback mode.
.
If the DVD screen is off, press
the play button to turn the
screen on.
DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons
Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio
display menu shows several icons.
Press the softkeys under any icon
during DVD playback. See the icon
list below for more information.
The rear seat passenger can
navigate the DVD-V menus and
controls through the remote control.
See “Remote Control”, under Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE) System
on page 7‑36 for more information.
The Video Screen automatically
turns on when the DVD-V is
inserted into the DVD slot.
Some DVDs begin playing after the
previews have finished, although
there could be a delay of up to
30 seconds. If the DVD does
not begin playing the movie
automatically, press the softkey
under the play/pause icon displayed
on the radio. If the DVD still does
not play, refer to the on-screen
instructions, if available.
7-19
c (Stop):
Press to stop playing,
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.
r (Enter):
Press to select the
choices that are highlighted in
any menu.
y (Menu):
Press to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is
different on every DVD. Use the
softkeys under the navigation
arrows to navigate the cursor
through the DVD menu. After
making a selection press this
button. This button only operates
when using a DVD.
Nav (Navigate): Press to display
directional arrows for navigating
through the menus.
q (Return): Press to exit the
current active menu and return to
the previous menu. This button
operates only when a DVD is
playing and a menu is active.
7-20
Infotainment System
DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons
Once a DVD-A is inserted, the radio
display menu shows several icons.
Press the softkeys under any icon
during DVD playback. See the icon
list below for more information.
The rear seat operator can navigate
the DVD-A menus and controls
through the remote control. See
“Remote Control”, under Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on
page 7‑36 for more information.
The Video Screen does not
automatically power on when the
DVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot.
It must be manually turned on by
the rear seat occupant through the
remote control power button.
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either
the play or pause icon displayed on
the radio system, to toggle between
pausing or restarting playback of
a DVD.
.
If the forward arrow is showing
on display, the system is in
pause mode.
.
If the pause icon is showing
on display, the system is in
playback mode.
q Group r : Press to cycle
through musical groupings on the
DVD-A disc.
Nav (Navigate): Press to display
directional arrows for navigating
through the menus.
e (Audio Stream): Press to cycle
through audio stream formats
located on the DVD-A disc. The
video screen shows the audio
stream changing.
Inserting a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the
disc, with the label side up, into the
loading slot. The DVD player might
not accept some paper labeled
media. The player starts loading the
disc into the system and shows
“Loading Disc” on the radio display.
At the same time, the radio displays
a softkey menu of option(s). Some
discs automatically play the movie
while others default to the softkey
menu display, which requires the
Play, Enter, or Navigation softkeys
to be pressed; either by the softkey
on the radio or by the rear seat
passenger using the remote control.
It may take up to 30 seconds for a
DVD to begin playing.
Stopping and Resuming Playback
To stop playing a DVD without
turning off the system, do one of the
following:
c on the remote control.
.
Press
.
Press the softkey under the
stop or the play/pause icons
displayed on the radio.
.
If the radio head is sourced to
something other than DVD-V,
press the DVD/CD AUX button
to make DVD-V the active
source.
Infotainment System
To resume DVD playback, do one of
the following:
.
Press r /
control.
j on the remote
.
Press the softkey under the
play/pause icon displayed on the
radio.
The DVD should resume play from
where it last stopped if the disc has
not been ejected and the stop
button has not been pressed twice
on the remote control. If the disc
has been ejected or the stop button
has been pressed twice on the
remote control, the disc resumes
playing at the beginning of the disc.
Ejecting a Disc
Press Z DVD on the radio to eject
the disc. If a disc is ejected from the
radio, but not removed, the radio
reloads the disc after a short period
of time. The disc is stored in the
radio. The radio does not resume
play of the disc automatically. If the
movie is reloaded and the RSA
system is sourced to the DVD, the
player begins to play again.
If loading and reading a DVD or
CD cannot be completed, and
the disc fails to eject, press and
hold Z DVD for more than
five seconds to force the disc to
eject.
DVD Error Messages
Player Error: This message
displays when there are disc load or
eject problems.
Disc Format Error: This message
displays, if the disc is inserted with
the disc label wrong side up, or if
the disc is damaged.
Disc Region Error: This message
displays, if the disc is not from a
correct region.
No Disc Inserted: This message
displays, if no disc is present
when Z DVD or DVD/CD AUX is
pressed on the radio.
7-21
MP3 (Radio with CD and
Radio with CD/USB)
Format
Radios that have the capability of
playing MP3s can play .mp3 or
.wma files that were recorded onto
a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files
can be recorded with the following
fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,
56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps,
112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps,
192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and
320 kbps or a variable bit rate.
Radios that have a USB port can
play .mp3 and .wma files that are
stored on a USB storage device as
well as AAC files that are stored on
an iPod®.
7-22
Infotainment System
Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode
Discs
USB Supported File and Folder
Structure
The radio can play discs that
contain both uncompressed CD
audio and MP3/WMA files. If both
formats are on the disc, the radio
plays both file formats in the order
in which they were recorded to
the disc.
The radio supports:
CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported File
and Folder Structure
The radio supports:
.
Up to 700 folders.
.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
If a disc contains both
uncompressed CD audio and
MP3/WMA files, a folder under the
root directory called CD accesses
all of the CD audio tracks on
the disc.
.
Up to 65,535 files.
Empty Folder
.
Folder and file names up to
64 bytes.
.
Files with an .mp3 or .wma file
extension.
Folders that do not contain files are
skipped, and the player advances to
the next folder that contains files.
.
AAC files stored on an iPod.
.
Up to 50 folders.
.
.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
FAT16
.
FAT32
.
Up to 15 playlists.
.
Up to 512 files and folders.
.
Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl
extension.
.
Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda
file extension.
Root Directory
The root directory of the disc is
treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio
files, the directory displays on the
radio as the CD label.
Order of Play
Compressed audio files are
accessed in the following order:
.
Playlists (Px).
.
Files stored in the root directory.
.
Files stored in folders in the root
directory.
Infotainment System
Tracks are played in the following
order:
.
.
Play begins from the first track in
the first playlist and continues
sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last
track of the last playlist has
played, play continues from the
first track of the first playlist.
Play begins from the first track
in the first folder and continues
sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track
of the last folder has played,
play continues from the first
track of the first folder.
When play enters a new folder, the
display does not automatically show
the new folder name unless the
folder mode has been chosen as
the default display. The new track
name displays.
7-23
File System and Naming
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3
The song name that displays is the
song name that is contained in the
ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the
radio displays the file name without
the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA
files.
Track names longer than
32 characters or four pages are
shortened. Parts of words on the
last page of text and the extension
of the filename does not display.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that
were created using WinAmp™,
MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software can be accessed, however,
they cannot be edited using the
radio. These playlists are treated
as special folders containing
compressed audio song files.
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls
file extension and are stored on a
USB device may be supported by
the radio with a USB port.
© SEEK:
Press to go to the
start of the track, if more than
ten seconds have played. Press
and hold or press multiple times to
continue moving backward through
tracks.
¨ SEEK:
Press to go to the next
track. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving
forward through tracks.
s REV (Reverse): Press and
hold to reverse playback quickly.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume
and the elapsed time of the file
displays. Release s REV to
resume playing.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press
and hold to advance playback
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume and the elapsed time of the
file displays. Release \ FWD to
resume playing. The elapsed time of
the file displays.
7-24
Infotainment System
S c (Previous Folder): Press
the softkey below S c to go to the
first track in the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the
softkey below c T to go to the
first track in the next folder.
RDM (Random): Files on the disc
can be listened to in random, rather
than sequential order. To use
random, press the softkey under the
RDM tab until Random Current Disc
displays to play songs in random
order. Press the same softkey again
to turn off random play.
h (Music Navigator): Press the
softkey below h to play files in
order by artist or album.
The player scans the disc to sort the
files by artist and album ID3 tag
information. It can take several
minutes to scan the disc depending
on the number of files on the disc.
The radio may begin playing while it
is scanning in the background.
When the scan is finished, the disc
begins playing files in order by
artist. The current artist playing is
shown on the second line of the
display. Once all songs by that artist
are played, the player moves to the
next artist in alphabetical order and
begins playing files by that artist.
To listen to files by another artist,
press the softkey located below
either arrow tab. The disc goes to
the next or previous artist in
alphabetical order. Continue
pressing either softkey below the
arrow tab until the artist displays.
To change from playback by artist to
playback by album:
1. Press the softkey located below
the Sort By tab.
2. Press one of the softkeys below
the album tab from the sort
screen.
3. Press the softkey below the
back tab to return to the main
music navigator screen.
The album name displays on the
second line between the arrows
and songs from the current album
begins to play. Once all songs from
that album have played, the player
moves to the next album in
alphabetical order on the CD and
begins playing MP3 files from that
album.
To exit music navigator mode, press
the softkey below the Back tab to
return to normal MP3 playback.
Connecting a USB Storage
Device or iPod®
The USB Port can be used to
control an iPod or a USB storage
device.
To connect a USB storage device,
connect the device to the USB port
located in the center console.
Infotainment System
To connect an iPod, connect one
end of the USB cable that came
with the iPod to the iPod’s dock
connector and connect the other
end to the USB port located in the
center console. If the vehicle is on
and the USB connection works,
“OK to disconnect” and a GM logo
may appear on the iPod and iPod
appears on the radio's display. The
iPod music appears on the radio’s
display and begins playing.
The iPod charges while it is
connected to the vehicle if the
vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN position. When the
vehicle is turned off, the iPod
automatically powers off and will
not charge or draw power from the
vehicle's battery.
If you have an older iPod model that
is not supported, it can still be used
by connecting it to the Auxiliary
Input Jack using a standard 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using the
Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more
information.
Using the Radio to Control a
USB Storage Device or iPod
The radio can control a USB
storage device or an iPod using the
radio buttons and knobs and display
song information on the radio’s
display.
f (Tune): Turn to select files.
© SEEK: Press to go to the
start of the track, if more than ten
seconds have played. Press and
hold or press multiple times to
continue moving backward through
tracks.
¨ SEEK:
Press to go to the next
track. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving
forward through tracks.
s REV (Reverse): Press and
hold to reverse playback quickly.
Sound is heard at a reduced
volume. Release s REV to
resume playing. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
7-25
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press
and hold to advance playback
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume. Release \ FWD to
resume playing. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
4 (Information):
Press to display
additional information about the
selected track.
Using Softkeys to Control a
USB Storage Device or iPod
The five softkeys below the radio
display are used to control the
functions listed below.
To use the softkeys:
1. Press the first or fifth softkey
below the radio display to
display the functions listed
below, or press the softkey
below the function if it is
currently displayed.
2. Press the softkey below the tab
with the function on it to use that
function.
7-26
Infotainment System
j (Pause): Press the softkey
below j to pause the track. The
tab appears raised when pause is
being used. Press the softkey
below j again to resume playback.
Back: Press the softkey below the
back tab to go back to the main
display screen on an iPod, or the
root directory on a USB storage
device.
c (Folder View): Press the
softkey below c to view the
contents of the current folder on the
USB drive. To browse and select
files:
1. Press the softkey below
4. Turn f to scroll through the files
in the selected folder.
h (Music Navigator): Press the
softkey below h to view and
5. Press f to select the file to be
played.
select a file on an iPod, using the
iPod's menu system. Files are
sorted by:
To skip through large lists, the
five softkeys can be used to
navigate in the following order:
.
.
.
.
c.
2. Turn f to scroll through the list
of folders.
3. Press f to select the folder.
If there is more than one folder,
repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the
folder is reached.
.
.
Playlists
.
Artists
First softkey, first item in the list.
.
Albums
Second softkey, 1% through the
list each time the softkey is
pressed.
.
Genres
.
Songs
.
Composers
Third softkey, 5% through the list
each time the softkey is pressed.
Fourth softkey, 10% through the
list each time the softkey is
pressed.
Fifth softkey, end of the list.
To select files:
1. Press the softkey below
h.
2. Turn f to scroll through the list
of menus.
f to select the menu.
Turn f to scroll through the
3. Press
4.
folders or files in the
selected menu.
5. Press f to select the file to be
played.
Infotainment System
To skip through large lists, the five
softkeys can be used to navigate in
the following order:
' (Repeat Track): Press the
softkey below ' to repeat
one track. The tab appears raised
when Repeat Track is being used.
.
First softkey, first item in the list.
.
Second softkey, 1% through the
list each time the softkey is
pressed.
Shuffle Functionality
.
Third softkey, 5% through the list
each time the softkey is pressed.
Press the softkey below >,
2, < or = to select
.
Fourth softkey, 10% through the
list each time the softkey is
pressed.
.
Fifth softkey, end of the list.
Repeat Functionality
To use Repeat:
Press the softkey below " or '
to select between Repeat All and
Repeat Track.
" (Repeat All): Press the softkey
below " to repeat all tracks. The
tab appears lowered when Repeat
All is being used. This is the default
mode when a USB storage device
or iPod is first connected.
To use Shuffle:
between Shuffle Off, Shuffle All
Songs/Shuffle Songs, Shuffle
Album, or Shuffle Folder.
> (Shuffle Off):
This is the
default mode when a USB storage
device or iPod is first connected.
2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle
Songs): Shuffles all songs on the
USB storage device or iPod.
< (Shuffle Album):
Shuffles all
songs in the current album on
an iPod.
= (Shuffle Folder): Shuffles all
songs in the current folder on a USB
storage device.
7-27
MP3 (Radio with CD/DVD)
Format
The radio can play .mp3 or .wma
files that were recorded onto a
CD-R or CD-RW disc.
The USB port can play
.mp3 and .wma files that are
stored on a USB storage device
as well as AAC files that are stored
on an iPod®.
Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode
Discs
The radio plays discs that contain
both uncompressed CD audio and
MP3/WMA files depending on which
slot the disc is loaded into.
The DVD Player only reads
uncompressed audio and ignores
MP3/WMA files on a mixed
mode disc.
7-28
Infotainment System
The CD Player reads both
uncompressed audio and
MP3/WMA files on a mixed
mode disc. Uncompressd audio
is played before MP3/WMA files.
Press the CAT (category) button
to toggle between uncompressed
audio and MP3/WMA files.
CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported File
and Folder Structure
The DVD Player supports:
.
Up to 255 folders.
.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
.
Up to 15 playlists.
.
Up to 40 sessions.
.
Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl
extension.
.
Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda
file extension.
The CD Player supports:
.
Up to 512 files and folders.
.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
.
Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl
extension.
.
Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda
file extension.
USB Supported File and Folder
Structure
The radio supports:
If a disc contains both
uncompressed CD audio and
MP3/WMA files, a folder under the
root directory called CD accesses
all of the CD audio tracks on
the disc.
Empty Folder
.
Up to 700 folders.
.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
Folders that do not contain files are
skipped, and the player advances to
the next folder that contains files.
.
Up to 65,535 files.
No Folder
.
Folder and file names up to
64 bytes.
.
Files with an .mp3 or .wma file
extension.
.
AAC files stored on an iPod.
.
FAT16
.
FAT32
When the disc contains only
compressed files, the files are
located under the root folder. The
next and previous folder function
does not function on a disc that was
recorded without folders or playlists.
When displaying the name of the
folder the radio displays ROOT.
Root Directory
The root directory of the disc is
treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio
files, the directory displays as
F1 ROOT on the radio.
When the disc contains only
playlists and compressed audio
files, but no folders, all files are
located under the root folder.
Infotainment System
The folder down and the folder up
buttons search playlists first and
then goes to the root folder. When
the radio displays the name of the
folder the radio displays ROOT.
Order of Play
Compressed audio files are
accessed in the following order:
.
Playlists.
.
Files stored in the root directory.
.
Files stored in folders in the root
directory.
Tracks are played in the following
order:
.
Play begins from the first track in
the first playlist and continues
sequentially through all tracks
in each playlist. When the last
track of the last playlist has
played, play continues from the
first track of the first playlist.
.
Play begins from the first track
in the first folder and continues
sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track
of the last folder has played,
play continues from the first
track of the first folder.
When play enters a new folder, the
display does not automatically show
the new folder name unless the
folder mode has been chosen as
the default display. The new track
name displays.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the
song name that is contained in the
ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the
radio displays the file name without
the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
7-29
Track names longer than
32 characters or four pages are
shortened. Parts of words on the
last page of text and the extension
of the filename does not display.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that
were created using WinAmp™,
MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software can be accessed, however,
they cannot be edited using the
radio. These playlists are treated
as special folders containing
compressed audio song files.
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls
file extension and are stored on a
USB device may be supported by
the radio with a USB port.
7-30
Infotainment System
Playing an MP3/WMA File
From a Disc (In Either the DVD
or CD Slot)
If a disc is inserted into the top DVD
slot, the rear seat operator can turn
on the video screen and use the
remote control to navigate the CD
(tracks only).
f (Tune):
Turn to select MP3/WMA
files.
© SEEK:
Press to go to the
start of the track, if more than
five seconds have played. Press to
go to the previous track if more then
five seconds have played. Press
and hold or press multiple times to
continue moving backward through
tracks.
¨ SEEK:
Press to go to the next
track. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving
forward through tracks.
s REV (Reverse): Press and
hold to reverse playback quickly.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume
and the elapsed time of the file
displays. Release s REV to
resume playing.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press
and hold to advance playback
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume and the elapsed time of the
file displays. Release \ FWD to
resume playing. The elapsed time of
the file displays.
S c (Previous Folder): Press
the softkey below S c to go to the
first track in the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the
softkey below c T to go to the
first track in the next folder.
RDM (Random): Files on the disc
can be listened to in random, rather
than sequential order. To use
random, press the softkey under the
RDM tab until Random Current Disc
displays to play songs in random
order. Press the same softkey again
to turn off random play.
h (Music Navigator): Press the
softkey below h to play files in
order by artist or album.
The player scans the disc to sort the
files by artist and album ID3 tag
information. It can take several
minutes to scan the disc depending
on the number of files on the disc.
The radio may begin playing while it
is scanning in the background.
When the scan is finished, the disc
begins playing files in order by
artist. The current artist playing is
shown on the second line of the
display. Once all songs by that artist
are played, the player moves to the
next artist in alphabetical order and
begins playing files by that artist.
Infotainment System
To listen to files by another artist,
press the softkey located below
either arrow tab. The disc goes to
the next or previous artist in
alphabetical order. Continue
pressing either softkey below the
arrow tab until the artist displays.
To change from playback by artist to
playback by album:
1. Press the softkey located below
the Sort By tab.
2. Press one of the softkeys below
the album tab from the sort
screen.
3. Press the softkey below the
back tab to return to the main
music navigator screen.
The album name displays on the
second line between the arrows
and songs from the current album
begins to play. Once all songs
from that album have played, the
player moves to the next album in
alphabetical order on the CD and
begins playing MP3 files from that
album.
To exit music navigator mode, press
the softkey below the Back tab to
return to normal MP3 playback.
Connecting a USB Storage
Device or iPod®
The USB Port can be used to
control an iPod or a USB storage
device.
To connect a USB storage device,
connect the device to the USB port
located in the center console.
To connect an iPod, connect one
end of the USB cable that came
with the iPod to the iPod’s dock
connector and connect the other
end to the USB port located in the
center console. If the vehicle is on
and the USB connection works,
“OK to disconnect” and a GM logo
may appear on the iPod and iPod
appears on the radio's display. The
iPod music appears on the radio’s
display and begins playing.
7-31
The iPod charges while it is
connected to the vehicle if the
vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN position. When the
vehicle is turned off, the iPod
automatically powers off and will
not charge or draw power from the
vehicle's battery.
If you have an older iPod model that
is not supported, it can still be used
by connecting it to the Auxiliary
Input Jack using a standard 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using the
Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more
information.
7-32
Infotainment System
Using the Radio to Control a
USB Storage Device or iPod
The radio can control a USB
storage device or an iPod using the
radio buttons and knobs and display
song information on the radio’s
display.
f (Tune): Turn to select files.
© SEEK: Press to go to the
start of the track, if more than
ten seconds have played. Press
and hold or press multiple times to
continue moving backward through
tracks.
¨ SEEK:
Press to go to the next
track. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving
forward through tracks.
s REV (Reverse):
Press and
hold to reverse playback quickly.
Sound is heard at a reduced
volume. Release s REV to
resume playing. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press
and hold to advance playback
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume. Release \ FWD to
resume playing. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
4 (Information):
Press to display
additional information about the
selected track.
Using Softkeys to Control a
USB Storage Device or iPod
The five softkeys below the radio
display are used to control the
functions listed below.
To use the softkeys:
1. Press the first or fifth softkey
below the radio display to
display the functions listed
below, or press the softkey
below the function if it is
currently displayed.
2. Press the softkey below the tab
with the function on it to use that
function.
j (Pause): Press the softkey
below j to pause the track. The
tab appears raised when pause
is being used. Press the softkey
below j again to resume playback.
Back: Press the softkey below the
back tab to go back to the main
display screen on an iPod, or the
root directory on a USB storage
device.
c (Folder View): Press the
softkey below c to view the
contents of the current folder on the
USB drive. To browse and select
files:
1. Press the softkey below
c.
2. Turn f to scroll through the list
of folders.
3. Press f to select the folder.
If there is more than one folder,
repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the
folder is reached.
Infotainment System
4. Turn f to scroll through the files
in the selected folder.
h (Music Navigator): Press the
softkey below h to view and
5. Press f to select the file to be
played.
select a file on an iPod, using the
iPod's menu system. Files are
sorted by:
To skip through large lists, the
five softkeys can be used to
navigate in the following order:
.
Playlists
.
Artists
.
First softkey, first item in the list.
.
Albums
.
Second softkey, 1% through the
list each time the softkey is
pressed.
.
Genres
.
Songs
.
Composers
.
.
.
Third softkey, 5% through the list
each time the softkey is pressed.
Fourth softkey, 10% through the
list each time the softkey is
pressed.
Fifth softkey, end of the list.
To select files:
1. Press the softkey below
h.
2. Turn f to scroll through the list
of menus.
f to select the menu.
Turn f to scroll through the
3. Press
4.
folders or files in the
selected menu.
5. Press f to select the file to be
played.
7-33
To skip through large lists, the
five softkeys can be used to
navigate in the following order:
.
First softkey, first item in the list.
.
Second softkey, 1% through the
list each time the softkey is
pressed.
.
Third softkey, 5% through the list
each time the softkey is pressed.
.
Fourth softkey, 10% through the
list each time the softkey is
pressed.
.
Fifth softkey, end of the list.
Repeat Functionality
To use Repeat:
Press the softkey below " or '
to select between Repeat All and
Repeat Track.
" (Repeat All): Press the softkey
below " to repeat all tracks. The
tab appears lowered when Repeat
All is being used. This is the default
mode when a USB storage device
or iPod is first connected.
7-34
Infotainment System
' (Repeat Track): Press the
softkey below ' to repeat one
Auxiliary Devices
To use Shuffle:
The vehicle may have a 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) auxiliary input jack located
on the lower right side of the
faceplate and for vehicles with a
USB port, it is located in the center
console.
Press the softkey below >, 2,
< or = to select between
Using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
Auxiliary Input Jack
track. The tab appears raised when
Repeat Track is being used.
Shuffle Functionality
Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/
Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,
or Shuffle Folder.
> (Shuffle Off): This is the
default mode when a USB storage
device or iPod is first connected.
2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle
Songs): Shuffles all songs on the
USB storage device or iPod.
< (Shuffle Album):
Shuffles
all songs in the current album on
an iPod.
= (Shuffle Folder): Shuffles all
songs in the current folder on a USB
storage device.
The auxiliary input jack is located on
the lower right side of the faceplate.
This is not an audio output; do not
plug a headphone set into the front
auxiliary input jack. Connect an
auxiliary input device such as an
iPod®, laptop computer, MP3 player,
CD player, or cassette tape player,
etc. to the auxiliary input jack for
use as another source for audio
listening.
Drivers are encouraged to set up
any auxiliary device while the
vehicle is in P (Park). See
Defensive Driving on page 9‑2
for more information on driver
distraction.
To use an auxiliary input device,
connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
the radio's front auxiliary input jack.
O (Power/Volume):
Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the volume
of the portable player. Additional
volume adjustments might have to
be made from the portable device if
the volume is not loud or soft
enough.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio
when a portable audio device is
playing. The portable audio device
continues playing, so you might
want to stop it or turn it off.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
select between CD, or Auxiliary.
.
When a CD is in the player
the CD icon and a message
showing the disc and/or track
number displays.
.
If an auxiliary input device is not
connected, “No Input Device
Found” displays.
Infotainment System
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary):
Press to select between DVD,
CD, or Auxiliary.
.
.
.
.
If an auxiliary input device is not
connected, “No Aux Input
Device” displays.
When a disc is in either slot, the
DVD/CD text tab and a message
showing the track or chapter
number displays.
If an auxiliary input device is not
connected, and a disc is in both
the DVD slot and the CD slot the
DVD/CD AUX button only cycles
between the two sources and
does not indicate “No Aux Input
Device”.
If a front auxiliary input device is
connected, the DVD/CD AUX
button cycles through all
available options.
If a disc is inserted into top DVD
slot, the rear seat operator can turn
on the video screen and use the
remote control to only navigate the
CD tracks through the remote
control.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input
Jack(s)” later in this section,
or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System on page 7‑36 for more
information.
Using the USB Port
For vehicles with a USB port, the
connector is located in the center
console.
Radios with a USB port can control
a USB storage device or an iPod®
using the radio buttons and knobs.
See MP3 (Radio with CD and Radio
with CD/USB) on page 7‑21 or
MP3 (Radio with CD/DVD) on
page 7‑27 for information about
how to connect and control a USB
storage device or an iPod.
7-35
USB Supported Devices
.
USB Flash Drives
.
Portable USB Hard Drives
.
Fifth generation or later iPod
.
iPod nanos
.
iPod touch
.
iPod classic
Not all iPods and USB Drives are
compatible with the USB port.
Make sure the iPod has the latest
firmware from Apple® for proper
operation. iPod firmware can be
updated using the latest iTunes®
application. See www.apple.com/
itunes.
For help with identifying your iPod,
go to www.apple.com/support.
7-36
Infotainment System
Rear Seat
Infotainment
Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) System
The vehicle may have a DVD Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE) system.
The RSE system works with the
vehicle's audio system. The DVD
player is part of the front radio. The
RSE system includes a radio with a
DVD player, a video display screen,
audio/video jacks, two wireless
headphones, and a remote control.
See Operation on page 7‑2 for
more information on the vehicle's
audio/DVD system.
Before Driving
The RSE is designed for rear seat
passengers only. The driver cannot
safely view the video screen while
driving and should not try to do so.
In severe or extreme weather
conditions the RSE system might or
might not work until the temperature
is within the operating range. The
operating range for the RSE system
is above −4°F (−20°C) or below
140°F (60°C). If the temperature of
the vehicle is outside of this range,
heat or cool the vehicle until the
temperature is within the operating
range of the RSE system.
Parental Control
The RSE system may have a
Parental Control feature, depending
on the radio. To enable Parental
Control, press and hold the radio
power button for more than
two seconds to stop all system
features such as: radio, video
screen, RSA, DVD and/or CD. While
Parental Control is on, Q displays.
When the radio is turned back on,
Parental Control is unlocked.
Headphones
The RSE includes two 2-channel
wireless headphones that are
dedicated to this system. Channel 1
is dedicated to the video screen,
while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA
selections. These headphones are
used to listen to media such as
CDs, DVDs, MP3/WMAs, DVD-As,
radio, any auxiliary source
connected to A/V jacks, or the
auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle
has this feature. The wireless
headphones have an On/Off button,
channel 1/2 switch, and a volume
control. Switch the headphones to
Off when not in use.
Push the power button to turn on
the headphones. An indicator light
located on the headphones comes
on. If the light does not come on,
the batteries might need to be
replaced. Intermittent sound or static
on the headphones can also be an
indication of weak batteries. See
“Battery Replacement” later in this
section for more information.
Infotainment System
7-37
The headphones may automatically
turn off after four hours of
continuous use.
on the upper right side, above the
ear pad and should be positioned
on the right ear.
Battery Replacement
To adjust the volume on the
headphones, use the volume control
located on the right side.
Notice: Do not store the
headphones in heat or direct
sunlight. This could damage the
headphones and repairs will not
be covered by the warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can
weaken the batteries. Keep the
headphones stored in a cool, dry
place.
1. Turn the screw to loosen the
battery door located on the left
side of the headphones. Slide
the battery door open.
Infrared transmitters are located at
the rear of the RSE overhead
console. The headphones shut off
automatically to save the battery
power if the RSE system and RSA
are shut off or if the headphones are
out of range of the transmitters for
more than three minutes. Moving too
far forward or stepping out of the
vehicle, can cause the headphones
to lose the audio signal.
For optimal audio performance, the
headphones must be worn correctly.
Headphones should be worn with
the headband over the top of the
head for best audio reception.
The symbol L (Left) appears on the
upper left side, above the ear pad
and should be positioned on the left
ear. The symbol R (Right) appears
If the foam ear pads attached to
the headphones become worn or
damaged, the pads can be replaced
separately from the headphone set.
See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Headphones should be stored in the
front floor console and not in the
front seat back pocket. Headphone
damage can occur when the second
row seats are folded forward.
To change the batteries on the
headphones:
2. Replace the two batteries in the
compartment. Make sure that
they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the
battery compartment.
3. Replace the battery door and
tighten the door screw.
If the headphones are to be stored
for a long period of time, remove the
batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
7-38
Infotainment System
Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
The A/V jacks are color coded to
match typical home entertainment
system equipment. The yellow
jack (A) is for the video input. The
white jack (B) is for the left audio
input. The red jack (C) is for the
right audio input.
Power for auxiliary devices is not
supplied by the radio system.
The A/V jacks, located on the rear
of the floor console, allow audio
or video signals to be connected
from an auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game unit
to the RSE system. Adapter
connectors or cables (not supplied)
might be required to connect the
auxiliary device to the A/V jacks.
Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions for proper usage.
To use the auxiliary inputs of the
RSE system, connect an external
auxiliary device to the color-coded
A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary
device and the video screen power
on. If the video screen is in the DVD
player mode, pressing the AUX
(auxiliary) button on the remote
control, switches the video screen
from the DVD player mode to the
auxiliary device. The radio can listen
to the audio of the connected
auxiliary device by sourcing to
auxiliary. See Auxiliary Devices on
page 7‑34 for more information.
How to Change the RSE Video
Screen Settings
The screen display mode (normal,
full, and zoom), screen brightness,
and setup menu language can be
changed from the on screen setup
menu by using the remote control.
To change a setting:
z.
Use n, q, p, o and r to
1. Press
2.
navigate and use the
setup menu.
3. Press z again to remove the
setup menu from the screen.
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or
auxiliary inputs can be heard
through the following sources:
.
Wireless Headphones
.
Vehicle Speakers
.
Vehicle wired headphone jacks
on the rear seat audio system,
if the vehicle has this feature.
Infotainment System
The RSE system always transmits
the audio signal to the wireless
headphones, if there is audio
available. See “Headphones” earlier
in this section for more information.
The DVD player is capable of
outputting audio to the wired
headphone jacks on the RSA
system, if the vehicle has this
feature. The DVD player can be
selected as an audio source on the
RSA system. See Rear Seat Audio
(RSA) System on page 7‑44 for
more information.
When a device is connected to the
A/V jacks, or the radio's auxiliary
input jack, if the vehicle has this
feature, the rear seat passengers
are able to hear audio from the
auxiliary device through the wireless
or wired headphones. The front seat
passengers are able to listen to
playback from this device through
the vehicle speakers by selecting
AUX as the source on the radio.
Video Screen
The video screen is located in the
overhead console. When the video
screen is not in use, push it up into
its locked position.
7-39
Notice: Avoid directly touching
the video screen, as damage may
occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for
more information.
To use the video screen:
Remote Control
1. Push the release button located
on the overhead console.
To use the remote control, aim it at
the transmitter window at the rear of
the overhead console and press the
desired button. Direct sunlight or
very bright light could affect the
ability of the RSE transmitter to
receive signals from the remote
control. If the remote control does
not seem to be working, the
batteries might need to be replaced.
See “Battery Replacement” later in
this section. Objects blocking the
line of sight could also affect the
function of the remote control.
2. Move the screen to the desired
position.
If a DVD is playing and the screen
is raised to its locked position, the
screen remains on; this is normal,
and the DVD continues to play
through the previous audio source.
Press P on the remote control or
eject the disc to turn off the screen.
The infrared receivers for the
wireless headphones and the
remote control are located at the
rear of the overhead console.
7-40
Infotainment System
If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD
slot, the remote control O button
can be used to turn on the video
screen display and start the disc.
The radio can also turn on the video
screen display. See Operation on
page 7‑2 for more information.
Notice: Storing the remote
control in a hot area or in direct
sunlight can damage it, and the
repairs will not be covered by the
warranty. Storage in extreme cold
can weaken the batteries. Keep
the remote control stored in a
cool, dry place.
Remote Control Buttons
O (Power): Press to turn the
video screen on and off.
P (Illumination):
Press to turn the
remote control backlight on. The
backlight automatically times out
after seven to ten seconds if no
other button is pressed while the
backlight is on.
v (Title): Press to return the DVD
to the main menu of the DVD. This
function could vary for each disc.
y (Main Menu): Press to access
the DVD menu. The DVD menu is
different on every DVD. Use the
navigation arrows to move the
cursor around the DVD menu. After
making a selection press the enter
button. This button only operates
when using a DVD.
n , q, p, o (Menu Navigation
Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to
navigate through a menu.
r (Enter):
Press to select
the choice that is highlighted in
any menu.
z (Display Menu): Press to adjust
the brightness, screen display mode
(normal, full, or zoom), and display
the language menu.
q (Return): Press to exit the
current active menu and return to
the previous menu. This button
operates only when the display
menu or a DVD menu is active.
c (Stop):
Press to stop playing,
rewinding, or fast forwarding a
DVD. Press twice to return to the
beginning of the DVD.
s (Play/Pause):
Press to start
playing a DVD. Press while a DVD
is playing to pause it. Press again to
continue playing the DVD.
When the DVD is playing,
depending on the radio, play
may be slowed down by
pressing s then [ . The DVD
continues playing in a slow play
mode. Depending on the radio,
perform reverse slow play by
pressing s then r . To cancel
slow play mode, press s again.
t (Previous Track/Chapter):
Press to return to the start of the
current track or chapter. Press
again to go to the previous track
or chapter. This button might not
work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the
previews.
Infotainment System
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press to
go to the beginning of the next
chapter or track. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the
previews.
r (Fast Reverse): Press to
quickly reverse the DVD or CD.
To stop fast reversing a DVD video,
press s. To stop fast reversing
a DVD audio or CD, release r.
This button might not work when
the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
[ (Fast Forward):
Press to fast
forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast
forwarding a DVD video, press s.
To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio
or CD, release [. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the
previews.
e (Audio): Press to change audio
tracks on DVDs that have this
feature when the DVD is playing.
The format and content of this
function vary for each disc.
{ (Subtitles):
Press to turn
ON/OFF subtitles and to move
through subtitle options when a
DVD is playing. The format and
content of this function vary for
each disc.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switch
the system between the DVD player
and an auxiliary source.
d (Camera): Press to change
camera angles on DVDs that have
this feature when a DVD is playing.
The format and content of this
function vary for each disc.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):
The numeric keypad provides the
capability of direct chapter or track
number selection.
7-41
\ (Clear):
Press within
three seconds after entering a
numeric selection, to clear all
numerical inputs.
} 10 (Double Digit Entries):
Press
to select chapter or track numbers
greater than nine. Press this button
before entering the number.
If the remote control becomes lost
or damaged, a new universal
remote control can be purchased.
If this happens, make sure the
universal remote control uses a
Toshiba® code set.
7-42
Infotainment System
Battery Replacement
To change the remote control
batteries:
1. Slide the rear cover back, on the
remote control.
2. Replace the two batteries in the
compartment. Make sure that
they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the
battery compartment.
3. Replace the battery cover.
If the remote control is to be stored
for a long period of time, remove the
batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart
Problem
Recommended Action
No power.
The ignition might not be turned
ON/RUN or in ACC/ACCESSORY.
The picture does not fill the screen.
There are black borders on the top
and bottom or on both sides or it
looks stretched out.
Check the display mode settings in
the setup menu by pressing the
display menu button on the remote
control.
In auxiliary mode, the picture moves Check the auxiliary input
or scrolls.
connections at both devices.
The remote control does not work.
Check to make sure there is no
obstruction between the remote
control and the transmitter window.
Check the batteries to make sure
they are not dead or installed
incorrectly.
Infotainment System
7-43
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd)
DVD Display Error Messages
Problem
Recommended Action
After stopping the player, I push
Play but sometimes the DVD starts
where I left off and sometimes at the
beginning.
If the stop button was pressed
one time, the DVD player resumes
playing where the DVD was
stopped. If the stop button was
pressed two times the DVD player
begins to play from the beginning of
the DVD.
The DVD display error message
depends on which radio the vehicle
has. The video screen might display
one of the following:
The auxiliary source is running but
there is no picture or sound.
Check that the RSE video screen
is in the auxiliary source mode.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both devices.
Sometimes the wireless headphone
audio cuts out or buzzes.
Check for obstructions, low
batteries, reception range, and
interference from cellular telephone
towers or by using a cellular
telephone in the vehicle.
Check that the headphones are
on correctly using the L (left) and
R (right) on the headphones.
I lost the remote and/or the
headphones.
See your dealer/retailer for
assistance.
The DVD is playing, but there is no
picture or sound.
Check that the RSE video screen is
sourced to the DVD player.
Disc Load/Eject Error: This
message displays when there are
disc load or eject problems.
Disc Format Error: This message
displays if the disc is inserted with
the disc label wrong side up, or if
the disc is damaged.
Disc Region Error: This message
displays if the disc is not from a
correct region.
No Disc Inserted: This message
displays if no disc is present when
the Z EJECT button is pressed on
the radio.
7-44
Infotainment System
DVD Distortion
Video distortion can occur when
operating cellular phones, scanners,
CB radios, Global Position Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax,
or walkie talkies.
It might be necessary to turn off the
DVD player when operating one of
these devices in or near the vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
Cleaning the RSE Overhead
Console
When cleaning the RSE overhead
console surface, use only a clean
cloth dampened with clean water.
Cleaning the Video Screen
Use only a clean cloth dampened
with clean water. Use care when
directly touching or cleaning the
screen, as damage could result.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
System
For vehicles with Rear Seat Audio
(RSA), rear seat passengers can
listen to and control any of the
music sources: radio, CDs, DVDs,
or other auxiliary sources. The rear
seat passengers can only control
the music sources the front seat
passengers are not listening to
(except on some radios where dual
control is allowed). For example,
rear seat passengers can control a
CD and listen to it through the
headphones, while the driver listens
to the radio through the front
speakers. The rear seat passengers
have control of the volume for each
set of headphones.
The RSA functions operate even
when the main radio is off. The front
audio system displays X when the
RSA is on, and disappears from the
display when it is off.
Audio can be heard through wired
headphones (not included) plugged
into the jacks on the RSA. If the
vehicle has this feature, audio can
also be heard on Channel 2 of the
wireless headphones.
The audio system mutes the rear
speakers when the RSA audio is
active through the headphones.
To listen to an iPod or portable
audio device through the RSA,
attach the iPod or portable audio
device to the front auxiliary input
(if available), located on the front
audio system. Turn the iPod on,
then choose the front auxiliary input
with the RSA SRCE button.
Infotainment System
7-45
While listening to a disc, press ¨
to go to the next track or chapter on
the disc. Press © to go back to the
start of the current track or chapter
(if more than ten seconds have
played). This function is inactive,
with some radios, if the front seat
passengers are listening to the disc.
P (Power): Press to turn the RSA
on or off.
Volume: Turn to increase or to
decrease the volume of the wired
headphones. The left knob controls
the left headphones and the right
knob controls the right headphones.
SRCE (Source): Press to select
between the radio (AM/FM/XM™),
CD, and if the vehicle has these
features, DVD, front auxiliary, and
rear auxiliary.
© ¨ (Seek):
Press to go to the
previous or to the next station and
stay there. This function is inactive,
with some radios, if the front seat
passengers are listening to the
radio.
Press and hold © or ¨ until
the display flashes to tune to an
individual station. The display stops
flashing after the buttons have
not been pushed for more than
two seconds. This function is
inactive, with some radios, if the
front seat passengers are listening
to the radio.
When a DVD video menu is being
displayed, press © or ¨ to
perform a cursor up or down on the
menu. Hold © or ¨ to perform a
cursor left or right on the menu.
PROG (Program): Press to go to
the next preset radio station or
channel set on the main radio.
This function is inactive, with some
radios, if the front seat passengers
are listening to the radio.
7-46
Infotainment System
When a CD or DVD audio disc is
playing, press PROG to go to the
beginning of the CD or DVD audio.
This function is inactive, with some
radios, if the front seat passengers
are listening to the disc.
When a disc is playing in the CD or
DVD changer, press PROG to
select the next disc, if multiple discs
are loaded. This function is inactive,
with some radios, if the front seat
passengers are listening to the disc.
When a DVD video menu is being
displayed, press PROG to perform
the ENTER menu function.
Phone
Bluetooth
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system
can use a Bluetooth capable cell
phone with a Hands Free Profile to
make and receive phone calls. The
system can be used while the key is
in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position. The range of the Bluetooth
system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft.).
Not all phones support all functions,
and not all phones are guaranteed
to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth
system. See gm.com/bluetooth for
more information on compatible
phones.
Voice Recognition
The Bluetooth system uses voice
recognition to interpret voice
commands to dial phone numbers
and name tags.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to
a minimum. The system may not
recognize voice commands if there
is too much background noise.
When to Speak: A short tone
sounds after the system responds
indicating when it is waiting for a
voice command. Wait until the tone
and then speak.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
calm and natural voice.
Audio System
When using the in‐vehicle Bluetooth
system, sound comes through the
vehicle's front audio system
speakers and overrides the audio
system. Use the audio system
volume knob, during a call, to
change the volume level. The
adjusted volume level remains in
memory for later calls. To prevent
missed calls, a minimum volume
level is used if the volume is turned
down too low.
Infotainment System
Bluetooth Controls
Pairing Information:
Use the buttons located on the
steering wheel to operate the
in‐vehicle Bluetooth system.
See Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5‑3 for more information.
.
Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the in‐vehicle Bluetooth
system.
.
The pairing process is disabled
when the vehicle is moving.
.
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system
automatically links with the
first available paired cell phone
in the order the phone was
paired.
b g (Push To Talk):
Press to
answer incoming calls, to confirm
system information, and to start
speech recognition.
c x (Phone On Hook): Press to
end a call, reject a call, or to cancel
an operation.
.
Pairing
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone
must be paired to the in‐vehicle
Bluetooth system first and then
connected to the vehicle before it
can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for
Bluetooth functions before pairing
the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone
is not connected, calls will be made
using OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling,
if available. Refer to the OnStar
owner's guide for more information.
.
Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the in‐vehicle
Bluetooth system at a time.
Pairing should only need to be
completed once, unless changes
to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is
deleted.
To link to a different paired phone,
see Linking to a Different Phone
later in this section.
7-47
Pairing a Phone
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds with “Bluetooth ready”
followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds
with instructions and a four digit
PIN number. The PIN number
will be used in Step 4.
4. Start the Pairing process on the
cell phone that will be paired to
the vehicle. Reference the cell
phone manufacturers user guide
for information on this process.
Locate the device named
“General Motors” in the list on
the cellular phone and follow the
instructions on the cell phone to
enter the four digit PIN number
that was provided in Step 3.
7-48
Infotainment System
5. The system prompts for a name
for the phone. Use a name that
best describes the phone. This
name will be used to indicate
which phone is connected. The
system then confirms the name
provided.
6. The system responds with
“<Phone name> has been
successfully paired” after the
pairing process is complete.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for
additional phones to be paired.
Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds with “Bluetooth ready”
followed by a tone.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all
the paired Bluetooth devices.
If a phone is connected to the
vehicle, the system will say “Is
connected” after the connected
phone.
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds with “Bluetooth ready”
followed by a tone.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks
which phone to delete followed
by a tone.
4. Say the name of the phone to
be deleted. If the phone name
is unknown, use the “List”
command for a list of all paired
phones. The system responds
with “Would you like to delete
<phone name>? Yes or No”
followed by a tone.
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone.
The system responds with “OK,
deleting <phone name>”.
Linking to a Different Phone
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds with “Bluetooth ready”
followed by a tone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The
system responds with “Please
wait while I search for other
phones”.
.
If another phone is found,
the response will be
“<Phone name> is now
connected”.
.
If another phone is not
found, the original phone
remains connected.
Infotainment System
Storing Name Tags
The system can store up to thirty
phone numbers as name tags that
are shared between the Bluetooth
and OnStar systems.
The system uses the following
commands to store and retrieve
phone numbers:
.
Store
.
Digit Store
.
Directory
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone
number to be stored without
entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Store”. The system
responds with “Store, number
please” followed by a tone.
3. Say the complete phone number
to be stored at once with no
pauses.
.
.
If the system recognizes
the number it responds with
“OK, Storing” and repeats
the phone number.
If the system is unsure it
recognizes the phone
number, it responds with
“Store” and repeats the
number followed by “Please
say yes or no”. If the
number is correct, say
“Yes”. If the number is not
correct, say “No”. The
system will ask for the
number to be re‐entered.
4. After the system stores the
phone number, it responds with
“Please say the name tag”
followed by a tone.
7-49
5. Say a name tag for the phone
number. The name tag is
recorded and the system
responds with “About to store
<name tag>. Does that
sound OK?”.
.
If the name tag does not
sound correct, say “No” and
repeat Step 5.
.
If the name tag sounds
correct, say “Yes” and the
name tag is stored. After
the number is stored the
system returns to the
main menu.
7-50
Infotainment System
Using the Digit Store Command
The digit store command allows a
phone number to be stored by
entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system
responds with “Please say the
first digit to store” followed by
a tone.
3. Say the first digit to be stored.
The system will repeat back the
digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the
number to be stored is complete.
.
.
If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system,
say “Clear” at any time to
clear the last number.
To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system,
say “Verify” at any time and
the system will repeat them.
4. After the complete number has
been entered, say “Store”. The
system responds with “Please
say the name tag” followed by
a tone.
5. Say a name tag for the phone
number. The name tag is
recorded and the system
responds with “About to store
<name tag>. Does that
sound OK?”.
.
If the name tag does not
sound correct, say “No” and
repeat Step 5.
.
If the name tag sounds
correct, say “Yes” and the
name tag is stored. After
the number is stored the
system returns to the
main menu.
Using the Directory Command
The directory command lists all of
the name tags stored by the system.
To use the directory command:
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Directory”. The system
responds with “Directory” and
then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is
complete, the system returns to
the main menu.
Deleting Name Tags
The system uses the following
commands to delete name tags:
.
Delete
.
Delete all name tags
Using the Delete Command
The delete command allows specific
name tags to be deleted.
Infotainment System
To use the delete command:
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Delete”. The system
responds with “Delete, please
say the name tag” followed by
a tone.
3. Say the name tag to be deleted.
The system responds with
“Would you like to delete, <name
tag>? Please say yes or no”.
.
.
If the name tag is correct,
say “Yes” to delete the
name tag. The system
responds with “OK, deleting
<name tag>, returning to
the main menu.”
If the name tag is incorrect,
say “No”. The system
responds with “No. OK, let's
try again, please say the
name tag.”
Using the Delete All Name Tags
Command
The delete all name tags command
deletes all stored phone book name
tags and route name tags for
OnStar (if present).
To use the delete all name tags
command:
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The
system responds with “You are
about to delete all name tags
stored in your phone directory
and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want
to do this? Please say yes
or no.”
.
Say “Yes” to delete all
name tags.
.
Say “No” to cancel the
function and return to the
main menu.
7-51
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the
following commands:
.
Dial
.
Digit Dial
.
Call
.
Re‐dial
Using the Dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds
with “Dial using <phone name>”.
“Number please” followed by
a tone.
7-52
Infotainment System
3. Say the entire number without
pausing.
.
If the system recognizes
the number, it responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials
the number.
.
If the system does not
recognize the number, it
confirms the numbers
followed by a tone. If the
number is correct, say
“Yes”. The system responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials
the number. If the number
is not correct, say “No”.
The system will ask for the
number to be re‐entered.
Using the Digit Dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system
responds with “Digit dial using
<phone name>, please say the
first digit to dial” followed by
a tone.
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at
a time. Following each digit, the
system will repeat back the digit
it heard followed by a tone.
4. Continue entering digits until the
number to be dialed is complete.
After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The
system responds with “OK,
Dialing” and dials the number.
.
If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system,
say “Clear” at any time to
clear the last number.
.
To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system,
say “Verify” at any time and
the system will repeat them.
Using the Call Command
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds
with “Call using <phone name>.
Please say the name tag”
followed by a tone.
Infotainment System
3. Say the name tag of the person
to call.
.
.
If the system clearly
recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling,
<name tag>” and dials the
number.
If the system is unsure it
recognizes the right name
tag, it confirms the name
tag followed by a tone.
If the name tag is correct,
say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, calling,
<name tag>” and dials the
number. If the name tag is
not correct, say “No”. The
system will ask for the
name tag to be re‐entered.
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
7-53
Using the Re‐dial Command
Call Waiting
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
Call waiting must be supported on
the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
the wireless service carrier to work.
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial”. The
system responds with “Re‐dial
using <phone name>” and dials
the last number called from the
connected Bluetooth phone.
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received,
the audio system mutes and a ring
tone is heard in the vehicle.
.
Press b g and begin speaking
to answer the call.
.
Press
c x to ignore a call.
.
Press b g to answer an
incoming call when another call
is active. The original call is
placed on hold.
.
Press b g again to return to the
original call.
.
To ignore the incoming call,
continue with the original call
with no action.
.
Press c x to disconnect the
current call and switch to the call
on hold.
7-54
Infotainment System
Three‐Way Calling
Muting a Call
Three‐Way Calling must be
supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service
carrier to work.
During a call, all sounds from inside
the vehicle can be muted so that the
person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.
1. While on a call press b g. The
system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
To Mute a call
2. Say “Three‐way call”.
The system responds with
“Three‐way call, please say dial
or call”.
3. Use the dial or call command to
dial the number of the third party
to be called.
4. Once the call is connected,
press b g to link all the callers
together.
Ending a Call
Press
c x to end a call.
1. Press b g . The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Call muted”.
To Cancel Mute
1. Press b g . The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”.
The system responds with
“Resuming call”.
Transferring a Call
Audio can be transferred between
the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system and
the cell phone.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell
Phone
During a call with the audio in the
vehicle:
1. Press b g . The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system
responds with “Transferring call”
and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
The cellular phone must be paired
and connected with the Bluetooth
system before a call can be
transferred. The connection process
can take up to two minutes after the
key is turned to the ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY position.
During a call with the audio on the
cell phone, press b g for more than
two seconds. The audio switches
from the cell phone to the vehicle.
Infotainment System
Voice Pass-Thru
Voice Pass‐Thru allows access to
the voice recognition commands on
the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if
the cell phone supports this feature.
This feature can be used to verbally
access contacts stored in the cell
phone.
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds with “Bluetooth ready”
followed by a tone.
3. Say “Voice”. The system
responds with “OK, accessing
<phone name>”.
.
The cell phone's normal
prompt messages will go
through its cycle according
to the phone's operating
instructions.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) Tones
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can
send numbers and numbers stored
as name tags during a call. This is
used when calling a menu driven
phone system. Account numbers
can be programmed into the
phonebook for retrieval during menu
driven calls.
Sending a Number During a Call
1. Press b g . The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds
with “Say a number to send
tones” followed by a tone.
7-55
3. Say the number to send.
.
If the system clearly
recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending
Number” and the dial tones
are sent and the call
continues.
.
If the system is not sure it
recognized the number
properly, it responds “Dial
Number, Please say yes or
no?” followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say
“Yes”. The system responds
with “OK, Sending Number”
and the dial tones are sent
and the call continues.
7-56
Infotainment System
Sending a Stored Name Tag
During a Call
1. Press b g. The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The
system responds with “Say a
name tag to send tones”
followed by a tone.
3. Say the name tag to send.
.
If the system clearly
recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, Sending
<name tag>” and the dial
tones are sent and the call
continues.
.
If the system is not sure it
recognized the name tag
properly, it responds “Dial
<name tag>, Please say
yes or no?” followed by a
tone. If the name tag is
correct, say “Yes”. The
system responds with “OK,
Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and
the call continues.
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of
the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it
will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the
phonebook and phone pairing
information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the
above sections on Deleting a Paired
Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
Other Information
The Bluetooth® word mark and
logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by General Motors is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑16 for FCC information.
Climate Controls
Climate Controls
8-1
Climate Control Systems
Dual Automatic Climate Control System
Climate Control Systems
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Rear Climate Control System
(Rear Climate
Control Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Rear Climate Control System
(Rear Climate with Rear Seat
Audio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with
this system.
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
A. Fan Control
H. Display
B. AUTO
I.
C. Defrost
J. Rear Window Defogger
D. Recirculation
K. Air Conditioning
E. REAR (Rear Climate Control)
L. PASS (Passenger)
F. Air Delivery Mode Control
M. Passenger Side Temperature
Control
G. Driver Side Temperature Control
Power (On/Off)
8-2
Climate Controls
Display Function
Automatic Operation
Each time the temperature, mode,
or fan control buttons are pressed,
the climate control display shows
that function along with the inside
temperature setting. The outside
temperature is displayed on the
instrument panel cluster.
AUTO (Automatic): The system
automatically controls the inside
temperature, the air delivery, and
the fan speed.
O (On/Off):
Press to turn the
climate control system on or off.
While the system is off, outside air
still enters through the floor outlets,
but the air delivery mode can be
adjusted.
The climate control system will also
turn on if either the fan control,
defrost, AUTO, or air conditioning
buttons are pressed.
To use automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the
current temperature(s) selected
and AUTO is shown on the
display. The current air delivery
mode and fan speed also
appear for approximately
five seconds.
When AUTO is selected, the air
conditioning and air inlet are
automatically controlled. The air
conditioning runs when the
outside temperature is over
4°C (40°F). The system is
automatically set to outside air,
unless it is hot outside and
then the air inlet changes to
recirculation mode to help
quickly cool the vehicle.
The recirculation indicator
light will come on.
2. Set the temperature for the
driver and passenger.
To find a comfortable setting,
start with a 22°C (73°F)
temperature setting and allow
about 20 minutes for the
system to regulate. Use the
driver's side or passenger side
temperature buttons to adjust
the temperature setting as
necessary. The system will
remain at the selected setting.
Choosing the warmest or coolest
temperatures does not cause the
vehicle to heat or cool more
quickly.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold
weather, the system delays
turning on the fan until warm
air is available. Press the fan
control to override this delay and
select the fan speed.
Climate Controls
Temperature Control
The driver and passenger side
temperature buttons are used to
adjust the temperature of the air
coming through the system. The
temperature can be adjusted even
if the system is turned off since
outside air still enters the vehicle,
unless the recirculation mode is
selected. See “Recirculation” later in
this section.
Driver Side Temperature
Control: Press the + or − buttons
to increase or decrease the driver
side temperature. The driver side
temperature display will show the
temperature setting.
Passenger Side Temperature
Control: Press the + or − buttons
to increase or decrease the
passenger side temperature.
The passenger side display will
show the temperature setting.
PASS (Passenger): Press to set
the passenger temperature to match
the driver temperature setting. The
PASS indicator will turn off. When
the passenger temperature setting
is different than the driver setting,
the PASS indicator comes on.
Manual Operation
The air delivery mode or fan speed
can be manually adjusted.
D / C (Fan Control):
Press to
increase or decrease the fan speed.
Pressing D or C while in automatic
control places the fan speed under
manual control.
The air delivery mode remains in
automatic control. The fan setting
still displays, but the word AUTO
no longer displays, and the AUTO
button indicator light turns off.
8-3
H / G (Air Delivery Mode
Control): Press to change the
direction of the airflow in the vehicle.
Repeatedly press H or G until the
desired mode appears on the
display. Pressing a mode button
while the system is off changes the
air delivery mode without turning the
system on. Press a mode button
while in automatic control to place
the system into manual control.
The air delivery mode setting still
displays, but the word AUTO no
longer displays, and the AUTO
button indicator light turns off.
H (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level):
Air is divided
between the instrument panel and
floor outlets. Some air is directed
towards the windshield and side
window outlets. Cooler air is
directed to the upper outlets and
warmer air to the floor outlets.
8-4
Climate Controls
6 (Floor):
Air is directed to the
floor outlets, with some of the air
directed to the windshield, side
window, and second row floor
outlets. In this mode, the system
uses outside air.
the vehicle. The air conditioning
system runs automatically in this
setting, unless the outside
temperature is less than 4°C (40°F).
- (Defog):
This mode clears the
windows of fog or moisture. Air is
directed to the windshield, floor
outlets, and side window vents.
When this mode is selected, the
system turns off recirculation and
runs the air conditioning compressor
unless the outside temperature is
less than 4°C (40°F). Do not drive
the vehicle until all the windows are
clear.
While in defrost mode, if the PASS
button is pressed, the PASS button
indicator flashes three times to
show that the passenger climate
control system cannot be activated.
If the passenger temperature
buttons are adjusted while in
defrost mode, the driver
temperature indicator will change.
The passenger temperature will
not be displayed.
0 (Defrost):
When returning to bi-level, vent,
or floor mode, the previous
temperature settings displays in
place of any change made while in
defrost mode.
Press to turn the
defrost on or off. This mode quickly
clears the windshield of fog or frost.
Air is directed to the windshield,
side window, and floor vents. In this
mode, outside air is pulled inside
Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
Air Conditioning
# (Air Conditioning):
Press to
turn the air conditioning (A/C) on
and off. An indicator light comes on
when A/C is on.
The A/C does not work when the
outside temperature is below 4°C
(40°F). If # is pressed the indicator
flashes three times and turns off to
show that the A/C mode is not
available. If the A/C is on and the
outside temperature drops below a
temperature which is too cool for air
conditioning to be effective, the A/C
indicator turns off to show that the
A/C mode has been canceled.
On hot days, open the windows
briefly to let hot inside air escape.
This helps reduce the time it takes
for the interior of the vehicle to
cool down.
The air conditioning system
removes moisture from the air, so
water might drip under the vehicle
while idling or after turning off the
engine. This is normal.
Climate Controls
@ (Recirculation): Press to turn
the recirculation mode on or off.
An indicator light comes on when
recirculation is on. When the engine
is turned off, the recirculation mode
automatically turns off and must be
re‐selected when the engine is
turned on again.
REAR: Press to turn the rear
heating and air conditioning on or
off. See Rear Climate Control
System (Rear Climate Control Only)
on page 8‑7 or Rear Climate
Control System (Rear Climate with
Rear Seat Audio) on page 8‑8.
This mode recirculates and helps
to quickly cool the air inside the
vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering
the vehicle.
The rear window defogger uses a
warming grid to remove fog from the
rear window.
The recirculation mode cannot be
used with floor, defog, or defrosting
modes. If recirculation is selected in
these modes, the indicator flashes
three times and turns off. The air
conditioning compressor also comes
on when this mode is activated.
While in recirculation mode the
windows can fog when the weather
is cold and damp. To clear the fog,
select either the defog or defrost
mode and increase the fan speed.
Rear Window Defogger
< (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. The rear window
defogger stays on for about
10 minutes, before turning off.
The defogger also turns off when
the engine is turned off. Do not drive
the vehicle until all the windows are
clear.
8-5
For vehicles with heated outside
rearview mirrors, fog or frost is
cleared from the surface of the
mirror when the rear window defog
button is pressed.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade
or sharp object to clear the inside
rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid
lines in the rear glass. These
actions may damage the rear
defogger. Repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
8-6
Climate Controls
Sensors
The solar sensor, located in the
defrost grille in the middle of the
instrument panel, monitors the solar
heat. Do not cover the solar sensor
or the system will not work properly.
There is also an exterior
temperature sensor located behind
the front grille. This sensor reads
the outside air temperature and
helps maintain the temperature
inside the vehicle. Any cover on the
front of the vehicle could cause a
false reading in the displayed
temperature.
The interior temperature sensor
located on the instrument panel to
the right of the steering column,
measures the temperature of the air
inside the vehicle.
The climate control system uses the
information from these sensors to
maintain comfort settings by
adjusting the temperature, fan
speed, and the air delivery mode.
The system may also supply cooler
air to the side of the vehicle facing
the sun. The recirculation mode will
also be used as needed to maintain
cool outlet temperatures.
Climate Controls
Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate
Control Only)
8-7
Independent Mode: This mode
directs rear seating airflow
according to the settings of the rear
controls. It comes on when any rear
control is adjusted.
Fan Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Turn the
knob to 9 to turn the fan off.
Temperature Control: Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the airflow
temperature.
A. Fan Control
B. Temperature Control
C. Air Delivery Mode Control
For vehicles with the rear climate
control system, the controls are
located on the rear of the center
console. The system can also be
controlled with the front controls.
Press the REAR button on the front
climate control system to turn the
rear climate control system on or
off. An indicator comes on when the
rear system is on. The system also
turns on if any of the rear controls
are adjusted.
Mimic Mode: This mode matches
the rear climate control to the front
climate control settings. It comes on
when REAR is pressed.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn
to the desired mode to change the
airflow direction.
H (Vent): Air is directed through
the overhead outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is directed
through the rear floor outlets, as
well as the overhead outlets.
6 (Floor): Air is directed through
the floor outlets. The rear system
floor outlets are located under the
third row seats.
8-8
Climate Controls
Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate with Rear
Seat Audio)
Mimic Mode: This mode matches
the rear climate control to the front
climate control settings. It comes on
when REAR is pressed.
Independent Mode: This mode
directs rear seating airflow
according to the settings of the rear
controls. It comes on when any rear
control is adjusted.
D C (Fan Control):
Press the fan
up or down buttons to increase or
decrease the fan speed.
A. Fan Control
B. Air Delivery Mode Control
C. Temperature Control
For vehicles with the rear climate
control system, the controls are
located on the rear of the center
console.
Press the REAR button on the front
climate control system to turn the
rear climate control system on or
off. The system also turns on if any
of the rear controls, except for the C
are pressed. An indicator comes on
when the rear system is on.
The system can also be turned off,
by pressing and holding the C
button.
Temperature Control: Press +
or − to increase or decrease the
air temperature. The temperature
settings will display in
0‐12 increments, going from the
coolest (0) to the warmest (12)
setting.
N (Air Delivery Mode Control):
Press to manually change the
direction of the airflow. Repeatedly
press the button until the desired
mode appears on the display.
Climate Controls
H (Vent):
Air is directed through
the overhead outlets.
) (Bi-Level):
Air is directed
through the rear floor outlets, as
well as the overhead outlets.
6 (Floor):
Air is directed through
the floor outlets. The rear system
floor outlets are located under the
third row seats.
Air Vents
Use the slider switch in the center of
the outlet, to change the direction of
the air flow. Use the thumbwheel
near the outlet to control the amount
of air flow or to shut off the airflow.
Keep all outlets open whenever
possible for best system
performance.
Operation Tips
.
Clear away any ice, snow,
or leaves from the air inlets at
the base of the windshield that
can block the flow of air into the
vehicle.
.
Use of non-GM approved hood
deflectors can adversely affect
the performance of the system.
8-9
.
Keep the path under all seats
clear of objects to help circulate
the air inside the vehicle more
effectively.
.
If fogging reoccurs while in vent
or bi-level modes with mild
temperature throughout the
vehicle, turn on the air
conditioner to reduce windshield
fogging.
8-10
Climate Controls
2 NOTES
Driving and Operating
Driving and
Operating
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Parking Over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Engine Exhaust
Driving Information
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-8
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Starting and Operating
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . .
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-17
9-18
9-19
9-19
9-20
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-24
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Drive Systems
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Brakes
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Ride Control Systems
StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Cruise Control
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
9-1
Object Detection Systems
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-35
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Fuel
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-42
California Fuel
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-43
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Towing
General Towing
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . .
9-47
9-47
9-52
9-56
Conversions and Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
9-2
Driving and Operating
Driving Information
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always
expect the unexpected.” The first
step in driving defensively is to wear
your safety belt, see Safety Belts on
page 3‑13.
{ WARNING
Assume that other road users
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and other
drivers) are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate
what they might do and be ready.
In addition:
.
Allow enough following
distance between you and
the driver in front of you.
.
Focus on the task of driving.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Driver distraction can cause
collisions resulting in injury or
possible death. These simple
defensive driving techniques
could save your life.
Drunk Driving
{ WARNING
Drinking and then driving is
very dangerous. Your reflexes,
perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even
a small amount of alcohol. You
can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Death and injury associated with
drinking and driving is a global
tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that
anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
judgment, muscular coordination,
vision, and attentiveness.
Police records show that
almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve
alcohol. In most cases, these
deaths are the result of someone
who was drinking and driving.
In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related
deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
Driving and Operating
For persons under 21, it is against
the law in every U.S. state to drink
alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the
leading highway safety problem is
for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person's system can
make crash injuries worse,
especially injuries to the brain,
spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is
in a crash, that person's chance of
being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not
been drinking.
9-3
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
The following three systems
help to control the vehicle while
driving — brakes, steering, and
accelerator. At times, as when
driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide.
Meaning, you can lose control of the
vehicle. See StabiliTrak System on
page 9‑30.
See Brake System Warning Light
on page 5‑21.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer
accessories can affect vehicle
performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 10‑3.
Braking action involves perception
time and reaction time. Deciding to
push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is
reaction time.
Average reaction time is about
three‐fourths of a second. But that is
only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as
two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition,
alertness, coordination, and
eyesight all play a part. So do
alcohol, drugs, and frustration.
9-4
Driving and Operating
But even in three‐fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at
100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
(66 ft). That could be a lot of
distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between the
vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping
distances vary greatly with the
surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition
of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the
brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force
applied.
Avoid needless heavy
braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration
followed by heavy braking — rather
than keeping pace with traffic. This
is a mistake. The brakes might not
have time to cool between hard
stops. The brakes will wear out
much faster with a lot of heavy
braking. Keeping pace with the
traffic and allowing realistic following
distances eliminates a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If the engine ever stops while the
vehicle is being driven, brake
normally but do not pump the
brakes. If the brakes are pumped,
the pedal could get harder to push
down. If the engine stops, there will
still be some power brake assist but
it will be used when the brake is
applied. Once the power assist is
used up, it can take longer to stop
and the brake pedal will be harder
to push.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer
accessories can affect vehicle
performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 10‑3.
Steering
Power Steering
If power steering assist is lost
because the engine stops or the
power steering system is not
functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
Variable Effort Steering
The vehicle has a steering system
that continuously adjusts the effort
felt when steering at all vehicle
speeds. It provides ease when
parking, yet a firm, solid feel at
highway speeds.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a
reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road
surface, the angle at which the
curve is banked, and vehicle speed.
While in a curve, speed is the one
factor that can be controlled.
Driving and Operating
If there is a need to reduce speed,
do it before entering the curve, while
the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can
drive through the curve. Maintain a
reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve,
and then accelerate gently into the
straightaway.
page 9‑3. It is better to remove as
much speed as possible from a
collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right
depending on the space available.
The vehicle can perform very well in
emergencies like these. First apply
the brakes. See Braking on
The fact that such emergency
situations are always possible is a
good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety
belts properly.
Off-Road Recovery
The vehicle's right wheels can drop
off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can
be more effective than braking. For
example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane,
or a car suddenly pulls out from
nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right
in front of you. These problems can
be avoided by braking — if you can
stop in time. But sometimes you
cannot stop in time because there
is no room. That is the time for
evasive action — steering around
the problem.
9-5
An emergency like this requires
close attention and a quick decision.
If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock
positions, it can be turned a full
180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have
to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once
you have avoided the object.
If the level of the shoulder is only
slightly below the pavement,
recovery should be fairly easy.
Ease off the accelerator and then,
9-6
Driving and Operating
if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that the vehicle straddles
the edge of the pavement. Turn
the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm
(3 to 5 inches), about one-eighth
turn, until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the
steering wheel to go straight down
the roadway.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts
say about what happens when the
three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not
have enough friction where the tires
meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up.
Keep trying to steer and constantly
seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid
most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions,
and by not overdriving those
conditions. But skids are always
possible.
The three types of skids correspond
to the vehicle's three control
systems. In the braking skid, the
wheels are not rolling. In the
steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes
tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving
wheels to spin.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease
your foot off the accelerator pedal
and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, the vehicle
may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when
water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
material is on the road. For safety,
slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to
slow down on slippery surfaces
because stopping distance is longer
and vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with
reduced traction, try your best to
avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing
vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You might
not realize the surface is slippery
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to
recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored
surface — and slow down when you
have any doubt.
Remember: Antilock brakes help
avoid only the braking skid.
Driving and Operating
Driving on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce
vehicle traction and affect your
ability to stop and accelerate.
Always drive slower in these types
of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and
deep‐standing or flowing water.
{ WARNING
Wet brakes can cause crashes.
They might not work as well in a
quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work
normally.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. Driving through
flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be
very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
can build up under your vehicle's
tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is
wet enough and you are going fast
enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no
contact with the road.
9-7
There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
slow down when the road is wet.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet
weather driving tips include:
.
Allow extra following distance.
.
Pass with caution.
.
Keep windshield wiping
equipment in good shape.
.
Keep the windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled.
.
Have good tires with proper
tread depth. See Tires on
page 10‑37.
.
Turn off cruise control.
9-8
Driving and Operating
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Always be alert and pay attention to
your surroundings while driving.
If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle
and rest.
Driving on steep hills or through
mountains is different than driving
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
driving in these conditions include:
.
Keep the vehicle serviced and in
good shape.
.
Check all fluid levels and brakes,
tires, cooling system, and
transmission.
.
Going down steep or long hills,
shift to a lower gear.
Other driving tips include:
.
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
.
Keep interior temperature cool.
.
Keep your eyes moving — scan
the road ahead and to the sides.
.
Check the rearview mirror and
vehicle instruments often.
{ WARNING
If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
{ WARNING
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
or with the ignition off is
dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down
and they could get so hot that
they would not work well.
(Continued)
Driving and Operating
WARNING (Continued)
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
You would then have poor braking
or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the
engine running and the vehicle in
gear when going downhill.
.
Stay in your own lane.
Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road.
Drive at speeds that let you stay
in your own lane.
.
Top of hills: Be alert —
something could be in your lane
(stalled car, accident).
.
Pay attention to special road
signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.
Drive carefully when there is snow
or ice between the tires and the
road, creating less traction or
grip. Wet ice can occur at about
0°C (32°F) when freezing rain
begins to fall, resulting in even less
traction. Avoid driving on wet ice or
in freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently so
traction is not lost. Accelerating too
quickly causes the wheels to spin
and makes the surface under the
tires slick, so there is even less
traction.
9-9
Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive
wheels will spin and polish the
surface under the tires even more.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 9‑28 improves vehicle
stability during hard stops on
slippery roads, but apply the brakes
sooner than when on dry pavement.
Allow greater following distance on
any slippery road and watch for
slippery spots. Icy patches can
occur on otherwise clear roads in
shaded areas. The surface of a
curve or an overpass can remain icy
when the surrounding roads are
clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while
on ice.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped,
on slippery surfaces.
9-10
Driving and Operating
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a
serious situation. Stay with the
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use the Roadside
Assistance Program on page 13‑6.
To get help and keep everyone in
the vehicle safe:
.
Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
.
Tie a red cloth to an outside
mirror.
{ WARNING
Snow can trap engine exhaust
under the vehicle. This may
cause exhaust gases to get
inside. Engine exhaust contains
carbon monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
.
Clear away snow from around
the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
.
Check again from time to
time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
.
Open a window about
5 cm (two inches) on the side
of the vehicle that is away
from the wind to bring in
fresh air.
.
Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
.
Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
circulates the air inside the
vehicle and set the fan speed
to the highest setting.
See Climate Control System
in the Index.
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑23.
(Continued)
Driving and Operating
WARNING (Continued)
Snow can trap exhaust gases
under your vehicle. This can
cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside.
CO could overcome you and kill
you. You cannot see it or smell it,
so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking the
exhaust.
Run the engine for short periods
only as needed to keep warm, but
be careful.
To save fuel, run the engine for only
short periods as needed to warm
the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of
the way to save heat. Repeat this
until help arrives but only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the
cold. Moving about to keep warm
also helps.
If it takes some time for help to
arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs
faster than the idle speed. This
keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help
with the headlamps. Do this as little
as possible to save fuel.
If the Vehicle is Stuck
Slowly and cautiously spin the
wheels to free the vehicle when
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
If the vehicle has a traction system,
it can often help to free a stuck
vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's
traction system in the Index. If stuck
too severely for the traction system
to free the vehicle, turn the traction
system off and use the rocking
method.
9-11
{ WARNING
If the vehicle's tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you
or others could be injured. The
vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little
as possible and avoid going
above 55 km/h (35 mph) as
shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
Chains on page 10‑57.
9-12
Driving and Operating
Rocking the Vehicle to Get
it Out
Turn the steering wheel left and
right to clear the area around the
front wheels. Turn off any traction or
stability system. Shift back and forth
between R (Reverse) and a forward
gear, spinning the wheels as little as
possible. To prevent transmission
wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears.
Release the accelerator pedal while
shifting, and press lightly on the
accelerator pedal when the
transmission is in gear. Slowly
spinning the wheels in the forward
and reverse directions causes a
rocking motion that could free the
vehicle. If that does not get the
vehicle out after a few tries, it might
need to be towed out. If the vehicle
does need to be towed out, see
Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑84.
Vehicle Load Limits
It is very important to know how
much weight your vehicle can
carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and
includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all
nonfactory-installed options.
Two labels on your vehicle
show how much weight it may
properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and
the Certification/Tire label.
{ WARNING
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
If you do, parts on the vehicle
can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles.
These could cause you to
lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the
life of the vehicle.
Driving and Operating
Tire and Loading Information
Label
maximum vehicle capacity
weight (B) in kilograms and
pounds.
The Tire and Loading
Information label also shows the
size of the original equipment
tires (C) and the recommended
cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires
and inflation see Tires on
page 10‑37 and Tire Pressure on
page 10‑44 .
Example Label
A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to the center pillar
(B-pillar) of your vehicle. With
the driver's door open, you will
find the label attached below the
door lock post (striker). The tire
and loading information label
shows the number of occupant
seating positions (A), and the
There is also important loading
information on the vehicle
Certification/Tire label. It tells
you the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
the front and rear axle. See
“Certification/Tire Label” later in
this section.
9-13
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1. Locate the statement
“The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's
placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
9-14
Driving and Operating
4. The resulting figure equals
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs and
there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (1400 − 750
(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity for
your vehicle.
See Trailer Towing on page 9‑52
for important information on
towing a trailer, towing safety
rules and trailering tips.
Example 1
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 1 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg
(300 lbs).
C. Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight = 317 kg
(700 lbs).
Driving and Operating
9-15
seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
your vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification/Tire Label
Example 2
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg
(750 lbs).
C. Available Cargo
Weight = 113 kg (250 lbs).
Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
C. Available Cargo
Weight = 0 kg (0 lbs).
Refer to your vehicle's tire and
loading information label for
specific information about your
vehicle's capacity weight and
Label Example
A vehicle specific Certification/
Tire label is attached to the rear
edge of the driver's door.
The label shows the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle.
This is called the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR).
9-16
Driving and Operating
The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel, and cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also
tells you the maximum weights
for the front and rear axles,
called the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). To find out the
actual loads on your front and
rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your
vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can
help you with this. Be sure to
spread out your load equally on
both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle or the GAWR for
either the front or rear axle.
{ WARNING
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
If you do, parts on the vehicle
can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles.
These could cause you to
lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the
life of the vehicle.
Notice : Overloading the
vehicle may cause damage.
Repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Do not overload the vehicle.
If you put things inside your
vehicle — like suitcases, tools,
packages, or anything else, they
will go as fast as the vehicle
goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash,
they will keep going.
{ WARNING
Things you put inside your
vehicle can strike and injure
people in a sudden stop or
turn, or in a crash.
.
Put things in the cargo
area of your vehicle. Try to
spread the weight evenly.
.
Never stack heavier
things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above
the tops of the seats.
(Continued)
Driving and Operating
WARNING (Continued)
.
Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
.
When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure
it whenever you can.
.
Do not leave a seat folded
down unless you need to.
Starting and
Operating
.
Avoid making hard stops for
the first 322 km (200 miles) or
so. During this time the new
brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this
breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake
linings.
.
Do not tow a trailer during
break-in. See Driving
Characteristics and Towing
Tips on page 9‑47 for the
trailer towing capabilities
of your vehicle and more
information.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not
need an elaborate break-in. But it
will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
.
.
If you have all-wheel drive,
keep your speed at 88 km/h
(55 mph) or less for the
first 805 km (500 miles).
Do not drive at any one
constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 805 km
(500 miles). Do not make
full-throttle starts. Avoid
downshifting to brake or
slow the vehicle.
9-17
Following break‐in, engine speed
and load can be gradually
increased.
9-18
Driving and Operating
Ignition Positions
and turn it only with your hand.
If the key cannot be turned by
hand, see your dealer/retailer.
the ignition and steering wheel. Use
this position if the vehicle must be
pushed or towed.
( (LOCK/OFF):
R (ON/RUN): This position can be
used to operate the electrical
accessories and to display some
instrument panel warning and
indicator lights. The switch stays in
this position when the engine is
running. The transmission is also
unlocked in this position. If you
leave the key in the ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position
with the engine off, the battery could
be drained. You may not be able to
start the vehicle if the battery is
allowed to drain for an extended
period of time.
This position locks
the ignition and transmission. The
key can be removed in LOCK/OFF.
The shift lever must be in P (Park)
to turn the ignition switch to
LOCK/OFF.
The ignition switch has four different
positions.
In order to shift out of P (Park), the
ignition must be in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake
pedal must be applied.
Notice: Using a tool to force the
key to turn in the ignition could
cause damage to the switch or
break the key. Use the correct
key, make sure it is all the way in,
The steering can bind with the
wheels turned off center. If this
happens, move the steering wheel
from right to left while turning the
key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this
doesn't work, then the vehicle
needs service.
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is
the position in which you can
operate the electrical accessories or
items plugged into the accessory
power outlets. This position unlocks
/ (START):
This is the position
that starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The
ignition switch will return to ON/RUN
for driving.
Driving and Operating
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be
used for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition key is turned off:
.
Audio System
.
Power Windows
.
Sunroof (if equipped)
Power to the windows and sunroof
will work up to 10 minutes or until a
door is opened.
The radio continues to work for
10 minutes or until the driver's door
is opened.
For an additional 10 minutes of
operation, close all the doors and
turn the key to ON/RUN and then
back to LOCK/OFF.
All these features will work when
the key is in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY positions.
Starting the Engine
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
N (Neutral). The engine will not start
in any other position. To restart the
engine when the vehicle is already
moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.
If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park)
only when the vehicle is stopped.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition to START.
When the engine starts, let go of
the key. The idle speed will slow
down as the engine warms. Do
not race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently
to allow the oil to warm up and
lubricate all moving parts.
The vehicle has a
Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects
9-19
components. If the ignition key is
turned to the START position,
and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the
engine will continue cranking
for a few seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does
not start and the key is held in
START, cranking will be stopped
after 15 seconds to prevent
cranking motor damage.
To prevent gear damage, this
system also prevents cranking if
the engine is already running.
Engine cranking can be stopped
by turning the ignition switch to
the ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF position.
Notice: Cranking the engine for
long periods of time, by returning
the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has
ended, can overheat and damage
the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to let the
cranking motor cool down.
9-20
Driving and Operating
2. If the engine does not start after
5‐10 seconds, especially in
very cold weather (below 0°F
or −18°C), it could be flooded
with too much gasoline. Try
pushing the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and holding
it there as you hold the key in
START for up to a maximum
of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to
allow the cranking motor to cool
down. When the engine starts,
let go of the key and accelerator.
If the vehicle starts briefly but
then stops again, repeat these
steps. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine. Do not
race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently
until the oil warms up and
lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to
work with the electronics in the
vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change
the way the engine operates.
Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your
dealer/retailer. If you do not,
the engine might not perform
properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Engine Heater
The engine coolant heater can
provide easier starting and better
fuel economy during engine
warm-up in cold weather conditions
at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles
with an engine coolant heater
should be plugged in at least
four hours before starting. Some
models may have an internal
thermostat in the cord which will
prevent engine coolant heater
operation at temperatures above
0°F (−18°C).
To Use the Engine Coolant
Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap
the electrical cord. The cord is
located on the driver side of the
engine compartment. It is routed
around the windshield washer
fluid reservoir.
3. Plug the cord into a normal,
grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
Driving and Operating
{ WARNING
Plugging the cord into an
ungrounded outlet could cause an
electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could
overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug
the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension
cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be
sure to unplug and store the
cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts.
If you do not, it could be
damaged.
The length of time the heater should
remain plugged in depends on
several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer
in the area where you will be
parking the vehicle for the best
advice on this.
Shifting Into Park
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine
running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑47.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and
set the parking brake. See
Parking Brake on page 9‑29 for
more information.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
by holding in the button on the
shift lever and pushing the shift
lever all the way toward the front
of the vehicle.
9-21
3. Turn the ignition key to
LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with
you. If you can leave the vehicle
with the ignition key in your
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
Leaving the Vehicle with the
Engine Running
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to leave the
vehicle with the engine running.
The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it
could overheat and even catch
fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle
with the engine running.
If you have to leave the vehicle with
the engine running, be sure the
vehicle is in P (Park) and the
parking brake is firmly set before
9-22
Driving and Operating
you leave it. After you have moved
the shift lever into P (Park), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then,
see if you can move the shift lever
away from P (Park) without first
pushing the button.
Shifting Out of Park
To shift out of P (Park):
The vehicle is equipped with an
electronic shift lock release system.
The shift lock release is
designed to:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
If you can, it means that the shift
lever was not fully locked in
P (Park).
.
Torque Lock
Torque lock is when the weight
of the vehicle puts too much
force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. This happens when
parking on a hill and shifting the
transmission into P (Park) is not
done properly and then it is difficult
to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake
and then shift into P (Park). To find
out how, see “Shifting Into Park”
listed previously.
If torque lock does occur, your
vehicle may need to be pushed
uphill by another vehicle to relieve
the parking pawl pressure, so you
can shift out of P (Park).
.
Prevent ignition key removal
unless the shift lever is in
P (Park) with the shift lever
button fully released, and
Prevent movement of the shift
lever out of P (Park), unless the
ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY and the regular
brake pedal is applied.
The shift lock release is always
functional except in the case of an
uncharged or low voltage (less than
9 volt) battery.
If the vehicle has an uncharged
battery or a battery with low voltage,
try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on
page 10‑80 for more information.
2. Press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of
P (Park):
1. Fully release the shift lever
button.
2. While holding down the brake
pedal, press the shift lever
button again.
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift
lever from P (Park), see your
dealer/retailer.
Driving and Operating
Parking Over Things
That Burn
{ WARNING
Things that can burn could touch
hot exhaust parts under the
vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass,
or other things that can burn.
Engine Exhaust
{ WARNING
Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. Exposure to
CO can cause unconsciousness
and even death.
WARNING (Continued)
.
The vehicle’s exhaust system
has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
.
There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
damage or after-market
modifications that are not
completely sealed.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
.
.
.
The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking
garages, tunnels, deep snow
that may block underbody
airflow or tail pipes).
The exhaust smells or
sounds strange or different.
The exhaust system leaks
due to corrosion or damage.
(Continued)
9-23
If unusual fumes are detected or
if it is suspected that exhaust is
coming into the vehicle:
.
Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
.
Have the vehicle repaired
immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed
area such as a garage or a
building that has no fresh air
ventilation.
9-24
Driving and Operating
Running the Vehicle
While Parked
It is better not to park with the
engine running. But if you ever have
to, here are some things to know.
{ WARNING
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑23.
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out
of the vehicle if the automatic
transmission shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
Follow the proper steps to be sure
the vehicle will not move. See
Shifting Into Park on page 9‑21.
If parking on a hill and pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑47.
Automatic
Transmission
The automatic transmission has a
shift lever located on the console
between the seats.
P (Park): This position locks the
front wheels. It is the best position
to use when starting the engine
because the vehicle cannot
move easily.
Driving and Operating
{ WARNING
It is dangerous to get out of the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
page 9‑21. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑47.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in
P (Park) before starting the engine.
The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control
system. You must fully apply the
regular brake first and then press
the shift lever button before shifting
from P (Park) when the ignition key
is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out
of P (Park), ease pressure on the
shift lever, then push the shift lever
all the way into P (Park) as you
maintain brake application. Then
press the shift lever button and
move the shift lever into another
gear. See Shifting Out of Park on
page 9‑22.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to
back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
after the vehicle is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to
get out of snow, ice or sand without
damaging the transmission, see If
the Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑11.
9-25
N (Neutral): In this position, the
engine does not connect with the
wheels. To restart the engine when
the vehicle is already moving, use
N (Neutral) only. Also, use
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is
being towed.
{ WARNING
Shifting into a drive gear while the
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly.
You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift
into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or
N (Neutral) with the engine
running at high speed may
damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle.
9-26
Driving and Operating
D (Drive): This position is for
normal driving. It provides the best
fuel economy. If you need more
power for passing, and you are:
designed to improve fuel economy
and performance. Use the brake to
hold the vehicle on a hill. Do not use
the accelerator pedal.
.
Going less than 56 km/h
(35 mph), push the accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
.
Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or
more, push the accelerator all
the way down.
L (Low): This position gives you
access to gear ranges. This
provides more engine braking but
lower fuel economy than D (Drive).
You can use it on very steep hills,
or in deep snow or mud.
Notice: If the vehicle seems to
accelerate slowly or not shift
gears when you go faster, and
you continue to drive the vehicle
that way, you could damage the
transmission. Have the vehicle
serviced right away. You can
drive in L (Low) when you are
driving less than 56 km/h (35 mph)
and D (Drive) for higher speeds
until then.
If the vehicle is stopped on a hill,
with your foot off the brake pedal,
the vehicle may roll. This is normal
and is due to the torque converter
Manual Mode
Electronic Range Select
(ERS) Mode
ERS mode allows you to choose the
top-gear limit of the transmission
and the vehicle's speed while
driving down hill or towing a trailer.
The vehicle has an electronic shift
position indicator within the
instrument panel cluster. When
using the ERS Mode a number will
display next to the L, indicating the
current gear that has been selected.
To use this feature:
1. Move the shift lever to L (Low).
2. Press the plus/minus button
located on the shift lever, to
increase or decrease the gear
range available.
When you shift from D (Drive) to
L (Low), the transmission will shift to
a pre-determined lower gear range.
The highest gear available for this
pre-determined range is displayed
next to the L in the DIC. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑25 for more information.
The number displayed in the
DIC is the highest gear that the
transmission will be allowed to
operate in. This means that all
gears below that number are
available. For example, when
4 (Fourth) is shown next to the L,
1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears are
automatically shifted by the vehicle.
The transmission will not shift into
5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus) button is
used or you shift back into D (Drive).
Driving and Operating
While in L (Low), the transmission
will prevent shifting to a lower gear
range if the engine speed is too
high. You have a brief period of time
to slow the vehicle. If vehicle speed
is not reduced within the time
allowed, the lower gear range shift
will not be completed. You must
further slow the vehicle, then press
the − (Minus) button to the desired
lower gear range.
Automatic Engine Grade braking is
not available when the ERS is
active. It is available in D (Drive) for
both normal and Tow/Haul mode.
While using the ERS, cruise control
and the tow/haul mode can be used.
See Tow/Haul Mode following.
Tow/Haul Mode
_ (Tow/Haul): The vehicle may
have a Tow/Haul mode.
The button is located on the
instrument panel under the climate
controls.
Push the button to activate the
system. Push it again to deactivate
the system. You can use this feature
to assist when towing or hauling a
heavy load.
When Tow/Haul is activated the
Tow/Haul symbol will come on
the instrument panel cluster. See
“Tow/Haul Mode” under Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9‑47 for more information.
9-27
Automatic Engine Grade
Braking
Automatic Engine Grade Braking
assists when driving on a downhill
grade. It maintains vehicle speed by
automatically implementing a shift
schedule that uses the engine and
the transmission to slow the vehicle.
The system will automatically
command downshifts to reduce
vehicle speed, until the brake pedal
is no longer being pressed.
While in the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) mode, grade braking
is deactivated, allowing the driver to
select a range and limiting the
highest gear available. Grade
braking is available for normal
driving and in Tow/Haul mode.
See Automatic Transmission on
page 9‑24.
9-28
Driving and Operating
Drive Systems
Brakes
All-Wheel Drive
Antilock Brake
System (ABS)
With this feature, engine power is
always sent to all four wheels. It is
fully automatic, and adjusts itself as
needed for road conditions.
When using a compact spare tire
on an AWD vehicle, the system
automatically detects the compact
spare and disables AWD. To restore
AWD operation and prevent
excessive wear on system, replace
the compact spare with a full-size
tire as soon as possible. See
Compact Spare Tire on page 10‑79
for more information.
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), an advanced
electronic braking system that helps
prevent a braking skid.
When the engine is started and the
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
checks itself. A momentary motor or
clicking noise might be heard while
this test is going on, and it might
even be noticed that the brake
pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem with ABS, this
warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑22.
If driving safely on a wet road and it
becomes necessary to slam on the
brakes and continue braking to
avoid a sudden obstacle, a
computer senses that the wheels
are slowing down. If one of the
wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the
brakes at each wheel.
ABS can change the brake pressure
to each wheel, as required, faster
than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the
computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls
braking pressure accordingly.
Driving and Operating
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to
apply the brakes if that vehicle
suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to
stop, even with ABS.
Parking Brake
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
the brake pedal down firmly and let
ABS work. The ABS pump or motor
might be heard operating, and the
brake pedal might be felt to pulsate,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time. In many
emergencies, steering can help
more than even the very best
braking.
To set the parking brake, hold the
regular brake pedal down, then
push the parking brake pedal down.
If the ignition is on, the brake
system warning light will come on.
See Brake System Warning Light
on page 5‑21.
9-29
Notice: Driving with the parking
brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system
parts. Make sure that the parking
brake is fully released and the
brake warning light is off before
driving.
To release the parking brake, hold
the regular brake pedal down, then
push down momentarily on the
parking brake pedal until you feel
the pedal release. Slowly pull your
foot up off the park brake pedal.
If the parking brake is not released
when you begin to drive, the brake
system warning light will be on and
a chime will sound warning you that
the parking brake is still on.
If you are towing a trailer and are
parking on a hill, see Trailer Towing
on page 9‑52.
9-30
Driving and Operating
Brake Assist
This vehicle has a brake assist
feature designed to assist the driver
in stopping or decreasing vehicle
speed in emergency driving
conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake
control module to supplement
the power brake system under
conditions where the driver has
quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
stop or slow down the vehicle.
The stability system hydraulic brake
control module increases brake
pressure at each corner of the
vehicle until the ABS activates.
Minor brake pedal pulsations or
pedal movement during this time
is normal and the driver should
continue to apply the brake pedal
as the driving situation dictates.
The brake assist feature will
automatically disengage when the
brake pedal is released or brake
pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
Ride Control Systems
StabiliTrak System
The vehicle has the StabiliTrak
system which combines antilock
brake, traction and stability control
systems and helps the driver
maintain directional control of the
vehicle in most driving conditions.
When you first start the vehicle and
begin to drive away, the system
performs several diagnostic checks
to ensure there are no problems.
The system may be heard or felt
while it is working. This is normal
and does not mean there is a
problem with the vehicle. The
system should initialize before the
vehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph).
In some cases, it may take
approximately 3.2 km (2 miles) of
driving before the system initializes.
If the system fails to turn on or
activate, the StabiliTrak light along
with one of the following messages
will be displayed on the Driver
Information Center (DIC):
TRACTION CONTROL OFF,
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL,
SERVICE STABILITRAK. If these
conditions are observed, turn the
vehicle off, wait 15 seconds,
and then turn it back on again to
reset the system. If any of these
messages still appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC),
the vehicle should be taken in for
service. For more information on
the DIC messages, see Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑25.
The StabiliTrak light will flash on the
instrument panel cluster when the
system is both on and activated.
The system may be heard or felt
while it is working; this is normal.
Driving and Operating
The traction control disable button is
located on the instrument panel
below the climate controls.
The traction control part of
StabiliTrak can be turned off by
pressing and releasing the traction
control disable button.
Traction control can be turned on by
pressing and releasing the traction
control disable button if not
automatically shut off for any
other reason.
When the traction control system is
turned off, the StabiliTrak light and
the appropriate traction control off
message will be displayed on the
DIC to warn the driver. The vehicle
will still have brake-traction control
when traction control is off, but will
not be able to use the engine speed
management system. See “Traction
Control Operation” next for more
information.
When the traction control system
has been turned off, system noises
may be heard and felt as a result of
the brake-traction control working.
It is recommended to leave the
system on for normal driving
conditions, but it may be necessary
to turn the system off if the vehicle
is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,
and you want to “rock” the vehicle to
attempt to free it. It may also be
necessary to turn off the system
when driving in extreme off-road
conditions where high wheel spin is
required. See If the Vehicle is Stuck
on page 9‑11.
9-31
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system is part of
the StabiliTrak system. Traction
control limits wheel spin by reducing
engine power to the wheels (engine
speed management) and by
applying brakes to each individual
wheel (brake-traction control) as
necessary.
The traction control system is
enabled automatically when the
vehicle is started. It will activate and
the StabiliTrak light will flash if it
senses that any of the wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose
traction while driving. If traction
control is turned off, only the
brake-traction control portion
of traction control will work.
9-32
Driving and Operating
The engine speed management will
be disabled. In this mode, engine
power is not reduced automatically
and the driven wheels can spin
more freely. This can cause the
brake-traction control to activate
constantly.
Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle
is allowed to spin excessively
while the StabiliTrak, ABS and
brake warning lights and any
relevant DIC messages are
displayed, the transfer case could
be damaged. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Reduce engine power
and do not spin the wheel(s)
excessively while these lights and
messages are displayed.
The traction control system may
activate on dry or rough roads or
under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or
abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the
transmission. When this happens,
a reduction in acceleration may be
noticed, or a noise or vibration may
be heard. This is normal.
If cruise control is being used when
the system activates, the StabiliTrak
light will flash and cruise control will
automatically disengage. Cruise
control may be reengaged when
road conditions allow. See Cruise
Control on page 9‑32.
StabiliTrak may also turn off
automatically if it determines that a
problem exists with the system.
If the problem does not clear itself
after restarting the vehicle, see your
dealer/retailer for service.
Cruise Control
With cruise control, a speed of
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can
be maintained without keeping your
foot on the accelerator. Cruise
control does not work at speeds
below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
When the brakes are applied, the
cruise control is disengaged.
{ WARNING
Cruise control can be dangerous
where you cannot drive safely at
a steady speed. So, do not use
the cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous
on slippery roads. On such roads,
fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use
cruise control on slippery roads.
Driving and Operating
[ (Cancel):
Press to cancel cruise
control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
1. Press the I button to turn the
cruise control system on.
Setting Cruise Control
3. Press and release the
SET– button located on the
steering wheel.
Cruise control will not work if the
parking brake is set, or if the master
cylinder brake fluid level is low.
The cruise control buttons are
located on left side of the steering
wheel.
T (On/Off): Press to turn cruise
control on and off. The indicator
comes on when cruise control is on.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate):
Press to make the vehicle
accelerate or resume to a previously
set speed.
SET– : Press to set the speed and
activate cruise control or to make
the vehicle decelerate.
9-33
The cruise control light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on
after the cruise control has been set
to the desired speed.
{ WARNING
If you leave your cruise control on
when you are not using cruise,
you might hit a button and go into
cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even
lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want
to use cruise control.
2. Get up to the speed desired.
4. Take your foot off the
accelerator.
Resuming a Set Speed
If the cruise control is set at a
desired speed and then the
brakes are applied, the cruise
control is disengaged without
erasing the set speed from memory.
Once the vehicle speed is
40 km/h (25 mph) or greater, press
the +RES button on the steering
wheel. The vehicle returns to
the previously set speed and
stays there.
9-34
Driving and Operating
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
If the cruise control is already
engaged,
.
.
Press and hold the +RES button
on the steering wheel until the
desired speed is reached, then
release it.
To increase vehicle speed in
small increments, press the
+RES button briefly. Each time
this is done, the vehicle goes
about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is
already engaged,
.
Press and hold the SET– button
on the steering wheel until the
lower speed desired is reached,
then release it.
.
To slow down in very small
amounts, press the SET– button
briefly. Each time this is done,
the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h
(1 mph) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While
Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to
increase vehicle speed. When you
take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the
previously set cruise speed.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control will work
on hills depends upon the vehicle
speed, load, and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills,
you might have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain the
vehicle speed. When going
downhill, you might have to brake
or shift to a lower gear to keep the
vehicle speed down. When the
brakes are applied the cruise control
is disengaged.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end cruise
control:
.
Step lightly on the brake pedal.
.
Press the
.
[ button.
Press the T button.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed
memory is erased when the cruise
control or the ignition is turned off.
Driving and Operating
Object Detection
Systems
Ultrasonic Parking Assist
For vehicles with the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
it operates at speeds less than
8 km/h (5 mph), and assists the
driver with parking and avoiding
objects while in R (Reverse). The
sensors on the rear bumper are
used to detect the distance to an
object up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind the
vehicle, and at least 25.4 cm (10 in)
off the ground.
{ WARNING
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) system does not
replace driver vision. It cannot
detect:
.
.
Objects that are below the
bumper, underneath the
vehicle, or if they are too
close or far from the vehicle
Children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets.
If you do not use proper care
before and while backing; vehicle
damage, injury, or death could
occur. Even with URPA, always
check behind the vehicle before
backing up. While backing, be
sure to look for objects and check
the vehicle's mirrors.
9-35
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically
when the shift lever is moved into
R (Reverse). A single tone sounds
to indicate the system is working.
URPA operates only at speeds less
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
An obstacle is indicated by audible
beeps. The interval between the
beeps becomes shorter as the
vehicle gets closer to the obstacle.
When the distance is less than
30 cm (12 in) the beeps are
continuous.
To be detected, objects must be at
least 25.4 cm (10 in) off the ground
and below liftgate level. Objects
must also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from
the rear bumper. This distance may
be less during warmer or humid
weather.
The system can be disabled through
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See “Park Assist” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑40 for
more information.
9-36
Driving and Operating
When the System Does Not
Seem to Work Properly
If the URPA system does not
activate due to a temporary
condition, the message PARK
ASSIST OFF displays on the DIC
when the shift lever is moved into
R (Reverse). This may occur under
the following conditions:
.
The driver disables the system.
.
The ultrasonic sensors are not
clean. Keep the vehicle's rear
bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice and slush. For cleaning
instructions, see Exterior Care
on page 10‑87.
.
A trailer was attached to the
vehicle, or a bicycle or an object
was hanging out of the liftgate
during the last drive cycle. Once
the attached object is removed,
URPA will return to normal
operation.
.
A tow bar is attached to the
vehicle.
.
The vehicle's bumper is
damaged. Take the vehicle to
your dealer/retailer to repair the
system.
.
Other conditions may affect
system performance, such as
vibrations from a jackhammer or
the compression of air brakes on
a very large truck.
If the system is still disabled, after
driving forward at least 25 km/h
(15 mph), take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC)
The vehicle may have a Rear Vision
Camera system. Read this entire
section before using it.
{ WARNING
The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
system does not replace driver
vision. RVC does not:
.
Detect objects that are
outside the camera's field of
view, below the bumper,
or underneath the vehicle.
.
Detect children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets.
Do not back the vehicle by only
looking at the RVC screen, or use
the screen during longer, higher
speed backing maneuvers or
where there could be cross-traffic.
(Continued)
Driving and Operating
WARNING (Continued)
Your judged distances using the
screen will differ from actual
distances.
So if you do not use proper care
before backing up, you could hit
a vehicle, child, pedestrian,
bicyclist, or pet, resulting in
vehicle damage, injury, or death.
Even though the vehicle has the
RVC system, always check
carefully before backing up by
checking behind and around
the vehicle.
Vehicles Without Navigation
System
The rear vision camera system is
designed to help the driver when
backing up by displaying a view of
the area behind the vehicle. When
the key is in the ON/RUN position
and the driver shifts the vehicle into
R (Reverse), the video image
automatically appears on the inside
rear view mirror. Once the driver
shifts out of R (Reverse), the video
image automatically disappears
from the inside rear view mirror.
Turning the Rear Vision Camera
System Off or On
To turn off the rear vision camera
system, press and hold z , located
on the inside rearview mirror, until
the left indicator light turns off.
The rear camera vision display is
now disabled.
9-37
To turn the rear vision camera
system on again, press and hold z
until the left indicator light
illuminates. The rear vision camera
system display is now enabled
and the display will appear in the
mirror normally.
Vehicles With Navigation
System
The rear vision camera system is
designed to help the driver when
backing up by displaying a view of
the area behind the vehicle. When
the driver shifts the vehicle into
R (Reverse), the video image
automatically appears on the
navigation screen. Once the driver
shifts out of R (Reverse), the
navigation screen will go back to the
last screen that had been displayed,
after a delay.
9-38
Driving and Operating
There is a message on the rear
vision camera screen that states
“Check Surroundings for Safety”.
Turning the Rear Vision Camera
System On or Off
To turn the rear vision camera
system on or off:
Adjusting the Brightness and
Contrast of the Screen
1. Shift into P (Park).
To adjust the brightness and
contrast of the screen, press the
MENU button while the rear vision
camera image is on the display. Any
adjustments made will only affect
the rear vision camera screen.
2. Press the MENU button to enter
the configure menu options, then
press the MENU hard key to
select Display or touch the
Display screen button.
3. Select the Rear Camera Options
screen button. The Rear Camera
Options screen displays.
4. Select the Video screen button.
When the Video screen button is
highlighted the RVC system
is on.
] (Brightness) : Touch the
+ (plus) or – (minus) screen buttons
to increase or decrease the
brightness of the screen.
The delay that is received after
shifting out of R (Reverse) is
approximately 10 seconds.
The delay can be cancelled by
performing one of the following:
_ (Contrast) : Touch the + (plus)
or – (minus) screen buttons to
increase or decrease the contrast of
the screen.
.
Pressing a hard key on the
navigation system.
.
Shifting in to P (Park).
.
Reach a vehicle speed of
5 mph (8 km/h).
Driving and Operating
Symbols
The navigation system may have a
feature that lets the driver view
symbols on the navigation screen
while using the rear vision camera.
The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist
(URPA) system must not be
disabled to use the caution symbols.
If URPA has been disabled and the
symbols have been turned on, the
Rear Parking Assist Symbols
Unavailable error message may
display. See Ultrasonic Parking
Assist on page 9‑35.
The symbols appear when an object
has been detected by the URPA
system. The symbol may cover the
object when viewing the navigation
screen.
To turn the symbols on or off:
1. Make sure that URPA has not
been disabled.
2. Shift into P (Park).
3. Press the MENU hard key to
enter the configure menu
options, then press the MENU
hard key repeatedly until Display
is selected or touch the Display
screen button.
4. Select the Rear Camera Options
screen button. The Rear Camera
Options screen will display.
5. Touch the Symbols screen
button. The screen button will be
highlighted when on.
9-39
Rear Vision Camera Error
Messages
Service Rear Vision Camera
System: This message can display
when the system is not receiving
information it requires from other
vehicle systems.
If any other problem occurs or
if a problem persists, see your
dealer/retailer.
9-40
Driving and Operating
Rear Vision Camera Location
The area displayed by the camera is
limited and does not display objects
that are close to either corner or
under the bumper. The area
displayed can vary depending
on vehicle orientation or road
conditions. The distance of the
image that appears on the screen
differs from the actual distance.
The following illustration shows
the field of view that the camera
provides.
The camera is located above the
license plate.
A. View displayed by the camera.
B. Corner of the rear bumper.
Driving and Operating
When the System Does Not
Seem To Work Properly
.
The rear vision camera system
might not work properly or display a
clear image if:
.
The RVC is turned off.
See “Turning the Rear Camera
System On or Off” earlier in this
section.
.
It is dark.
.
The sun or the beam of
headlights is shining directly into
the camera lens.
.
Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
builds up on the camera lens.
Clean the lens, rinse it with
water, and wipe it with a
soft cloth.
.
The back of the vehicle is in an
accident, the position and
mounting angle of the camera
can change or the camera can
be affected. Be sure to have the
camera and its position and
mounting angle checked at your
dealer/retailer.
There are extreme temperature
changes.
The rear vision camera system
display in the rearview mirror may
turn off or not appear as expected
due to one of the following
conditions. If this occurs the
left indicator light on the mirror
will flash.
.
A slow flash may indicate a loss
of video signal, or no video
signal present during the
reverse cycle.
.
9-41
A fast flash may indicate that the
display has been on for the
maximum allowable time during
a reverse cycle, or the display
has reached an Over
Temperature limit.
The fast flash conditions are
used to protect the video
device from high temperature
conditions. Once conditions
return to normal the device will
reset and the green indicator will
stop flashing.
During any of these fault conditions,
the display will be blank and the
indicator will continue to flash as
long as the vehicle is in R (Reverse)
or until the conditions return to
normal.
Pressing and holding z when the
left indicator light is flashing will turn
off the video display along with the
left indicator light.
9-42
Driving and Operating
Fuel
Recommended Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel
is an important part of the proper
maintenance of this vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, we
recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline.
Use regular unleaded gasoline with
a posted octane rating of 87 or
higher. If the octane rating is less
than 87, an audible knocking noise,
commonly referred to as spark
knock, might be heard when driving.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If heavy knocking is heard
when using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list
of marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet
ASTM specification D 4814 in the
United States or CAN/CGSB‐3.5
or 3.511 in Canada. Some
gasolines contain an
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines
containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
on page 9‑43 for additional
information.
Driving and Operating
California Fuel
Requirements
Fuels in Foreign
Countries
If the vehicle is certified to meet
California Emissions Standards, it is
designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications.
See the underhood emission control
label. If this fuel is not available in
states adopting California emissions
standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission
control system performance might
be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑19. If this occurs, return to
your authorized dealer/retailer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the
condition is caused by the type of
fuel used, repairs might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
If you plan on driving in another
country outside the United States or
Canada, the proper fuel might be
hard to find. Never use leaded
gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text
on fuel. Costly repairs caused by
use of improper fuel would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an
auto club, or contact a major oil
company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
9-43
Fuel Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
in the United States are now
required to contain additives that
help prevent engine and fuel system
deposits from forming, allowing the
emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, nothing
should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of
additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency
regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean,
or if the vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or
valves, look for gasoline that is
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline. Look for the TOP TIER
9-44
Driving and Operating
label on the fuel pump to ensure
gasoline meets enhanced
detergency standards developed
by the auto companies. A list of
marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
For customers who do not use TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel
tank at every engine oil change,
can help clean deposits from fuel
injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel
System Treatment PLUS is the only
gasoline additive recommended by
General Motors. It is available at
your dealer/retailer.
Gasolines containing oxygenates,
such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines might
be available in your area.
We recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than
10% ethanol must not be used in
vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Notice: This vehicle was not
designed for fuel that contains
methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can
corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic
and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
Some gasolines that are not
reformulated for low emissions
can contain an octaneenhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
where you buy gasoline whether the
fuel contains MMT. We recommend
against the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce
the life of spark plugs and the
performance of the emission control
system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might
turn on. If this occurs, return to your
dealer/retailer for service.
Driving and Operating
Filling the Tank
{ WARNING
Fuel vapor burns violently and a
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
To help avoid injuries to you and
others, read and follow all the
instructions on the fuel pump
island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel
or when refueling the vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and
smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling the
vehicle. This is against the law in
some places. Do not re-enter the
vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep
children away from the fuel pump;
never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located
behind a hinged fuel door on the
driver side of the vehicle.
To open the fuel door, push the
rearward center edge in and release
and it will open.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it
slowly counterclockwise. The fuel
cap has a spring in it; if the cap is
released too soon, it will spring back
to the right.
9-45
While refueling, hang the tethered
fuel cap from the hook on the
fuel door.
{ WARNING
Fuel can spray out on you if you
open the fuel cap too quickly.
If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be
badly burned. This spray can
happen if the tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait
for any hiss noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not
top off or overfill the tank and wait a
few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible.
See Exterior Care on page 10‑87.
9-46
Driving and Operating
When replacing the fuel cap,
turn it clockwise until it clicks.
Make sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been
left off or improperly installed. This
would allow fuel to evaporate into
the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑19.
{ WARNING
If a fire starts while you are
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If a new fuel cap is
needed, be sure to get the right
type of cap from your dealer/
retailer. The wrong type fuel cap
might not fit properly, might
cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to light, and could damage
the fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 5‑19.
WARNING (Continued)
and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
.
Dispense fuel only into
approved containers.
.
Do not fill a container while it
is inside a vehicle, in a
vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than
the ground.
.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact
with the inside of the fill
opening before operating the
nozzle. Contact should be
maintained until the filling is
complete.
.
Do not smoke while
pumping fuel.
.
Do not use a cellular phone
while pumping fuel.
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container
{ WARNING
Never fill a portable fuel container
while it is in the vehicle. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel
vapor. You can be badly burned
(Continued)
Driving and Operating
Towing
General Towing
Information
Only use towing equipment that
has been designed for the vehicle.
Contact your dealer/retailer or
trailering retailer for assistance
with preparing the vehicle for
towing a trailer.
See the following trailer towing
information in this section:
.
For information on driving while
towing a trailer, see “Driving
Characteristics and
Towing Tips”.
.
For maximum vehicle and trailer
weights, see “Trailer Towing”.
.
For information on equipment to
tow a trailer, see “Towing
Equipment”.
For information on towing a disabled
vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on
page 10‑84. For information on
towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle — such as a motorhome,
see Recreational Vehicle Towing on
page 10‑84.
Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips
{ WARNING
The driver can lose control when
pulling a trailer if the correct
equipment is not used or the
vehicle is not driven properly.
For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work
well — or even at all. The driver
and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may
also be damaged; the resulting
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer
only if all the steps in this section
have been followed. Ask your
dealer/retailer for advice and
information about towing a trailer
with the vehicle.
9-47
The vehicle can tow a trailer when
equipped with the proper trailer
towing equipment. For trailering
capacity, see Trailer Towing on
page 9‑52. Trailering changes
handling, acceleration, braking,
durability and fuel economy.
With the added weight, the engine,
transmission, wheel assemblies and
tires are forced to work harder and
under greater loads. The trailer also
adds wind resistance, increasing the
pulling requirements. For safe
trailering, correctly use the proper
trailering equipment.
The following information has
important trailering tips and rules
for your safety and that of your
passengers. Read this section
carefully before pulling a trailer.
9-48
Driving and Operating
Pulling A Trailer
.
The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
Use a lower gear if the
transmission shifts too often.
See “Tow/Haul Mode” later in
this section.
.
Obey speed limit restrictions
when towing a trailer.
.
The vehicle is designed primarily
as a passenger and load
carrying vehicle. If a trailer is
towed, the vehicle will require
more frequent maintenance due
to the additional load.
Here are some important points:
.
There are many laws, including
speed limit restrictions that apply
to trailering. Check for legal
requirements with state or
provincial police.
.
Consider using sway control.
See Towing Equipment on
page 9‑56.
.
Do not tow a trailer at all during
the first 800 km (500 miles)
the new vehicle is driven. The
engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
.
During the first 800 km
(500 miles) that a trailer is
towed, do not drive over 80 km/h
(50 mph) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This reduces wear
on the vehicle.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires experience.
Get familiar with handling and
braking with the added trailer
weight. The vehicle is now longer
and not as responsive as the
vehicle is by itself.
Check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains,
electrical connectors, lamps, tires
and mirror adjustments. If the trailer
has electric brakes, start the vehicle
and trailer moving and then apply
the trailer brake controller by hand
to be sure the brakes are working.
During the trip, check regularly to be
sure that the load is secure, and the
lamps and trailer brakes are working
properly.
Towing with a Stability Control
System
When towing, the sound of the
stability control system might be
heard. The system is reacting to the
vehicle movement caused by the
trailer, which mainly occurs during
cornering. This is normal when
towing heavier trailers.
Driving and Operating
Tow/Haul Mode
Tow/Haul assists when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load. The purpose of the Tow/Haul
mode is to:
.
Reduce the frequency and
improve the predictability of
transmission shifts.
Press this button located on the
console to turn on and turn off the
Tow/Haul mode.
.
Provide the same solid shift feel
as when the vehicle is unloaded.
The Tow/Haul light on the
instrument panel comes on to
indicate that Tow/Haul mode has
been selected.
.
.
Improve control of vehicle speed
while requiring less throttle pedal
activity.
Increase the charging system
voltage to assist in recharging a
battery installed in a trailer.
Tow/Haul may be turned off by
pressing the button again, at which
time the indicator light on the
instrument panel will turn off. The
vehicle will automatically turn off
Tow/Haul every time it is started.
9-49
Tow/Haul is designed to be most
effective when the vehicle and
trailer combined weight is at least
75 percent of the vehicle's Gross
Combined Weight Rating (GCWR).
See Trailer Towing on page 9‑52.
Tow/Haul is most useful when
pulling a heavy trailer or a large or
heavy load under the following
driving conditions:
.
Travelling through rolling terrain.
.
Travelling in stop and go traffic.
.
Travelling in busy parking lots
where improved low speed
control of the vehicle is desired.
Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul
when lightly loaded or with no trailer
will not cause damage but there is
no benefit. Such a selection when
unloaded may result in unpleasant
engine and transmission driving
characteristics and reduced fuel
economy.
9-50
Driving and Operating
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations
that require heavy braking and
sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns
while trailering could cause the
trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be
damaged. Avoid making very
sharp turns while trailering.
Passing
When turning with a trailer, make
wider turns than normal so the
trailer will not strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other
objects. Use the turn signal well in
advance and avoid jerky or sudden
maneuvers.
Reduce speed and shift to a
lower gear before starting down a
long or steep downgrade. If the
transmission is not shifted down, the
brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no
longer work well.
Turn Signals When Towing a
Trailer
The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
Use a lower gear if the transmission
shifts too often.
More passing distance is needed
when towing a trailer. Because the
rig is longer, it is necessary to go
farther beyond the passed vehicle
before returning to the lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. To move the
trailer to the left, move that hand to
the left. To move the trailer to the
right, move your hand to the right.
Always back up slowly and,
if possible, have someone
guide you.
The turn signal indicators on the
instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change.
Properly hooked up, the trailer
lamps also flash, telling other
drivers the vehicle is turning,
changing lanes or stopping.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on
the instrument panel flash for turns
even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. Check occasionally to
be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
Driving On Grades
Driving and Operating
When towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, engine coolant
will boil at a lower temperature than
at normal altitudes. If the engine is
turned off immediately after towing
at high altitude on steep uphill
grades, the vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To
avoid this, let the engine run while
parked, preferably on level ground,
with the transmission in P (Park) for
a few minutes before turning the
engine off. If the overheat warning
comes on, see Engine Overheating
on page 10‑17.
On a long uphill grade, shift down
and reduce the vehicle speed to
around 88 km/h (55 mph) to reduce
the possibility of the engine and the
transmission overheating.
Parking on Hills
{ WARNING
Parking the vehicle on a hill with
the trailer attached can be
dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move.
People can be injured, and both
the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always
park the rig on a flat surface.
9-51
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do
not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn
the wheels into the curb if facing
downhill or into traffic if facing
uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks
under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in
place, release the brake pedal
until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
apply the parking brake and shift
into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.
9-52
Driving and Operating
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal
while you:
.
Start the engine.
.
Shift into a gear.
.
Release the parking brake.
Check periodically to see that all
hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
Weight of the Trailer
Engine Cooling When Trailer
Towing
Speed, altitude, road grades,
outside temperature, special
equipment, and the amount of
tongue weight the vehicle can carry
must be considered. See “Weight of
the Trailer Tongue” later in this
section for more information.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
The cooling system may temporarily
overheat during severe operating
conditions. See Engine Overheating
on page 10‑17.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is
clear of the chocks.
Trailer Towing
4. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
Three important considerations
have to do with weight:
Maintenance When Trailer
Towing
The vehicle needs service more
often when pulling a trailer. See this
manual's Maintenance Schedule or
Index for more information. Things
that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
lubricant, belts, cooling system and
brake system. Inspect these before
and during the trip.
.
The weight of the trailer
.
The weight of the trailer tongue
.
The total weight on the
vehicle's tires
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
Maximum trailer weight is calculated
assuming only the driver is in the
tow vehicle and it has all the
required trailering equipment.
The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in
the tow vehicle must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
Driving and Operating
9-53
Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options.
Vehicle
Front‐Wheel Drive
Front‐Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package
All‐Wheel Drive
All‐Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package
Maximum Trailer Weight
*GCWR
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)
4,500 lbs (2 041 kg)
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
7,700 lbs (3 493 kg)
4,500 lbs (2 041 kg)
9,700 lbs (4 400 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should
not be exceeded.
Ask your dealer/retailer for our
trailering information or advice.
See Customer Assistance Offices
(US, Can) on page 13‑3 for more
information.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is
an important weight to measure
because it affects the total gross
weight of the vehicle. The Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo carried in it, and the people
who will be riding in the vehicle.
If there are a lot of options,
equipment, passengers or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
weight the vehicle can carry, which
will also reduce the trailer weight the
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
the tongue load must be added to
the GVW because the vehicle will
be carrying that weight, too. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12
9-54
Driving and Operating
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating). The effect of
additional weight may reduce the
trailering capacity more than the
total of the additional weight.
Consider the following example:
If a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch is being
used, the trailer tongue (A) should
weigh 10‐15 percent of the total
loaded trailer weight (B).
After loading the trailer, weigh the
trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, adjustments
might be made by moving some
items around in the trailer.
Trailering may be limited by the
vehicle's ability to carry tongue
weight. Tongue weight cannot
cause the vehicle to exceed the
A vehicle model base weight is
2 495 kg (5,500 lbs); 1 270 kg
(2,800 lbs) at the front axle and
1 225 kg (2,700 lbs) at the rear axle.
It has a GVWR of 3 266 kg
(7,200 lbs), a RGAWR of 1 814 kg
(4,000 lbs) and a GCWR (Gross
Combination Weight Rating) of
6 350 kg (14,000 lbs). The trailer
rating should be:
Expect tongue weight to be at least
10 percent of trailer weight (386 kg
(850 lbs)) and because the weight is
applied well behind the rear axle,
the effect on the rear axle is greater
than just the weight itself, as much
as 1.5 times as much. The weight at
the rear axle could be 386 kg
(850 lbs) X 1.5 = 578 kg (1,275 lbs).
Since the rear axle already weighs
1 225 kg (2,700 lbs), adding 578 kg
(1,275 lbs) brings the total to
1 803 kg (3,975 lbs). This is very
close to, but within the limit for
RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set
to trailer up to 3 856 kg (8,500 lbs).
If the vehicle has many options and
there is a front seat passenger and
two rear seat passengers with some
luggage and gear in the vehicle as
well. 136 kg (300 lbs) could be
Driving and Operating
added to the front axle weight and
181 kg (400 lbs) to the rear axle
weight. The vehicle now weighs:
Weight is still below 3 266 kg
(7,200 lbs) and you might think
318 additional kilograms (700 lbs)
should be subtracted from the
trailering capacity to stay within
GCWR limits. The maximum trailer
would only be 3 538 kg (7,800 lbs).
You may go further and think the
tongue weight should be limited to
less than 454 kg (1,000 lbs) to
avoid exceeding GVWR. But the
effect on the rear axle must still be
considered. Because the rear axle
now weighs 1 406 kg (3,100 lbs),
408 kg (900 lbs) can be put on
the rear axle without exceeding
RGAWR. The effect of tongue
weight is about 1.5 times the actual
weight. Dividing the 408 kg (900 lbs)
by 1.5 leaves only 272 kg (600 lbs)
of tongue weight that can be
handled. Since tongue weight is
usually at least 10 percent of total
loaded trailer weight, expect that the
largest trailer the vehicle can
properly handle is 2 722 kg
(6,000 lbs).
It is important that the vehicle
does not exceed any of its
ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,
Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue
Weight. The only way to be sure it is
not exceeding any of these ratings
is to weigh the vehicle and trailer.
9-55
Total Weight on the Vehicle's
Tires
Inflate the vehicle's tires to the
upper limit for cold tires. These
numbers can be found on the
Certification label or see Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑12 for more
information. Do not go over the
GVW limit for the vehicle, or the
GAWR, including the weight of the
trailer tongue. If using a weight
distributing hitch, do not go over the
rear axle limit before applying the
weight distribution spring bars.
9-56
Driving and Operating
Towing Equipment
Hitches
Weight-Distributing Hitches and
Weight Carrying Hitches
It is important to have the correct
hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large
trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why the right hitch
is needed.
.
.
The rear bumper on the vehicle
is not intended for hitches. Do
not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that
does not attach to the bumper.
Will any holes be made in the
body of the vehicle when the
trailer hitch is installed? If there
are, then be sure to seal the
holes when the hitch is removed.
If the holes are not sealed, dirt,
water, and deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from the exhaust
may get into the vehicle. See
Engine Exhaust on page 9‑23.
Safety Chains
Always attach chains between the
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
safety chains under the tongue of
the trailer to help prevent the tongue
from contacting the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Always leave just enough slack so
the rig can turn. Never allow safety
chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
A. Body-to-Ground Distance
B. Front of Vehicle
When using a weight-distributing
hitch, the hitch must be adjusted so
that the distance (A) remains the
same both before and after coupling
the trailer to the tow vehicle.
A loaded trailer that weighs more
than 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs to
have its own brake system that is
adequate for the weight of the
trailer. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for the trailer brakes
so they are installed, adjusted and
maintained properly.
Because the vehicle has antilock
brakes, do not try to tap into the
vehicle's hydraulic brake system.
If you do, both brake systems will
not work well, or at all.
Driving and Operating
Trailer Wiring Harness
Basic Trailer Wiring
The trailer wiring harness, with a
seven-pin connector, is located at
the rear of the vehicle and is tied to
the vehicle's frame. The harness
connector can be plugged into a
seven-pin universal heavy-duty
trailer connector available through
your dealer/retailer.
The seven-wire harness contains
the following trailer circuits:
.
.
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn
Signal
They should be connected by your
dealer/retailer or a qualified service
center.
If the back-up lamp circuit is not
functional, contact your dealer/
retailer.
If a remote (non-vehicle) battery is
being charged, press the Tow/Haul
mode switch located on the center
console near the climate controls.
This will boost the vehicle system
voltage and properly charge the
battery. If the trailer is too light for
Tow/Haul mode, turn on the
headlamps (Non‐HID only) as a
second way to boost the vehicle
system and charge the battery.
9-57
Electric Trailer Brake Control
Wiring Provisions
These wiring provisions for an
electric trailer brake controller are
included with the vehicle as part of
the trailer wiring package. The
instrument panel contains blunt cut
wires behind the steering column for
the electric trailer brake controller.
The harness contains the following
wires:
.
Red/Black: Power Supply
.
White: Brake Switch Signal
.
Gray: Illumination
.
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal
Black: Ground
.
Brown: Taillamps
.
.
Black: Ground
.
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
The electric trailer brake controller
should be installed by your dealer/
retailer or a qualified service center.
.
Red/Black: Battery Feed
.
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
*The fuse for this circuit is installed
in the underhood electrical center,
but the wires are not connected.
9-58
Driving and Operating
Conversions and
Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything
electrical to the vehicle unless
you check with your dealer/
retailer first. Some electrical
equipment can damage the
vehicle and the damage would
not be covered by the vehicle's
warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other
components from working as
they should.
Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle battery, even if the vehicle is
not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑42 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑42.
Vehicle Care
Vehicle Care
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . .
California Proposition
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements . . . .
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2
10-3
10-3
10-3
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Engine Compartment
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10
Automatic Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-11
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-17
Overheated Engine
Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-19
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-24
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Ignition Transmission Lock
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-26
Wiper Blade
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Windshield Replacement . . . 10-27
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
10-1
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and
Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-29
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Electrical System
High Voltage Devices and
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Electrical System
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Wheels and Tires
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-37
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Tire Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Tire Pressure Monitor
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
10-2
Vehicle Care
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Different Size Tires and
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-56
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Secondary Latch System . . . 10-77
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-79
Jump Starting
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Towing
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Appearance Care
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94
General Information
For service and parts needs, visit
your dealer/retailer. You will receive
genuine GM parts and GM-trained
and supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of
these marks:
Vehicle Care
10-3
California Proposition
65 Warning
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
Accessories and
Modifications
Most motor vehicles, including this
one, contain and/or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Engine
exhaust, many parts and systems,
many fluids, and some component
wear by-products contain and/or
emit these chemicals.
Certain types of automotive
applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners,
and lithium batteries contained
in remote keyless transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials.
Special handling may be necessary.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer
accessories to the vehicle can affect
vehicle performance and safety,
including such things as airbags,
braking, stability, ride and handling,
emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems
like antilock brakes, traction control,
and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
10-4
Vehicle Care
Damage to vehicle components
resulting from the installation or use
of non‐GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, is not
covered under the terms of the
vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for
affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to
complement and function with other
systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the
vehicle using genuine GM
Accessories. When you go to your
GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM
Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑42.
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Service Work
{ WARNING
If doing some of your own service
work, use the proper service
manual. It tells you much more
about how to service the vehicle
than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on
page 13‑12.
You can be injured and the
vehicle could be damaged if you
try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
This vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Airbag System
Check on page 3‑43.
.
Be sure you have sufficient
knowledge, experience,
the proper replacement
parts, and tools before
attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
Keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date
of any service work performed.
See Maintenance Records on
page 11‑10.
.
Be sure to use the proper
nuts, bolts, and other
fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily
confused. If the wrong
fasteners are used, parts
can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
Vehicle Care
Hood
Before closing the hood, be sure all
filler caps are on properly.
To open the hood:
1. Pull the hood release handle
with this symbol on it. It is
located under the instrument
panel on the driver side of the
vehicle.
10-5
Pull the hood down to close. Lower
the hood until the lifting pressure
of the strut is reduced. Then allow
the hood to fall and latch into place
under its own weight. Check to
make sure the hood is closed. If the
hood does not fully latch, gently
push the hood down at the front and
center until it is completely latched.
2. At the front of the vehicle, pull
up on the bottom center of the
grille, and push the secondary
hood release to the left.
3. After the lid has been partially
lifted, a gas strut automatically
lifts and holds the hood in the
fully open position.
10-6
Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
Vehicle Care
A. Radiator Pressure Cap. See
Cooling System on page 10‑13.
B. Engine Coolant Recovery Cap.
See Cooling System on
page 10‑13.
C. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.
See Jump Starting on
page 10‑80.
D. Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 10‑31.
E. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
See Jump Starting on
page 10‑80.
F. Power Steering Reservoir and
Cap (under engine cover).
See Power Steering Fluid on
page 10‑19.
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When
to Add Engine Oil” under Engine
Oil on page 10‑8.
H. Engine Cover on page 10‑7.
I.
10-7
Engine Cover
Engine Oil Dipstick. See
“Checking Engine Oil” under
Engine Oil on page 10‑8.
J. Automatic Transmission Fluid
Dipstick. See “Checking the
Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on
page 10‑11.
K. Brake Master Cylinder
Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 10‑21.
L. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 10‑11.
M. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
Fluid” under Washer Fluid on
page 10‑20.
A. Oil Fill Cap
B. Engine Cover
To remove:
1. Remove the oil fill cap (A).
2. Raise the engine cover (B) to
release from the retainers.
3. Lift and remove the engine
cover.
4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to
reinstall engine cover.
10-8
Vehicle Care
Engine Oil
When to Add Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle
must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle
is a yellow loop. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6 for the location
of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the
oil several minutes to drain back
into the oil pan. If this is not
done, the oil dipstick might not
show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean
it with a paper towel or cloth,
then push it back in all the way.
Remove it again, keeping the tip
down, and check the level.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched
area at the tip of the dipstick,
add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section
explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity,
see Capacities and Specifications
on page 12‑2.
Notice: Do not add too much oil.
If the engine has so much oil
that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows
the proper operating range, the
engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating
range in the cross-hatched area.
Push the dipstick all the way back
in when through.
Vehicle Care
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
.
GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets
GM Standard GM6094M.
.
SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the
vehicle. These numbers on
an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not
use other viscosity oils such as
SAE 20W-50.
.
American Petroleum Institute
(API) starburst symbol
Oils meeting these requirements
should have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates that the
oil has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Notice: Use only engine oil
identified as meeting GM
Standard GM6094M and showing
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use
the recommended oil can result
in engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Cold Temperature Operation
If in an area of extreme cold,
where the temperature falls
below −20°F (−29°C), use either
an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an
SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide
10-9
easier cold starting for the engine at
extremely low temperatures. Always
use an oil that meets the required
specification, GM6094M. See “What
Kind of Engine Oil to Use” for more
information.
Engine Oil Additives / Engine
Oil Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil.
The recommended oils with the
starburst symbol that meet GM
standards are all that is needed
for good performance and engine
protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
10-10
Vehicle Care
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system
that indicates when to change the
engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage.
Based on driving conditions, the
mileage at which an oil change is
indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work
properly, the system must be reset
every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated
that oil life has been diminished,
it indicates that an oil change is
necessary. A “Change Engine Oil
Soon” message comes on. Change
the oil as soon as possible within
the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is
possible that, if driving under the
best conditions, the oil life system
might not indicate that an oil change
is necessary for over a year.
However, the engine oil and filter
must be changed at least once a
year and at this time the system
must be reset. Your dealer/retailer
has trained service people who will
perform this work using genuine
parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check the oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset
accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since the last oil change.
Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil
Life System
The Engine Oil Life System
calculates when to change the
engine oil and filter based on
vehicle use. Whenever the oil is
changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change
is required. If a situation occurs
where the oil is changed prior to a
“Change Engine Oil Soon” message
being turned on, reset the system.
To reset the Engine Oil Life System:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
with the engine off.
2. Press the vehicle information
button until “Oil Life Remaining”
displays.
3. Press and hold the set/reset
button until “100%” is displayed.
Three chimes sound and the
“Change Engine Oil Soon”
message goes off.
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
If the “Change Engine Oil Soon”
message comes back on when the
vehicle is started, the engine oil life
system has not reset. Repeat the
procedure.
Vehicle Care
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain
elements that can be unhealthy for
your skin and could even cause
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
your skin for very long. Clean your
skin and nails with soap and water,
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer's warnings about the
use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the
environment. If you change your
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
from the filter before disposal. Never
dispose of oil by putting it in the
trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of
water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid
It is not necessary to check
the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the
only reason for fluid loss. If a leak
occurs, take the vehicle to the
dealer/retailer and have it repaired
as soon as possible.
Change the fluid at the intervals
listed in Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2, and be sure to use
the transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7.
Notice: Use of the incorrect
automatic transmission fluid may
damage the vehicle, and the
damages may not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission
fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on
page 11‑7.
10-11
The transmission fluid will not
reach the end of the dipstick unless
the transmission is at operating
temperature. If you need to check
the transmission fluid level, please
take the vehicle to your dealer/
retailer.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
Maintenance II intervals and replace
it at the first oil change after each
80 000 km (50,000 mile) interval.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2 for more information.
If you are driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at
each engine oil change.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for the location of the
engine air cleaner/filter.
10-12
Vehicle Care
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
2. Disconnect the cover fitting from
the ventilation tube (A).
6. Remove the housing cover (C)
with outlet duct.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
remove the filter from the vehicle
and lightly shake the filter (away
from vehicle) to release loose dust
and dirt. If the filter remains caked
with dirt, a new filter is required.
3. Disconnect the wiring harness
connector from the sensor (B).
7. Remove the filter (D) and any
loose debris that may be found
in the base (E).
8. Inspect or replace the filter (D).
9. Reverse Steps 2 through 6 to
reinstall the housing cover
and reconnect the electrical
connector to the sensor.
To inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter:
1. Remove the engine cover. See
Engine Cover on page 10‑7.
10. Reinstall the engine cover.
See Engine Cover on
page 10‑7.
{ WARNING
A. Clamp
B. Screws
C. Housing Cover
D. Filter
E. Base
4. Loosen the outlet duct
clamp (A).
A. Ventilation Tube
B. Sensor
5. Loosen the six housing
cover (C) screws (B).
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you
or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
Vehicle Care
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is
off, dirt can easily get into the
engine, which could damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter
in place when you are driving.
Cooling System
The cooling system allows the
engine to maintain the correct
working temperature.
{ WARNING
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{ WARNING
Heater and radiator hoses, and
other engine parts, can be very
hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a
leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you
could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
A. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fans
10-13
Notice: Using coolant other
than DEX-COOL® can cause
premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition,
the engine coolant could require
changing sooner, at 50 000 km
(30,000 miles) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant
in the vehicle.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle
is filled with DEX-COOL® engine
coolant. The coolant is designed to
remain in the vehicle for five years
or 240 000 km (150,000 miles),
whichever occurs first.
The following explains the cooling
system and how to check and add
coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating,
see Engine Overheating on
page 10‑17.
10-14
Vehicle Care
What to Use
{ WARNING
Adding only plain water to
the cooling system can be
dangerous. Plain water, or some
other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle's coolant
warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the
engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch
fire and you or others could be
burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL
coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
This mixture:
.
Gives freezing protection down
to −37°C (−34°F), outside
temperature.
.
Gives boiling protection up
to 129°C (265°F), engine
temperature.
.
Protects against rust and
corrosion.
.
Will not damage aluminum parts.
.
Helps keep the proper engine
temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant
mixture is used, the engine could
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors
and/or additives are used in
the vehicle's cooling system,
the vehicle could be damaged.
Use only the proper mixture of
the engine coolant listed in this
manual for the cooling system.
See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7 for more
information.
Vehicle Care
Checking Coolant
How to Add Coolant to the
Recovery Tank
The vehicle must be on a level
surface when checking the coolant
level.
Check to see if coolant is visible in
the coolant recovery tank. If the
coolant inside the coolant recovery
tank is boiling, do not do anything
else until it cools down. If coolant is
visible but the coolant level is not at
or above the FULL COLD mark, add
a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant at the
coolant recovery tank, but be sure
the cooling system is cool before
this is done. See Cooling System on
page 10‑13 for more information.
10-15
{ WARNING
The coolant recovery tank cap has
this symbol on it.
When the engine is cold, the coolant
level should be at or above the
FULL COLD line marked on the
recovery tank.
You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
When the engine is hot, the level
could be higher than the FULL
COLD line. If the coolant is below
the FULL COLD line when the
engine is hot, there could be a
leak in the cooling system.
Notice: This vehicle has a
specific coolant fill procedure.
Failure to follow this procedure
could cause the engine to
overheat and be severely
damaged.
If the coolant is low, add the coolant
or take the vehicle to a dealer/
retailer for service.
If coolant is needed, add the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the
coolant recovery tank.
10-16
Vehicle Care
How to Add Coolant to the
Radiator
{ WARNING
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
WARNING (Continued)
cooling system and surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever
have to turn the pressure cap.
2. Remove the radiator pressure
cap when the cooling system,
including the upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about one full
turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for
that to stop. A hiss means there
is still some pressure left in the
system.
If coolant is needed, add the proper
mixture directly to the radiator, but
be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.
{ WARNING
Steam and scalding liquids from a
hot cooling system can blow out
and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you
turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — they can
come out at high speed. Never
turn the cap when the cooling
system, including the surge tank
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the
(Continued)
3. Keep turning the pressure cap
slowly and remove it.
4. Fill the radiator to the base of
the filler neck with the proper
DEX-COOL coolant mixture.
1. Detach fasteners and lift off
the panel that covers the
radiator cap.
5.
When coolant begins to flow out
of the filler neck, reinstall the
pressure cap. Be sure to secure
it tightly.
Vehicle Care
10-17
Notice: If the pressure cap is not
tightly installed, coolant loss and
possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators
to warn of engine overheating.
6. Fill the coolant recovery tank to
the FULL COLD mark.
7. Reinstall the cap on the coolant
recovery tank but leave the
radiator pressure cap off.
8. Start the engine and let it run
until the upper radiator hose
feels warm. Any time during this
procedure, watch out for the
engine cooling fan(s).
9. If the coolant level inside the
radiator filler neck is low, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL
coolant mixture through the filler
neck until the level is back up
to the base of the filler neck.
Replace the pressure cap.
Be sure to secure it tightly.
There is an engine coolant
temperature gauge on the
instrument panel cluster.
See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge on page 5‑15.
The vehicle may also display
an ENGINE OVERHEATED
IDLE ENGINE and ENGINE
OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Warning Lights,
Gauges, and Indicators on
page 5‑12.
You may decide not to lift the hood
when this warning appears, but
instead get service help right away.
See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 13‑6.
10-18
Vehicle Care
If you do decide to lift the hood ,
make sure the vehicle is parked on
a level surface.
Then check to see if the engine
cooling fans are running. If the
engine is overheating, both fans
should be running. If they are not,
do not continue to run the engine
and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Engine damage from
running the engine without
coolant is not covered by the
warranty.
Notice: If the engine catches fire
while driving with no coolant, the
vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty. See Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode on
page 10‑19 for information on
driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
WARNING (Continued)
See Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode on
page 10‑19 for information on
driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
{ WARNING
Steam from an overheated engine
can burn you badly, even if you
just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Turn it off
and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait
until there is no sign of steam
or coolant before you open
the hood.
If you keep driving when the
vehicles engine is overheated,
the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly
burned. Stop the engine if it
overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
(Continued)
If No Steam Is Coming From
The Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is
displayed but no steam can be seen
or heard, the problem may not be
too serious. Sometimes the engine
can get a little too hot when the
vehicle:
.
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
.
Stops after high-speed driving.
.
Idles for long periods in traffic.
.
Tows a trailer.
Vehicle Care
If the overheat warning is displayed
with no sign of steam:
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest
temperature and to the highest
fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
If there is no sign of steam, idle
the engine for three minutes while
parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it
cools down. Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode”
next in this section.
3. If in a traffic jam, shift to
N (Neutral), otherwise, shift
to the highest gear while
driving — D (Drive) or L (Low).
Overheated Engine
Protection
Operating Mode
If the temperature overheat gauge
is no longer in the overheat zone
or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven.
Continue to drive the vehicle slow
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front
of you. If the warning does not come
back on, continue to drive normally.
This emergency operating mode lets
the vehicle be driven to a safe place
in an emergency situation. If an
overheated engine condition exists,
an overheat protection mode which
alternates firing groups of cylinders
helps prevent engine damage.
In this mode, there is a significant
loss in power and engine
performance. The temperature
gauge indicates an overheat
condition exists. Driving extended
distances and/or towing a trailer
in the overheat protection mode
should be avoided.
If the warning continues, pull
over, stop, and park the vehicle
right away.
10-19
Notice: After driving in the
overheated engine protection
operating mode, to avoid engine
damage, allow the engine to cool
before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely
degraded. Repair the cause of
coolant loss, change the oil
and reset the oil life system.
See Engine Oil on page 10‑8.
Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid reservoir is
located under the engine cover on
the passenger side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for reservoir location.
10-20
Vehicle Care
When to Check Power Steering
Fluid
5. Replace the cap and completely
tighten it.
It is not necessary to regularly
check power steering fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in the
system or you hear an unusual
noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired.
6. Remove the cap again and look
at the fluid level on the dipstick.
How to Check Power Steering
Fluid
To check the power steering fluid:
1. Turn the key off and let the
engine compartment cool down.
2. Remove the engine cover.
See Engine Cover on
page 10‑7.
3. Wipe the cap and the top of the
reservoir clean.
4. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
dipstick with a clean rag.
The fluid level should be
somewhere between MAX and
MIN line on the dipstick in room
temperature. If the fluid is on or
below MIN line, you should add
fluid close to MAX Line.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to
use, see Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7. Always
use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid
may damage the vehicle and the
damages may not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty. Always
use the correct fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7.
Washer Fluid
What to Use
When adding windshield washer
fluid, be sure to read the
manufacturer's instructions before
use. If the vehicle will be operating
in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid
that has sufficient protection against
freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
When the windshield washer fluid
reservoir is low, a WASHER FLUID
LOW ADD FLUID message will be
displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Washer Fluid
Messages on page 5‑39 for more
information.
Vehicle Care
.
Open the cap with the washer
symbol on it. Add washer fluid
until the tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6 for reservoir location.
Notice:
.
.
When using concentrated
washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer's instructions
for adding water.
Do not mix water with
ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution
to freeze and damage the
washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean
as well as washer fluid.
.
Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is
very cold. This allows for
fluid expansion if freezing
occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is
completely full.
Do not use engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the windshield
washer. It can damage the
vehicle's windshield washer
system and paint.
Brakes
This vehicle has disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear
indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound can come and go or be
heard all the time the vehicle is
moving, except when applying the
brake pedal firmly.
10-21
{ WARNING
The brake wear warning sound
means that soon the brakes will
not work well. That could lead to
an accident. When the brake
wear warning sound is heard,
have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with
worn-out brake pads could result
in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates
can cause a brake squeal when the
brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean
something is wrong with the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are
necessary to help prevent brake
pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to torque
specifications in Capacities and
Specifications on page 12‑2.
10-22
Vehicle Care
Brake linings should always be
replaced as complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake
pedal does not return to normal
height, or if there is a rapid increase
in pedal travel. This could be a
sign that brake service might be
required.
Brake Adjustment
Every time the brakes are applied,
with or without the vehicle moving,
the brakes adjust for wear.
new, approved replacement parts.
If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example,
installing disc brake pads that are
wrong for the vehicle, can change
the balance between the front
and rear brakes — for the worse.
The braking performance expected
can change in many other ways if
the wrong replacement brake parts
are installed.
Brake Fluid
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is
complex. Its many parts have to be
of top quality and work well together
if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. The vehicle was designed
and tested with top-quality brake
parts. When parts of the braking
system are replaced, be sure to get
The brake master cylinder reservoir
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
indicated on the reservoir cap.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for the location of the
reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the
brake fluid level in the reservoir
might go down:
.
The brake fluid level goes down
because of normal brake lining
wear. When new linings are
installed, the fluid level goes
back up.
.
A fluid leak in the brake
hydraulic system can also cause
a low fluid level. Have the brake
hydraulic system fixed, since a
leak means that sooner or later
the brakes will not work well.
Do not top off the brake fluid.
Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
If fluid is added when the linings
are worn, there will be too much
fluid when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
Vehicle Care
{ WARNING
{ WARNING
If too much brake fluid is added, it
can spill on the engine and burn,
if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and
the vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work
is done on the brake hydraulic
system.
With the wrong kind of fluid in
the brake hydraulic system,
the brakes might not work well.
This could cause a crash. Always
use the proper brake fluid.
When the brake fluid falls to a low
level, the brake warning light comes
on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 5‑21.
What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake
fluid from a sealed container.
See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7.
Always clean the brake fluid
reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it.
This helps keep dirt from entering
the reservoir.
Notice:
.
Using the wrong fluid
can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts.
For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil,
such as engine oil, in the
brake hydraulic system can
damage brake hydraulic
system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.
.
10-23
If brake fluid is spilled
on the vehicle's painted
surfaces, the paint finish can
be damaged. Be careful not
to spill brake fluid on the
vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately.
Battery
Refer to the replacement number on
the original battery label when a
new battery is needed.
{ DANGER
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling.
10-24
Vehicle Care
Vehicle Storage
{ WARNING
Batteries have acid that can burn
you and gas that can explode.
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 10‑80 for tips on working
around a battery without
getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery to keep the battery from
running down.
Extended Storage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle
charger.
All-Wheel Drive
It is not necessary to check the
all–wheel drive lubricant levels.
A fluid leak is the only reason for
fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the
vehicle to the dealer/retailer as soon
as possible.
Starter Switch Check
{ WARNING
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking
brake and the regular brake.
See Parking Brake on
page 9‑29.
Do not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it
starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each
gear. The vehicle should start
only in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
If the vehicle starts in any other
position, contact your dealer/
retailer for service.
Vehicle Care
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control
System Check
{ WARNING
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle. It should
be parked on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking
brake. See Parking Brake on
page 9‑29.
Be ready to apply the regular
brake immediately if the vehicle
begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the
ignition to ON/RUN, but do
not start the engine. Without
applying the regular brake,
try to move the shift lever out of
P (Park) with normal effort. If the
shift lever moves out of P (Park),
contact your dealer/retailer for
service.
10-25
Ignition Transmission
Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking
brake set, try to turn the ignition
to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever
position.
.
The ignition should turn to
LOCK/OFF only when the
shift lever is in P (Park).
.
The ignition key should come
out only in LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer/retailer if
service is required.
10-26
Vehicle Care
Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check
{ WARNING
When you are doing this check,
the vehicle could begin to move.
You or others could be injured
and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
your foot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake.
.
.
To check the parking brake's
holding ability: With the engine
running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
To check the P (Park)
mechanism's holding ability:
With the engine running, shift
to P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if
service is required.
Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should
be inspected for wear or cracking.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2 for more information.
Replacement blades come in
different types and are removed in
different ways. To replace the wiper
blade assembly:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm
away from the windshield.
Vehicle Care
Backglass Wiper Blade
3. Replace the wiper blade.
To replace the backglass wiper
blade:
4. Return the wiper arm and blade
assembly to the rest position on
the glass.
1. Pull the wiper blade assembly
away from the backglass.
The backglass wiper blade will
not lock in a vertical position
so care should be used when
pulling it away from the vehicle.
2. Press the button in the middle of
the wiper arm connector and pull
the wiper blade away from the
arm connector.
3. Install the new wiper blade and
make sure the wiper blade locks
into place.
For the proper size and type see
Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 11‑9.
10-27
2. Rotate the wiper blade
assembly, hold the wiper arm
in position, and push the blade
away from the wiper arm.
Windshield Replacement
Your vehicle is equipped with an
acoustic windshield. If you ever
have to have your windshield
replaced be sure to get an acoustic
windshield so you will continue to
have the benefits an acoustic
windshield can provide.
10-28
Vehicle Care
Headlamp Aiming
Bulb Replacement
Headlamp aim has been preset at
the factory and should need no
further adjustment.
For the proper type of replacement
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 10‑30.
However, if your vehicle is damaged
in a crash, the headlamp aim may
be affected. Aim adjustment to
the low-beam headlamps may be
necessary if oncoming drivers flash
their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
For any bulb changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer/retailer.
If the headlamps need to be
re-aimed, it is recommended that
you take the vehicle to your dealer/
retailer for service.
Halogen Bulbs
{ WARNING
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you
drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the instructions
on the bulb package.
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting
{ WARNING
The low beam high intensity
discharge lighting system
operates at a very high voltage.
If you try to service any of the
system components, you could
be seriously injured. Have your
dealer/retailer or a qualified
technician service them.
The up‐level vehicle has HID
headlamps. The park lamp function
is also a function of the HID
headlamp. After an HID headlamp
bulb has been replaced, the beam
might be a slightly different shade
than it was originally. This is normal.
Vehicle Care
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and
Stoplamps
10-29
3. Remove the two hex nuts
holding the taillamp assembly
in place.
License Plate Lamp
4. Pull out the taillamp assembly.
1. Remove the two screws holding
each of the license plate lamps
to the liftgate trim.
5. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and pull it
straight out to remove it.
To replace one of these bulbs:
6. Replace the bulb.
7. Reverse steps 3 through 5 to
reinstall the taillamp assembly.
A. Taillamp
B. Sidemarker Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
on page 2‑9.
2. Remove the black cuff from
the lamp assembly by pulling
rearward from top to unfasten
from snap tabs.
When reinstalling the taillamp
assembly, the pin on the taillamp
assembly must line up and be
inserted correctly into the
opening.
8. Replace the black cuff over the
lamp assembly by pushing into
snap tabs.
2. Turn and pull the license plate
lamp forward through the lift gate
trim opening.
10-30
Vehicle Care
3. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse steps 1 through 3 to
reinstall the license plate lamp.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Bulb
Number
License Plate Lamp
194
Rear Sidemarker
Lamp
194
Rear Turn Signal
and Taillamps
7443
(W21/5W)
For replacement bulbs not listed
here, contact your dealer/retailer.
Electrical System
High Voltage Devices and
Wiring
{ WARNING
Exposure to high voltage can
cause shock, burns, and even
death. The high voltage systems
in your vehicle can only be
serviced by technicians with
special training.
High voltage devices are
identified by labels. Do not
remove, open, take apart,
or modify these devices. High
voltage cable or wiring has
orange covering. Do not probe,
tamper with, cut, or modify high
voltage cable or wiring.
Electrical System
Overload
The vehicle has fuses and circuit
breakers to protect against an
electrical system overload.
When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
and closes, protecting the circuit
until the current load returns to
normal or the problem is fixed.
This greatly reduces the chance of
circuit overload and fire caused by
electrical problems.
Fuses and circuit breakers protect
the following in the vehicle:
.
Headlamp Wiring
.
Windshield Wiper Motor
.
Power Windows and other
Power Accessories
Vehicle Care
Headlamp Wiring
An electrical overload may cause
the lamps to go on and off, or in
some cases to remain off. Have
the headlamp wiring checked right
away if the lamps go on and off or
remain off.
Windshield Wipers
If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow or ice, the windshield
wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
Although the circuit is protected
from electrical overload, overload
due to heavy snow or ice, may
cause wiper linkage damage.
Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the windshield before using
the windshield wipers.
If the overload is caused by an
electrical problem and not snow
or ice, be sure to get it fixed.
10-31
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle
are protected from short circuits
by a combination of fuses, circuit
breakers and fusible thermal links.
This greatly reduces the chance of
fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band
inside the fuse. If the band is broken
or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
you replace a bad fuse with a new
one of the identical size and rating.
Lift the cover for access to the fuse/
relay block.
Fuses of the same amperage can
be temporarily borrowed from
another fuse location, if a fuse goes
out. Replace the fuse as soon as
you can.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical components on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
To remove fuses, hold the end of
the fuse between your thumb and
index finger and pull straight out.
The underhood fuse block is located
in the engine compartment, on the
passenger side of the vehicle.
10-32
Vehicle Care
Fuses
Usage
BATT 1
Battery 1
BATT 2
Battery 2
BATT 3
Battery 3
ECM
Engine Control
Module
ECM 1
Engine Control
Module 1
EMISSION 1 Emission 1
EMISSION 2 Emission 2
EVEN COILS Even Injector Coils
Fuses
A/C CLUTCH
ABS MTR
AFS
Usage
Air Conditioning
Clutch
Antilock Braking
System (ABS)
Motor
Adaptive Forward
Lighting System
Fuses
AIRBAG
Usage
Airbag System
AUX POWER Auxiliary Power
FAN 1
Cooling Fan 1
FAN 2
Cooling Fan 2
FOG LAMP
Fog Lamps
FSCM
Fuel System
Control Module
Horn
AUX
VAC PUMP
Auxiliary
Vacuum Pump
HORN
AWD
All-Wheel-Drive
System
HTD MIR
Heated Outside
Rearview Mirror
Vehicle Care
Fuses
Usage
Heating, Ventilation
and Air
HVAC BLWR
Conditioning
Blower
LT HI BEAM
Left High-Beam
Headlamp
Left Low‐Beam
LT LO BEAM
Headlamp
Fuses
Usage
REAR
CAMERA
Rear Camera
RR APO
Rear Accessory
Power Outlet
RR DEFOG
Rear Defogger
RR HVAC
Rear Climate
Control System
LT PRK
Left Parking Lamp
Right High‐Beam
RT HI BEAM
Headlamp
LT TRLR
STOP/TRN
Trailer Left
Stoplamp and Turn
Signal
RT LO BEAM
ODD COILS
Odd Injector Coils
RT PRK
PCM IGN
Powertrain Control
Module Ignition
PWR L/GATE Power Liftgate
PWR
OUTLET
Power Outlet
Right Low‐Beam
Headlamp
Right
Parking Lamp
RT TRLR
STOP/TRN
Trailer Right
Stoplamp and Turn
Signal
RVC SNSR
Regulated Voltage
Control Sensor
Fuses
10-33
Usage
S/ROOF/
Sunroof
SUNSHADE
SERVICE
SPARE
Service Repair
Spare
Stop Lamps Stop Lamps
(China Only) (China Only)
STRTR
TCM
Starter
Transmission
Control Module
TRANS
Transmission
TRLR
BCK/UP
Trailer Back‐up
Lamps
TRLR BRK
Trailer Brake
TRLR
PRK LAMP
Trailer Parking
Lamps
TRLR PWR
Trailer Power
WPR/WSW
Windshield Wiper/
Washer
10-34
Vehicle Care
Relays
Usage
A/C
CMPRSR
CLTCH
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch
AUX
VAC PUMP
Auxiliary
Vacuum Pump
CRNK
Switched Power
FAN 1
Cooling Fan 1
FAN 2
Cooling Fan 2
FAN 3
Cooling Fan 3
FOG LAMP
Fog Lamps
HI BEAM
High‐Beam
Headlamps
HID/
LO BEAM
High Intensity
Discharge (HID)
Low‐Beam
Headlamps
Relays
HORN
IGN
Usage
Horn
Ignition Main
LT TRLR
STOP/TRN
Trailer Left
Stoplamp and
Turn Signal Lamp
PRK LAMP
Park Lamp
PWR/TRN
Powertrain
RR DEFOG
Rear Window
Defogger
RT TRLR
STOP/TRN
Trailer Right
Stoplamp and
Turn Signal Lamp
Stop Lamps Stop Lamps
(China Only) (China Only)
Relays
TRLR
BCK/UP
Usage
Trailer Back-up
Lamps
WPR
Windshield Wiper
WPR HI
Windshield Wiper
High Speed
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block
The instrument panel fuse block is
located under the instrument panel
on the passenger side of the
vehicle. Pull down on the cover
to access the fuse block.
Vehicle Care
Fuses
AIRBAG
AMP
BCK/
UP/STOP
Amplifier
Back‐up Lamp/
Stoplamp
Body Control
Module
CNSTR/
VENT
Canister Vent
DR/LCK
DRL
Fuses
Airbag
BCM
CTSY
Courtesy
HVAC
Heating,
Ventilation and
Air Conditioning
INADV/
PWR/LED
Inadvertent
Power LED
INFOTMNT
Infotainment
LT/TRN/SIG
Driver Side Turn
Signal
MSM
Memory Seat
Module
PDM
Power Mirrors,
Liftgate Release
Door Locks
Daytime Running
Lamps
Usage
PWR MODE Power Mode
DRL 2
GMC HID
Only/Rear Fog
Lamps-China Only
DSPLY
Display
REAR WPR
Rear Wiper
Front Windshield
Washer
RT/TRN/SIG
Passenger Side
Turn Signal
FRT/WSW
Fuse Side
Usage
10-35
HTD/
Heated/
COOL SEAT Cooling Seats
PWR/MIR
RDO
SPARE
STR/WHL/
ILLUM
Power Mirrors
Radio
Spare
Steering Wheel
Illumination
10-36
Vehicle Care
Relays
Usage
LT/
PWR/SEAT
Driver Side Power
Seat Relay
UNLCK
RT/
PWR/SEAT
Passenger Side
Power Seat Relay
DRL2
PWR/WNDW
Power Windows
Relay
LT/UNLCK
PWR/
COLUMN
Power Steering
Column Relay
DRL
L/GATE
LCK
Liftgate Relay
Power Lock Relay
Rear Window
REAR/WSW
Washer Relay
Relay Side
Relays
SPARE
FRT/WSW
Usage
Power Unlock
Relay
Daytime Running
Lamps 2 Relay
Driver Side Unlock
Relay
Daytime Running
Lamps Relay
Spare
Front Windshield
Washer Relay
Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with
high-quality tires made by a
leading tire manufacturer.
If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and
where to obtain service, see
your vehicle Warranty booklet
for details. For additional
information refer to the tire
manufacturer.
WARNING (Continued)
.
Underinflated tires pose the
same danger as overloaded
tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when
your tires are cold. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑44.
.
Overinflated tires are more
likely to be cut, punctured
or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you
hit a pothole. Keep tires at
the recommended pressure.
.
Worn, old tires can cause
accidents. If your tread is
badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged,
replace them.
{ WARNING
Poorly maintained and improperly
used tires are dangerous.
.
Overloading your tires can
cause overheating as a result
of too much flexing. You
could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑12.
(Continued)
10-37
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a
tire is molded into its sidewall.
The examples below show a
typical passenger vehicle tire
and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is
a combination of letters and
numbers used to define a
particular tire's width, height,
aspect ratio, construction type,
10-38
Vehicle Care
and service description. See the
“Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet
or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of
Transportation): The
Department of Transportation
(DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification
Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following the DOT
(Department of Transportation)
code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant
code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load
that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed
to support that load.
(E) Tire Ply Material : The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required
to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature
resistance. For more information
see Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 10‑54 .
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Tire Ply Material: The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
Vehicle Care
(B) Temporary Use Only:
The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread
life of approximately 5 000 km
(3,000 miles) and should not be
driven at speeds over 105 km/h
(65 mph). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air
and gone flat. If your vehicle
has a compact spare tire,
see Compact Spare Tire on
page 10‑79 and If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10‑58.
(C) Tire Identification
Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT
(Department of Transportation)
code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant
code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load
that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed
to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The
temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated
to 420 kPa (60 psi). For more
information on tire pressure and
inflation see Tire Pressure on
page 10‑44.
10-39
(F) Tire Size: A combination of
letters and numbers define a
tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service
description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size
means the tire is for temporary
use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet
or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
10-40
Vehicle Care
Tire Designations
Tire Size
The following illustration
shows an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:
The United States version
of a metric tire sizing system.
The letter P as the first
character in the tire size
means a passenger vehicle
tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim
Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit
number indicates the tire section
width in millimeters from
sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit
number that indicates the tire
height‐to‐width measurements.
For example, if the tire size
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire's sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A
letter code is used to indicate
the type of ply construction in
the tire. The letter R means
radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or
bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted‐bias ply
construction.
(E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of
the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: These
characters represent the load
index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents
the load carry capacity a tire is
certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a
tire is certified to carry a load.
Tire Terminology and
Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount
of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch
of the tire. Air pressure is
expressed in psi (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascal).
Vehicle Care
Accessory Weight: This
means the combined weight
of optional accessories.
Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic
transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship
of a tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of
cords that is located between
the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other
reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains
steel wires wrapped by steel
cords that hold the tire onto
the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic
tire in which the plies are laid
at alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline
of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The
amount of air pressure in a tire,
measured in psi (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascal)
before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Tire Pressure
on page 10‑44 .
Curb Weight: The weight of a
motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil,
and coolant, but without
passengers and cargo.
10-41
DOT Markings: A code molded
into the sidewall of a tire
signifying that the tire is in
compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation
(DOT) motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand, and
date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑12.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle
Weight Rating for the front axle.
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑12.
10-42
Vehicle Care
GAWR RR: Gross Axle
Weight Rating for the rear axle.
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑12.
Intended Outboard Sidewall :
The side of an asymmetrical tire,
that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A
tire used on light duty trucks and
some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned
number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure:
The maximum air pressure to
which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is
molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The
load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle
Weight: The sum of curb
weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight, and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑12 .
Occupant Distribution :
Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire that
has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a
vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same
moldings on the other sidewall
of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:
A tire used on passenger cars
and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation
Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure as shown
on the tire placard. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑44 and
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑12 .
Vehicle Care
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire
and upon which the tire beads
are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An
alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum
speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between
the tire and the road surface.
The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire
that comes into contact with
the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called wear
bars, that show across the
tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm
(1/16 inch) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 10‑51.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire
Quality Grading Standards):
A tire information system
that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction,
temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by
tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures.
The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire. See
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on
page 10‑54 .
10-43
Vehicle Capacity Weight:
The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑12.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire
due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and
cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label
permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle's
capacity weight and the original
equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure.
See “Tire and Loading
Information Label” under Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑12.
10-44
Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount
of air pressure to operate
effectively.
If your tires have too much air
(over‐inflation), you can get
the following:
.
Unusual wear
Notice: Do not let anyone tell
.
Poor handling
you that under‐inflation or
over‐inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have
enough air (under‐inflation),
you can get the following:
.
Rough ride
.
Needless damage from
road hazards
.
Too much flexing
.
Too much heat
.
Tire overloading
.
Premature or
irregular wear
.
Poor handling
.
Reduced fuel economy
A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label
is attached to your vehicle.
This label shows your vehicle's
original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold.
The recommended cold tire
inflation pressure, shown on the
label, is the minimum amount of
air pressure needed to support
your vehicle's maximum load
carrying capacity.
For additional information
regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an
example of the Tire and Loading
Information label, see Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑12.
How you load your vehicle
affects vehicle handling and
ride comfort. Never load your
vehicle with more weight than it
was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a
month or more. Do not forget
to check the compact spare
tire, if the vehicle has one.
The compact spare should be at
60 psi (420 kPa). For additional
information regarding the
compact spare tire, see
Compact Spare Tire on
page 10‑79.
Vehicle Care
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type
gauge to check tire pressure.
You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when
they are under‐inflated. Check
the tire's inflation pressure when
the tires are cold. Cold means
your vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
Remove the valve cap from the
tire valve stem. Press the tire
gauge firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement.
If the cold tire inflation pressure
matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and
Loading Information label, no
further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low,
add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release
air by pushing on the metal stem
in the center of the tire valve.
Re‐check the tire pressure with
the tire gauge.
Be sure to put the valve caps
back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by
keeping out dirt and moisture.
Tire Pressure Monitor
System
The Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) uses radio and
sensor technology to check tire
pressure levels. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in your
vehicle's tires and transmit tire
pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare
(if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
10-45
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly
under‐inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on
a significantly under‐inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping
ability.
10-46
Vehicle Care
Please note that the TPMS is
not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct
tire pressure, even if under‐inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start‐ups as
long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator
is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 10‑46 for
additional information.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and
Industry Canada
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑16 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry
Canada.
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS is designed to warn
the driver when a low tire pressure
condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel
assembly, excluding the spare tire
and wheel assembly, if the vehicle
has one. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in the
vehicle's tires and transmits the tire
pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
Vehicle Care
the driver. For additional information
and details about the DIC operation
and displays see Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑25 and
Tire Messages on page 5‑37.
When a low tire pressure condition
is detected, the TPMS illuminates
the low tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument panel
cluster. If the warning light comes
on, stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires to the recommended
pressure shown on the tire loading
information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑12.
At the same time a message to
check the pressure in a specific tire
appears on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. The low tire
pressure warning light and the DIC
warning message come on at each
ignition cycle until the tires are
inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire
pressure levels can be viewed by
The low tire pressure warning light
may come on in cool weather when
the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This
could be an early indicator that the
air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the
proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information
label, attached to your vehicle,
shows the size of your vehicle's
original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressure for your
vehicle's tires when they are cold.
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑12, for an example of the
Tire and Loading Information label
and its location on your vehicle.
Also see Tire Pressure on
page 10‑44.
10-47
Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you
about a low tire pressure condition
but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection
on page 10‑50, Tire Rotation on
page 10‑50 and Tires on
page 10‑37.
Notice: Using non‐approved tire
sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage
caused by using an incorrect tire
sealant is not covered by the
vehicle warranty. Always use
the GM approved tire sealant
available through your dealer/
retailer.
Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits
use a GM approved liquid tire
sealant. Using non-approved tire
sealants could damage the TPMS
sensors. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 10‑59 for
information regarding the inflator kit
materials and instructions.
10-48
Vehicle Care
TPMS Malfunction Light and
Message
The TPMS will not function properly
if one or more of the TPMS sensors
are missing or inoperable. When
the system detects a malfunction,
the low tire warning light flashes
for about one minute and then stays
on for the remainder of the ignition
cycle. A DIC warning message is
also displayed. The low tire warning
light and DIC warning message
come on at each ignition cycle until
the problem is corrected. Some of
the conditions that can cause the
malfunction light and DIC message
to come on are:
.
One of the road tires has
been replaced with the spare
tire, if your vehicle has one.
The spare tire does not have
a TPMS sensor. The TPMS
malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once
you re‐install the road tire
containing the TPMS sensor.
.
.
The TPMS sensor matching
process was started but not
completed or not completed
successfully after rotating the
vehicle's tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light
should go off once the TPMS
sensor matching process
is performed successfully.
See “TPMS Sensor Matching
Process” later in this section.
One or more TPMS sensors
are missing or damaged.
The DIC message and the
TPMS malfunction light should
go off when the TPMS sensors
are installed and the sensor
matching process is performed
successfully. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
.
Replacement tires or wheels do
not match your vehicle's original
equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those
recommended for your vehicle
could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying
New Tires on page 10‑52.
.
Operating electronic devices or
being near facilities using radio
wave frequencies similar to the
TPMS could cause the TPMS
sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it
cannot detect or signal a low tire
condition. See your dealer/retailer
for service if the TPMS malfunction
light and DIC message comes on
and stays on.
Vehicle Care
TPMS Sensor Matching
Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
identification code. Any time you
rotate your vehicle's tires or replace
one or more of the TPMS sensors,
the identification codes will need to
be matched to the new tire/wheel
position. The sensors are matched
to the tire/wheel positions in the
following order: driver side front tire,
passenger side front tire, passenger
side rear tire, and driver side rear
tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
The TPMS sensors can also be
matched to each tire/wheel position
by increasing or decreasing the
tire's air pressure. If increasing the
tire's air pressure, do not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure
indicated on the tire's sidewall.
To decrease air-pressure out of a
tire you can use the pointed end of
the valve cap, a pencil-style air
pressure gauge, or a key.
You have two minutes to match
the first tire/wheel position, and
five minutes overall to match all
four tire/wheel positions. If it takes
longer than two minutes, to match
the first tire and wheel, or more than
five minutes to match all four tire
and wheel positions the matching
process stops and you need to
start over.
The TPMS sensor matching process
is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to
ON/RUN with the engine off.
3. Press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter's LOCK
and UNLOCK buttons at the
same time for approximately
five seconds. The horn sounds
twice to signal the receiver
is in relearn mode and TIRE
LEARNING ACTIVE message
displays on the DIC screen.
10-49
4. Start with the driver side
front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the
valve cap stem. Activate the
TPMS sensor by increasing
or decreasing the tire's air
pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds.
The horn chirp, which may take
up to 30 seconds to sound,
confirms that the sensor
identification code has been
matched to this tire and wheel
position.
6. Proceed to the passenger side
front tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger side
rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
10-50
Vehicle Care
8. Proceed to the driver side rear
tire, and repeat the procedure in
Step 5. The horn sounds two
times to indicate the sensor
identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear
tire, and the TPMS sensor
matching process is no longer
active. The TIRE LEARNING
ACTIVE message on the DIC
display screen goes off.
9. Turn the ignition switch to
LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the
recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the
valve stems.
Tire Inspection
We recommend that you
regularly inspect your vehicle's
tires, including the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one, for signs
of wear or damage. See When It
Is Time for New Tires on
page 10‑51 for more information.
Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate the tires as soon
as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for
damaged tires or wheels.
See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 10‑51 and Wheel
Replacement on page 10‑56 .
Tire Rotation
Tires should be rotated every
5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000 to
13 000 km). See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 11‑2 .
The purpose of a regular tire
rotation is to achieve a uniform
wear for all tires on the vehicle.
This will ensure that the vehicle
continues to perform most like it
did when the tires were new.
When rotating the vehicle's tires,
always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Vehicle Care
If the vehicle has a compact
spare tire, do not include it in
the tire rotation.
After the tires have been
rotated, adjust the front and rear
inflation pressures as shown on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Tire Pressure on
page 10‑44 and Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑12.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor
System. See Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on page 10‑46.
Make certain that all wheel
nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2.
{ WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 10‑58.
Make sure the spare tire, if the
vehicle has one, is stored
securely. Push, pull, and then
try to rotate or turn the tire. If it
moves, tighten the cable. See
Tire Changing on page 10‑67 .
10-51
When It Is Time for New
Tires
Various factors, such as
maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading,
and road conditions influence
when you need new tires.
One way to tell when it is time for
new tires is to check the treadwear
indicators, which appear when the
tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) or
less of tread remaining.
10-52
Vehicle Care
The vehicle needs new tires if any
of the following statements are true:
.
You can see the indicators at
three or more places around
the tire.
.
You can see cord or fabric
showing through the tire's
rubber.
.
The tread or sidewall is cracked,
cut, or snagged deep enough to
show cord or fabric.
.
The tire has a bump, bulge,
or split.
.
The tire has a puncture, cut,
or other damage that cannot be
repaired well because of the size
or location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over
time. This is also true for the spare
tire, if the vehicle has one, even
if it is not being used. Multiple
conditions affect how fast this aging
takes place, including temperatures,
loading conditions, and inflation
pressure maintenance. With proper
care and maintenance tires typically
wear out before they degrade due
to age. If you are unsure about the
need to replace the tires as they get
older, consult the tire manufacturer
for more information.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched
specific tires for your vehicle.
The original equipment tires
installed on your vehicle,
when it was new, were designed
to meet General Motors
Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec)
system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly
recommends that you get tires
with the same TPC Spec rating.
This way, your vehicle will
continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same
performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the
original tires.
GM's exclusive TPC Spec
system considers over a dozen
critical specifications that impact
the overall performance of
your vehicle, including brake
system performance, ride
and handling, traction control,
and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM's TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire's
sidewall near the tire size. If the
tires have an all‐season tread
design, the TPC Spec number
will be followed by an MS for
mud and snow. See Tire
Sidewall Labeling on page 10‑37
for additional information.
GM recommends replacing tires
in sets of four. This is because
uniform tread depth on all tires
will help keep your vehicle
performing most like it did when
the tires were new. Replacing
less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling
performance of your vehicle.
Vehicle Care
See Tire Inspection on page 10‑50
and Tire Rotation on page 10‑50
for information on proper tire
rotation.
{ WARNING
Mixing tires could cause you
to lose control while driving.
If you mix tires of different
sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have
a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types may
also cause damage to your
vehicle. Be sure to use the
correct size, brand, and type
of tires on all wheels. It is
all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, as
it was developed for use on
your vehicle. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 10‑79.
{ WARNING
If you use bias-ply tires on the
vehicle, the wheel rim flanges
could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail
suddenly, causing a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with
the wheels on the vehicle.
If you must replace your
vehicle's tires with those that do
not have a TPC Spec number,
make sure they are the same
size, load range, speed rating,
and construction type (radial
and bias‐belted tires) as your
vehicle's original tires.
10-53
Vehicles that have a tire
pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate
low‐pressure warning if non‐TPC
Spec rated tires are installed
on your vehicle. Non‐TPC
Spec rated tires may give a
low‐pressure warning that is
higher or lower than the proper
warning level you would get with
TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire
Pressure Monitor System on
page 10‑45.
Your vehicle's original
equipment tires are listed on
the Tire and Loading Information
Label. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑12, for more
information about the Tire and
Loading Information Label and
its location on your vehicle.
10-54
Vehicle Care
Different Size Tires and
Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are
a different size than your original
equipment wheels and tires, this
could affect the way your vehicle
performs, including its braking,
ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover.
Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as anti‐lock
brakes, rollover airbags, traction
control, and electronic stability
control, the performance of these
systems can be affected.
{ WARNING
If you add different sized wheels,
your vehicle may not provide an
acceptable level of performance
and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase
the chance that you will crash and
suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems
developed for your vehicle, and
have them properly installed by a
GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on
page 10‑52 and Accessories and
Modifications on page 10‑3 for
additional information.
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates
to the system developed by the
United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA), which grades tires
by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance.
This applies only to vehicles
sold in the United States.
Vehicle Care
The grades are molded on the
sidewalls of most passenger
car tires. The Uniform Tire
Quality Grading (UTQG) system
does not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal
rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on
General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary
with respect to these grades,
they must also conform to
federal safety requirements and
additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
All Passenger Car Tires Must
Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements In Addition To
These Grades.
10-55
Treadwear
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based
on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified
government test course.
For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and a
half (1½) times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices
and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on
specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
10-56
Vehicle Care
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades
are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can
lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and
A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law. Warning: The
temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance
The tires and wheels on the vehicle
were aligned and balanced carefully
at the factory to give the longest tire
life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and
tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if there
is unusual tire wear or the vehicle
pulls to one side or the other, the
alignment should be checked. If the
vehicle vibrates when driving on a
smooth road, the tires and wheels
might need to be rebalanced.
See your dealer/retailer for proper
diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and
wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it
(except some aluminum wheels,
which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer/retailer if any of
these conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the
kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the
same load-carrying capacity,
diameter, width, offset, and be
mounted the same way as the
one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of the
wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts,
or Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) sensors, replace them only
with new GM original equipment
parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for
the vehicle.
Vehicle Care
{ WARNING
Using the wrong replacement
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control.
You could have a collision in
which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can
also cause problems with bearing
life, brake cooling, speedometer
or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and
tire or tire chain clearance to
the body and chassis.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10‑58 for more information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{ WARNING
Putting a used wheel on the
vehicle is dangerous. You cannot
know how it has been used or
how far it has been driven.
It could fail suddenly and cause
a crash. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
{ WARNING
Do not use tire chains. There is
not enough clearance. Tire chains
used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes,
(Continued)
10-57
WARNING (Continued)
suspension or other vehicle parts.
The area damaged by the tire
chains could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle and you or
others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction
device only if its manufacturer
recommends it for use on the
vehicle and tire size combination
and road conditions. Follow that
manufacturer's instructions.
To help avoid damage to the
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust
or remove the device if it is
contacting the vehicle, and do not
spin the vehicle's wheels. If you
do find traction devices that will
fit, install them on the front tires.
10-58
Vehicle Care
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout
while you are driving, especially if
you maintain your vehicle's tires
properly. If air goes out of a tire,
it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a
blowout, here are a few tips about
what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
toward that side. Take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to
maintain lane position, and then
gently brake to a stop well out of
the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear
blowout remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle
under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you
can still steer. Gently brake to a
stop, well off the road if possible.
{ WARNING
Lifting a vehicle and getting
under it to do maintenance or
repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 6‑4.
{ WARNING
Changing a tire can be
dangerous. The vehicle can
slip off the jack and roll over
or fall on you or other people.
You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level
place to change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic
transmission shift lever in
P (Park), or shift a manual
transmission to 1 (First) or
R (Reverse).
3. Turn off the engine and do
not restart while the vehicle
is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care
WARNING (Continued)
To be certain the vehicle will not
move, put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from
the one being changed. That
would be the tire on the other
side, at the opposite end of the
vehicle.
This vehicle may come with a jack
and spare tire or a tire sealant and
compressor kit. To use the jacking
equipment to change a spare tire
safely, follow the instructions below.
Then see Tire Changing on
page 10‑67. To use the tire sealant
and compressor kit, see Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 10‑59.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),
use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains
how to repair or change a tire.
10-59
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
{ WARNING
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area
that has no fresh air ventilation.
For more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑23.
10-60
Vehicle Care
{ WARNING
Over-inflating a tire could
cause the tire to rupture and
you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read and follow the
tire sealant and compressor kit
instructions and inflate the tire
to its recommended pressure.
Do not exceed the recommended
pressure.
{ WARNING
Storing the tire sealant and
compressor kit or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle
could cause injury. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike someone. Store the
tire sealant and compressor kit
in its original location.
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and
compressor kit, there may not be a
spare tire, tire changing equipment,
and on some vehicles there may not
be a place to store a tire.
The tire sealant and compressor
can be used to temporarily seal
punctures up to ¼ inch (6 mm) in
the tread area of the tire. It can
also be used to inflate an under
inflated tire.
If the tire has been separated from
the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
or has a large puncture, the tire is
too severely damaged for the tire
sealant and compressor kit to be
effective. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 13‑6.
Read and follow all of the tire
sealant and compressor kit
instructions.
This vehicle may have one of
the following tire sealant and
compressor kits. The kit includes:
Vehicle Care
Tire Sealant
Read and follow the safe handling
instructions on the label adhered to
the sealant canister.
A. Selector Switch
(Sealant/Air or Air Only)
B. On/Off Button
C. Pressure Gage
D. Pressure Deflation Button
(If equipped)
E. Tire Sealant Canister
F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
G. Air Only Hose (Black)
H. Power Plug
Check the tire sealant expiration
date on the sealant canister.
The sealant canister should be
replaced before its expiration date.
Replacement sealant canisters
are available at your local dealer/
retailer. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister”
following.
There is only enough sealant to
seal one tire. After usage, the
sealant canister and sealant/air
hose assembly must be replaced.
See “Removal and Installation of
the Sealant Canister” following.
Using the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit to
Temporarily Seal and
Inflate a Punctured Tire
Follow the directions closely for
correct sealant usage.
10-61
10-62
Vehicle Care
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)
and the power plug (H).
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.
4. Remove the valve stem cap
from the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
When using the tire sealant and
compressor kit during cold
temperatures, warm the kit in a
heated environment for 5 minutes.
This will help to inflate the tire
faster.
Always do a safety check first. See
If a Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑58.
Do not remove any objects that
have penetrated the tire.
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage
location. See Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 10‑67.
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F)
onto the tire valve stem. Turn it
clockwise until it is tight.
6. Plug the power plug (H) into
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle. Unplug all items
from other accessory power
outlets. See Power Outlets on
page 5‑10.
If the vehicle has an accessory
power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette
lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug
cord in the door or window.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
must be running while using the
air compressor.
8. Turn the selector switch (A)
counterclockwise to the
Sealant + Air position.
9. Press the on/off (B) button
to turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit on.
The compressor will inject
sealant and air into the tire.
The pressure gauge (C) will
initially show a high pressure
while the compressor pushes the
sealant into the tire. Once the
sealant is completely dispersed
into the tire, the pressure will
quickly drop and start to rise
again as the tire inflates with
air only.
Vehicle Care
10. Inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation
pressure using the pressure
gauge (C). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found
on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑44.
The pressure gauge (C) may
read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor off
to get an accurate pressure
reading. The compressor may
be turned on/off until the
correct pressure is reached.
Notice: If the recommended
pressure cannot be reached after
approximately 25 minutes, the
vehicle should not be driven
farther. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant and
compressor kit cannot inflate the
tire. Remove the power plug from
the accessory power outlet and
unscrew the inflating hose from
the tire valve. See Roadside
Assistance Program on
page 13‑6.
11. Press the on/off button (B) to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit off.
The tire is not sealed and will
continue to leak air until the
vehicle is driven and the
sealant is distributed in the tire,
therefore, Steps 12 through
18 must be done immediately
after Step 11.
Be careful while handling the
tire sealant and compressor
kit as it could be warm after
usage.
12. Unplug the power plug (H) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F)
counterclockwise to remove it
from the tire valve stem.
14. Replace the tire valve
stem cap.
10-63
15. Replace the sealant/air
hose (F), and the power
plug (H) back in their original
location.
16. If the flat tire was able to
inflate to the recommended
inflation pressure, remove the
maximum speed label from the
sealant canister (E) and place
it in a highly visible location.
The label is a reminder not to
exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until
the damaged tire is repaired or
replaced.
17. Return the equipment to its
original storage location in the
vehicle.
18. Immediately drive the vehicle
5 miles (8 km) to distribute the
sealant in the tire.
10-64
Vehicle Care
19. Stop at a safe location and
check the tire pressure.
Refer to Steps 1 through 11
under “Using the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit without
Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not
Punctured).”
If the tire pressure has fallen
more than 10 psi (68 kPa)
below the recommended
inflation pressure, stop driving
the vehicle. The tire is too
severely damaged and the tire
sealant cannot seal the tire.
See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 13‑6.
If the tire pressure has
not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the
recommended inflation
pressure, inflate the tire to
the recommended inflation
pressure.
20. Wipe off any sealant from the
wheel, tire, and vehicle.
21. Dispose of the used sealant
canister (E) and sealant/air
hose (F) assembly at a local
dealer/retailer or in accordance
with local state codes and
practices.
22. Replace it with a new canister
available from your dealer/
retailer.
23. After temporarily sealing a tire
using the tire sealant and
compressor kit, take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer/
retailer within a 100 miles
(161 km) of driving to have
the tire repaired or replaced.
Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit without
Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not
Punctured)
To use the air compressor to inflate
a tire with air only and not sealant:
Vehicle Care
Always do a safety check first. See
If a Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑58.
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage
location. See Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 10‑67.
2. Unwrap the air only hose (G)
and the power plug (H).
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.
10-65
4. Remove the tire valve stem cap
from the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
8. Turn the selector switch (A)
clockwise to the Air Only
position.
5. Attach the air only hose (G) onto
the tire valve stem by turning it
clockwise until it is tight.
9. Press the on/off (B) button to
turn the compressor on.
6. Plug the power plug (H) into the
accessory power outlet in the
vehicle. Unplug all items from
other accessory power outlets.
See Power Outlets on
page 5‑10.
If the vehicle has an accessory
power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette
lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug
cord in the door or window.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
must be running while using the
air compressor.
The compressor will inflate the
tire with air only.
10. Inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation
pressure using the pressure
gauge (C). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found
on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑44.
The pressure gauge (C) may
read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor off
to get an accurate reading.
The compressor may be turned
on/off until the correct pressure
is reached.
10-66
Vehicle Care
If you inflate the tire higher
than the recommended
pressure you can adjust
the excess pressure by
pressing the pressure deflation
button (D), if equipped, until
the proper pressure reading is
reached. This option is only
functional when using the air
only hose (G).
14. Replace the air only hose (G)
and the power plug (H) and
cord back in its original
location.
Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister
15. Place the equipment in the
original storage location in the
vehicle.
1. Unwrap the sealant hose.
4. Replace with a new canister
which is available from your
dealer/retailer.
5. Push the new canister into
place.
Be careful while handling the
tire sealant and compressor
kit as it could be warm after
usage.
13. Disconnect the air only
hose (G) from the tire
valve stem, by turning it
counterclockwise, and replace
the tire valve stem cap.
2. Press the canister release
button.
3. Pull up and remove the canister.
11. Press the on/off button (B)
to turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit off.
12. Unplug the power plug (H) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
To remove the sealant canister:
The tire sealant and compressor kit
has an accessory adapter located in
a compartment on the bottom of its
housing that may be used to inflate
air mattresses, balls, etc.
Vehicle Care
Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit
The tire sealant and compressor
kit is located in the storage
compartment on the driver side,
at the rear of the vehicle.
10-67
2. Press the two tabs on the quick
release buckle to release the
tire sealant and compressor kit
strap.
3. Remove the sealant and
compressor kit from its tray.
To store the tire sealant and
compressor kit, reverse the steps.
Tire Changing
1. Press down on the latch tab and
pull the cover off to access the
storage compartment.
Removing Tools
A. Tool Bag
The tools needed to remove the
spare tire are located in the storage
compartment on the driver side, at
the rear of the vehicle.
B. Wing Bolt
1. Open the jack storage
compartment by pulling on the
latch tab, located toward the rear
of the vehicle, and pulling the
cover off.
C. Jack
2. Remove the wing bolt (B) by
turning it counterclockwise
3. Push the jack (C) up out of the
holding bracket.
4. Turn the jack on its side, with the
bottom facing toward you.
5. Pull the jack straight out, bottom
first.
10-68
Vehicle Care
1. Open the storage compartment
door of the convenience center
that is nearest the liftgate and
remove the cap on the bottom
of the storage compartment.
2. Open the carpet cutout that is
located through the hole of the
storage compartment.
3. Attach the lug wrench into the
hoist shaft.
The tools you will be using include
the jack (A) and lug wrench (B).
A. Rear Convenience Center
Removing the Spare Tire
C. Storage Compartment Cap Hole
The compact spare tire is located
under the vehicle, in front of the rear
bumper. See Compact Spare Tire
on page 10‑79 for more information
about the compact spare.
D. Hoist Shaft
B. Lug Wrench
E. Compact Spare Tire
F. Retainer
G. Hoist Shaft Assembly
4. Turn the lug wrench
counterclockwise to lower
the spare tire to the ground.
Continue turning the wrench
until the spare tire can be pulled
out from under the vehicle.
Vehicle Care
6. Turn the wrench clockwise to
raise the cable back up after
removing the spare tire.
Do not store a full‐size or a flat
road tire under the vehicle. See
“Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools” later in this section.
To continue changing the flat tire,
see “Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire” later in this
section.
10-69
Do the following to check the cable:
1. Check under the vehicle to see if
the cable is visible.
2. If it is not visible, see Secondary
Latch System on page 10‑77.
If it is visible, first try to tighten
the cable by turning the lug
wrench clockwise until you hear
two clicks or feel it skip twice.
You cannot over‐tighten the
cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the
wrench counterclockwise three
or four turns.
4. If the spare tire has not lowered,
tighten the cable all the way and
then loosen it at least two times.
5. Tilt the retainer and slip it
through the wheel opening to
remove the spare tire from the
cable.
If the spare tire will not lower, the
secondary latch could be engaged.
If the spare tire did lower to the
ground, continue with Step 5
under “Removing the Spare
Tire (Vehicles with the Rear
Convenience Center)” listed
previously.
10-70
Vehicle Care
5. If you still cannot lower the
spare tire to the ground, see
Secondary Latch System on
page 10‑77.
If the vehicle has aluminum
wheels, remove the wheel nut
caps using the wheel wrench.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10‑58 for more
information.
2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover,
loosen the plastic nut caps with
the wheel wrench. They will not
come off. Then, using the flat
end of the wheel wrench, pry
along the edge of the cover until
it comes off. Be careful; the
edges may be sharp. Do not try
to remove the cover with your
bare hands.
Store the wheel cover securely
in the rear of the vehicle until
you have the flat tire repaired
or replaced.
3. Loosen the wheel nuts — but do
not remove them — using the
lug wrench. For wheels with a
wheel lock key, use the wheel
lock key between the lock nut
and lug wrench. The key is
supplied in the front passenger
door pocket.
Notice: If this vehicle has wheel
locks and an impact wrench is
used to remove the wheel nuts,
the lock nut or wheel lock key
could be damaged. Do not use
an impact wrench to remove the
wheel nuts if this vehicle has
wheel locks.
4. To identify the appropriate
jacking location, find the
triangle (A) about 12 inches
(30.5 cm) from the front tire
or (B) about 10.5 inches (27 cm)
from the rear tire.
The triangle is located near each
wheel on the vehicle's exterior.
Vehicle Care
Notice: If a jack is used to raise
the vehicle without positioning it
correctly, the vehicle could be
damaged. When raising the
vehicle on a jack, avoid contact
with the rear axle control arms.
5. Do not raise the vehicle yet.
Put the compact spare tire
near you.
{ WARNING
Getting under a vehicle when it
is jacked up is dangerous. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed.
Never get under a vehicle when
it is supported only by a jack.
10-71
{ WARNING
Raising your vehicle with the
jack improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help
avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
6. Attach the lug wrench to the
jack, and turn the wrench
clockwise to raise the jack
head 3 inches (7.6 cm).
7. Place the jack under the vehicle
as identified in Step 4. Raise the
vehicle by turning the lug wrench
clockwise in the jack. Raise the
vehicle far enough off the
ground so that there is enough
room for the spare tire to fit
under the wheel well.
8. Remove all the wheel nuts and
the flat tire.
10-72
Vehicle Care
{ WARNING
9. Remove the plastic spare tire
heat shield by pulling the rubber
latch. Store the plastic spare tire
heat shield. See “Storing a Flat
or Spare Tire and Tools” later in
this section for more information.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where
the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 10‑58.
{ WARNING
Never use oil or grease on bolts
or nuts because the nuts might
come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
10. Remove any rust or dirt from
the wheel bolts, mounting
surfaces, and spare wheel.
11. Place the spare tire on the
wheel mounting surface.
Vehicle Care
12. Put the nuts on by hand by
turning them clockwise until
the wheel is held against the
mounting surface. Make sure
the rounded end is toward the
wheel.
13. Lower the vehicle by attaching
the lug wrench to the jack
and turning the wrench
counterclockwise. Lower
the jack completely.
10-73
{ WARNING
Wheel nuts that are improperly or
incorrectly tightened can cause
the wheels to become loose or
come off. The wheel nuts should
be tightened with a torque wrench
to the proper torque specification
after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the
aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 12‑2 for
original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
Notice: Improperly tightened
wheel nuts can lead to brake
pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs,
evenly tighten the wheel nuts
in the proper sequence and to
the proper torque specification.
See Capacities and Specifications
on page 12‑2 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly
in a crisscross sequence, as
shown.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit
on your vehicle's compact spare.
If you try to put a wheel cover on
the compact spare, the cover or
the spare could be damaged.
10-74
Vehicle Care
Storing the Spare Tire
{ WARNING
The underbody-mounted spare
tire needs to be stored with the
valve stem pointing down. If the
spare tire is stored with the valve
stem pointing upwards, the
secondary latch will not work
properly and the spare tire could
loosen and suddenly fall from the
vehicle. If this happened when
the vehicle was being driven, the
tire might contact a person or
another vehicle, causing injury
and damage to itself. Be sure the
underbody-mounted spare tire is
stored with the valve stem
pointing down.
{ WARNING
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
To store the spare tire:
1. Lay the compact spare tire near
the rear of the vehicle with the
valve stem down.
2. Reinstall the plastic spare tire
heat shield on the compact
spare tire.
3. Slide the cable retainer through
the center of the wheel and start
to raise the compact spare tire.
Make sure the retainer is fully
seated across the underside of
the wheel.
4. When the compact spare tire is
almost in the stored position,
turn the tire so the valve is
toward the rear of the vehicle.
This position helps when
checking the air pressure in
the compact spare tire.
5. Raise the tire fully against
the underside of the vehicle.
Continue turning the lug wrench
until you feel more than two
clicks. This indicates that the
compact spare tire is secure and
the cable is tight. The spare tire
hoist cannot be overtightened.
Vehicle Care
10-75
3. Put the flat tire in the rear
storage area with the valve stem
pointing toward the rear of the
vehicle.
6. Make sure the tire is stored
securely. Push, pull (A), and then
try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire
moves, use the lug wrench to
tighten the cable.
Storing the Flat Tire
1. Remove the cable package from
the jack storage area.
2. Remove the small center cap by
tapping the back of the cap with
the extension of the shaft, if the
vehicle has aluminum wheels.
5. Hook the cable onto the outside
portion of the liftgate hinges (B).
4. Pull the cable (A) through the
door striker (E), the center of the
wheel (D), and the plastic spare
tire heat shield (C), as shown.
6. Hook the other end of the cable
onto the outside portion of the
liftgate hinge on the other side of
the vehicle.
7. Pull on the cable to make sure it
is secure.
10-76
Vehicle Care
Storing the Tools
3. Reinstall the wing bolt (B) by
turning clockwise.
4. To replace the cover, line up the
tab at the front of the cover with
the notch in the cover opening.
Push the cover in place and
make sure that the rear clips are
in the slots and push the cover
closed.
8. Make sure the metal tube is
centered at the striker. Push the
tube toward the front of the
vehicle.
A. Tool Bag
9. Close the liftgate and make sure
it is latched properly.
C. Jack
B. Wing Bolt
Put back all tools as they were
stored in the jack storage
compartment and put the
compartment cover back on.
1. Ensure that the bottom of the
jack is facing toward you.
2. Turn the jack (C) on its side and
place down on the holding
bracket.
Store the center cap or the plastic
bolt‐on wheel covers until a full size
tire is put back on the vehicle. When
you replace the compact spare with
a full‐size tire, reinstall the bolt‐on
wheel covers or the center cap.
Hand‐tighten them over the wheel
nuts, using the lug wrench.
Vehicle Care
Secondary Latch System
This vehicle has an underbody
mounted tire hoist assembly that
has a secondary latch system. It is
designed to stop the compact spare
tire from suddenly falling off the
vehicle if the cable holding the
spare tire is damaged. For the
secondary latch to work, the tire
must be stowed with the valve stem
pointing down. See Tire Changing
on page 10‑67 for instructions on
storing the spare tire correctly.
{ WARNING
Before beginning this procedure
read all the instructions. Failure to
read and follow the instructions
could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get
hurt. Read and follow the
instructions listed next.
10-77
To release the spare tire from the
secondary latch:
{ WARNING
Someone standing too close
during the procedure could be
injured by the jack. If the spare
tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is
behind you or on either side of
you as you pull the jack out from
under the spare.
1. If the cable is not visible, start
this procedure at Step 3.
All‐Wheel‐Drive Vehicle shown
2. Turn the lug wrench
counterclockwise until
approximately 6 inches (15 cm)
of cable is exposed.
3. Attach the lug wrench to the
jack and raise the jack at least
10 turns.
4. Place the jack under the vehicle,
ahead of the rear bumper.
Position the center lift point of
the jack under the center of the
spare tire.
10-78
Vehicle Care
9. Tilt the retainer and slip it
through the wheel opening
when the spare tire has been
completely lowered.
5. Turn the lug wrench clockwise
to raise the jack until it lifts the
secondary latch spring.
6. Keep raising the jack until the
spare tire stops moving upward
and is held firmly in place. This
lets you know that the secondary
latch has released and the spare
tire is balancing on the jack.
10. Turn the lug wrench clockwise
to raise the cable back up if the
cable is hanging.
8. Disconnect the lug wrench
from the jack and carefully
remove the jack. Use one hand
to push against the spare tire
while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with
the other hand.
7. Lower the jack by turning the lug
wrench counterclockwise. Keep
lowering the jack until the spare
tire slides off the jack.
Have the hoist shaft assembly
inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare
tire using the hoist assembly until it
has been repaired or replaced.
Vehicle Care
Compact Spare Tire
{ WARNING
Driving with more than one
compact spare tire at a time
could result in loss of braking
and handling. This could lead to a
crash and you or others could be
injured. Use only one compact
spare tire at a time.
The compact spare tire, if the
vehicle has one, was fully inflated
when the vehicle was new, however,
it can lose air after a time. Check
the inflation pressure regularly.
It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare
on the vehicle, stop as soon as
possible and make sure the
spare tire is correctly inflated.
10-79
The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to
65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up
to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you
can finish your trip and have the
full-size tire repaired or replaced at
your convenience. Of course, it is
best to replace the spare with a
full-size tire as soon as possible.
The spare tire will last longer and be
in good shape in case it is needed
again.
And do not mix the compact spare
tire or wheel with other wheels or
tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: When the compact spare
is installed, do not take the
vehicle through an automatic
car wash with guide rails. The
compact spare can get caught on
the rails which can damage the
tire, wheel and other parts of the
vehicle.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the
compact spare. Using them can
damage the vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not
use tire chains on the compact
spare.
Do not use the compact spare on
other vehicles.
The All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system
will be automatically disabled
when you use the compact spare.
To restore the AWD and prevent
excessive wear on the clutch in your
AWD, replace the compact spare
tire with a full-size tire as soon as
possible.
10-80
Vehicle Care
Jump Starting
If the vehicle's battery has run
down, you may want to use another
vehicle and some jumper cables to
start your vehicle. Be sure to use
the following steps to do it safely.
{ WARNING
Batteries can hurt you. They can
be dangerous because:
.
They contain acid that can
burn you.
.
They contain gas that can
explode or ignite.
.
They contain enough
electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps
exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps
could result in costly damage to
the vehicle that would not be
covered by the warranty.
Trying to start the vehicle by
pushing or pulling it will not
work, and it could damage the
vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must
have a 12‐volt battery with a
negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle's
system is not a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both
vehicles can be damaged. Only
use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump
start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough
so the jumper cables can reach,
but be sure the vehicles are
not touching each other. If they
are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You
would not be able to start your
vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical
systems.
To avoid the possibility of the
vehicles rolling, set the parking
brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start
procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in Neutral
before setting the parking brake.
If one of the vehicles is a
four-wheel-drive vehicle, be
sure the transfer case is not in
Neutral.
Notice: If you leave the radio or
other accessories on during the
jump starting procedure, they
could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the
radio and other accessories when
jump starting the vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both
vehicles. Unplug unnecessary
accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory
power outlets. Turn off the radio
and all lamps that are not
needed. This will avoid sparks
and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
Vehicle Care
4. Open the hoods and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−)
terminal locations on the other
vehicle. Your vehicle has a
remote positive (+) and a
remote negative (−) jump
starting terminal. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6 for more information
on the terminal locations.
{ WARNING
Using a match near a battery can
cause battery gas to explode.
People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded.
Use a flashlight if you need
more light.
Be sure the batteries have
enough water. You do not need
to add water to the ACDelco®
battery (or batteries) installed in
your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
add water to take care of that
first. If you do not, explosive gas
could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that
can burn you. Do not get it on
you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush
the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
{ WARNING
Fans or other moving engine
parts can injure you badly. Keep
your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables
do not have loose or missing
insulation. If they do, you could
get a shock. The vehicles could
be damaged too.
10-81
Before you connect the cables,
here are some basic things you
should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine
part or to a remote negative (−)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to
negative (−) or you will get a
short that would damage the
battery and maybe other parts
too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal on the
dead battery because this can
cause sparks.
10-82
Vehicle Care
8. Now connect the black
negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the
good battery. Use a remote
negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
6. Connect the red positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the dead battery.
Use a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end
touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the
good battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
Do not let the other end touch
anything until the next step.
The other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead
battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part,
or to a remote negative (−)
terminal on the vehicle with
the dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the
negative (−) cable at least
18 inches (45 cm) away from
the dead battery, but not near
engine parts that move.
The electrical connection is just
as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the
battery is much less.
Your vehicle has a remote
negative (−) terminal for this
purpose.
Vehicle Care
10. Now start the vehicle with
the good battery and run the
engine for a while.
To disconnect the jumper cables
from both vehicles, do the following:
1. Disconnect the black
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead
battery.
11. Try to start the vehicle that
had the dead battery. If it will
not start after a few tries, it
probably needs service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are
connected or removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the
vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other
or other metal.
10-83
2. Disconnect the black
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine
Part or Remote Negative (−)
Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote
Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal
3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the vehicle with the
good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the other vehicle.
10-84
Vehicle Care
Towing
Towing the Vehicle
To avoid damage, the disabled
vehicle should be towed with all
four wheels off the ground. Consult
your dealer/retailer or a professional
towing service if the disabled
vehicle must be towed.
dolly towing. Dinghy towing is
towing the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground. Dolly towing
is towing the vehicle with two
wheels on the ground and two
wheels up on a device known
as a dolly.
Is the vehicle ready to be
towed? Just as preparing the
vehicle for a long trip, make
sure the vehicle is prepared
to be towed.
Dinghy Towing
Here are some important things to
consider before recreational vehicle
towing:
To tow the vehicle behind
another vehicle for recreational
purposes — such as behind a
motorhome, see Recreational
Vehicle Towing following.
.
What is the towing capacity
of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow
vehicle manufacturer's
recommendations.
Recreational Vehicle
Towing
.
What is the distance that will be
travelled? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
.
Is the proper towing equipment
going to be used? See your
dealer/retailer or trailering
professional for additional
advice and equipment
recommendations.
Recreational vehicle towing
means towing the vehicle behind
another vehicle – such as behind a
motorhome. The two most common
types of recreational vehicle towing
are known as dinghy towing and
.
If the vehicle is front-wheel‐drive, it
can be dinghy towed from the front.
These vehicles may also be towed
by putting the front wheels on a
dolly. See “Dolly Towing” later in
this section.
Vehicle Care
If the vehicle is all‐wheel‐drive, it
can be dinghy towed from the front.
These vehicles can also be towed
by placing them on a platform trailer
with all four wheels off of the
ground. These vehicles cannot be
towed using a dolly.
For vehicles being dinghy towed,
the vehicle should be run at the
beginning of each day and at each
RV fuel stop for about five minutes.
This will ensure proper lubrication of
transmission components. Re-install
the fuse to start the vehicle.
To tow the vehicle from the front
with all four wheels on the ground:
1. Position the vehicle to be
towed, shift the transmission to
P (Park), and turn the ignition to
LOCK/OFF.
2. Secure the vehicle to the towing
vehicle.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Turn the ignition to
ACC/ACCESSORY.
10-85
5. Shift the transmission to
N (Neutral).
Once the destination is reached:
6. To prevent the battery from
draining while the vehicle
is being towed, remove the
50 amp BATT1 fuse from the
underhood fuse block and store
in a safe location. See Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on
page 10‑31.
2. Reinstall the 50 amp BATT1 fuse
to the underhood fuse block.
1. Set the parking brake.
3. Shift the transmission to
P (Park), turn the ignition to
LOCK/OFF and remove the
key from the ignition.
7. Release the parking brake.
4. Disconnect the vehicle from the
towing vehicle.
Notice: If the vehicle is towed
without performing each of the
steps listed under “Dinghy
Towing,” the automatic
transmission could be damaged.
Be sure to follow all steps of the
dinghy towing procedure prior to
and after towing the vehicle.
Notice: Do not tow a vehicle with
the front drive wheels on the
ground if one of the front tires
is a compact spare tire. Towing
with two different tire sizes on
the front of the vehicle can
cause severe damage to the
transmission.
Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) is
exceeded while towing the
vehicle, it could be damaged.
Never exceed 105 km/h (65 mph)
while towing the vehicle.
10-86
Vehicle Care
Dolly Towing
(All-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles)
Dolly Towing
(Front-Wheel‐Drive
Vehicles Only)
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a
straight-ahead position with a
clamping device designed for
towing.
5. Remove the key from the
ignition.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
7. Release the parking brake.
Towing the Vehicle From
the Rear
All-wheel‐drive vehicles must not
be towed with two wheels on the
ground. To properly tow these
vehicles, they should be placed on
a platform trailer with all four wheels
off of the ground or dinghy towed
from the front.
To tow a front-wheel‐drive vehicle
from the front with two wheels on
the ground:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake.
Vehicle Care
Appearance Care
Exterior Care
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/
Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
soft cloth and a car washing soap to
clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing
the Vehicle” later in this section.
Notice: Towing the vehicle from
the rear could damage it. Also,
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Never have
the vehicle towed from the rear.
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear.
10-87
Notice: Machine compounding
or aggressive polishing on a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only
non-abrasive waxes and polishes
that are made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish on the
vehicle.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing
of the vehicle by hand may be
necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Foreign materials such as calcium
chloride and other salts, ice melting
agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they
remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive
cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat
gives more depth and gloss to the
colored basecoat. Always use
waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Exterior painted surfaces are
subject to aging, weather and
chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years. To keep
the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Finish Care
10-88
Vehicle Care
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
Parts
Bright metal parts should be
cleaned regularly to keep their
luster. Wash with water or use
chrome polish on chrome or
stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum
trim. To avoid damaging protective
trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to
clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is
recommended for all bright
metal parts.
Washing the Vehicle
To preserve the vehicle's finish,
keep it clean by washing it often.
Do not wash the vehicle in
direct sunlight and use a car
washing soap.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain
chemicals that can damage the
emblems or nameplates on the
vehicle. Check the cleaning
product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic
parts, do not use it on the vehicle
or damage may occur and it
would not be covered by the
warranty.
Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain
acid or abrasives, as they can
damage the paint, metal or plastic
on the vehicle. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from
your dealer/retailer. Follow all
manufacturer directions regarding
correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care
product.
Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after to remove all
cleaning agents completely. If they
are allowed to dry on the surface,
they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water
spotting.
High pressure car washes could
cause water to enter the vehicle.
Avoid using high pressure washes
closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to the
surface of the vehicle. Use of power
washers exceeding 8,274 kPa
(1,200 psi) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
Notice: Conveyor systems on
some automatic car washes could
damage the vehicle. There may
not be enough clearance for the
undercarriage. Check with the car
wash manager before using the
automatic car wash.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will
make them last longer, seal better,
and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth.
During very cold, damp weather
frequent application may be
required. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑7.
Vehicle Care
Wheels and Trim — Aluminum
or Chrome
The vehicle may have either
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft
clean cloth with mild soap and
water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft
clean towel. A wax may then be
applied.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other
chrome trim may be damaged
if the vehicle is not washed after
driving on roads that have been
sprayed with magnesium, calcium
or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads
for conditions such as ice and
dust. Always wash the vehicle's
chrome with soap and water after
exposure.
Notice: Using strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Use only approved
cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is
similar to the painted surface of the
vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
abrasive cleaners, cleaners with
acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because the surface could
be damaged. Do not use chrome
polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Using chrome polish on
aluminum wheels could damage
the wheels. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Use chrome polish
on chrome wheels only.
Use chrome polish only on
chrome-plated wheels, but avoid
any painted surface of the wheel,
and buff off immediately after
application.
10-89
Notice: Driving the vehicle
through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, could damage
the aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Never drive a vehicle that has
aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels through an automatic
car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield
with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint
free cloth or paper towel soaked
with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield
thoroughly when cleaning the
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap,
and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
treatments may cause wiper
streaking. Replace the wiper blades
if they are worn or damaged.
10-90
Vehicle Care
Wipers can be damaged by:
.
Extreme dusty conditions
.
Sand and salt
.
Heat and sun
.
Snow and ice, without proper
removal
Tires
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to
clean the tires.
Notice: Using petroleum-based
tire dressing products on the
vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying
a tire dressing, always wipe off
any overspray from all painted
surfaces on the vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
Underbody Maintenance
If the vehicle is damaged and
requires sheet metal repair or
replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion
material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
Chemicals used for ice and snow
removal and dust control can collect
on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can
develop on the underbody parts
such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement
parts will provide the corrosion
protection while maintaining the
vehicle warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep
scratches in the finish should be
repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop
into major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be
repaired with touch-up materials
available from your dealer/retailer.
Larger areas of finish damage can
be corrected in your dealer's/
retailer's body and paint shop.
At least every spring, flush these
materials from the underbody with
plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt
packed in close areas of the frame
should be loosened before being
flushed. Your dealer/retailer or an
underbody car washing system can
do this.
Vehicle Care
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric
conditions can create a chemical
fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall
upon and attack painted surfaces on
the vehicle. This damage can take
two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped
discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Interior Care
The vehicle's interior will continue to
look its best if it is cleaned often.
Dust and dirt can accumulate on
the upholstery and cause damage
to the carpet, fabric, leather, and
plastic surfaces. Stains should be
removed quickly as extreme heat
could cause them to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may
require more frequent cleaning.
Newspapers and garments that can
transfer color to home furnishings
can also transfer color to the
vehicle's interior.
Remove dust from small buttons
and knobs with a small brush with
soft bristles.
Your dealer/retailer has products for
cleaning the vehicle's interior. When
cleaning the vehicle's interior, only
use cleaners specifically designed
for the surfaces that are being
cleaned. Permanent damage can
result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not
intended. Apply the cleaner directly
to the cleaning cloth to prevent
over-spray. Remove any accidental
over-spray from other surfaces
immediately.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners
when cleaning glass surfaces on
the vehicle, could scratch the
glass and/or cause damage to
the rear window defogger. When
cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass
cleaner.
10-91
Cleaners can contain solvents that
can become concentrated in the
vehicle's interior. Before using
cleaners, read and adhere to all
safety instructions on the label.
While cleaning the vehicle's interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by
opening the vehicle's doors and
windows.
Do not clean the interior using the
following cleaners or techniques:
.
Never use a knife or any other
sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
.
Never use a stiff brush. It can
cause damage to the vehicle's
interior surfaces.
.
Never apply heavy pressure or
rub aggressively with a cleaning
cloth. Use of heavy pressure can
damage the interior and does
not improve the effectiveness of
soil removal.
10-92
.
Vehicle Care
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
Avoid laundry detergents or
dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much
soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts
dirt. For liquid cleaners, about
20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of
water is a good guide.
.
Do not heavily saturate the
upholstery while cleaning.
.
Damage to the vehicle's interior
may result from the use of many
organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
Fabric/Carpet
To clean:
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft
brush attachment to remove dust
and loose dirt. A canister vacuum
with a beater bar in the nozzle may
only be used on floor carpet and
carpeted floor mats. For soils,
always try to remove them first
with plain water or club soda. Before
cleaning, gently remove as much of
the soil as possible using one of the
following techniques:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white
cloth with water or club soda.
.
For liquids: gently blot the
remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb
into the paper towel until no
more can be removed.
5. If the soil is not completely
removed, use a mild soap
solution and repeat the cleaning
process with plain water.
.
For solid dry soils: remove as
much as possible and then
vacuum.
2. Remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the
soil and gently rub toward the
center. Continue cleaning, using
a clean area of the cloth each
time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the
soiled area.
Vehicle Care
If any of the soil remains, a
commercial fabric cleaner or spot
lifter may be necessary. Test a small
hidden area for colorfastness before
using a commercial upholstery
cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression
that a ring formation may result,
clean the entire surface.
A paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture from the fabric or
carpet after the cleaning process.
Leather
To remove dust, a soft cloth
dampened with water can be
used. If a more thorough cleaning
is necessary, a soft cloth dampened
with a mild soap solution can be
used. Allow the leather to dry
naturally. Do not use heat,
steam, or spot lifters or spot
removers, or shoe polish on leather.
Many commercial leather cleaners
and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect leather
may permanently change the
appearance and feel of the
leather and are not recommended.
Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing
organic solvents to clean the
vehicle's interior because they can
alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner.
10-93
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces
To remove dust, a soft cloth
dampened with water can be used.
If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth
dampened with a mild soap
solution can be used to gently
remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic
surfaces. Many commercial
cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect soft plastic
surfaces may permanently change
the appearance and feel of the
interior and are not recommended.
Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing
organic solvents to clean the
vehicle's interior because they can
alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner.
10-94
Vehicle Care
Some commercial products may
increase gloss on the instrument
panel. The increase in gloss may
cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult
to see through the windshield under
certain conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ WARNING
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them.
In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Floor Mats
If the floor mat has a snap retainer,
a grommet in the driver side floor
mat attaches to a hook on the floor
of the vehicle to secure the floor
mat. To remove the floor mat, pull
the mat towards the rear of the
vehicle until the grommet can be
removed from the hook.
If the floor mat has a knob retainer,
a grommet in the floor mat attaches
to a knob on the floor of the vehicle
to secure the floor mat. To remove
the floor mat, turn the knob till it is
aligned with the slot in the floor mat
grommet and pull the floor mat up.
To reinstall, center the slot in the
floor mat grommet with the knob on
the floor and set the mat in place.
Then turn the knob until it is
perpendicular to the slot in the
grommet to lock the mat in place.
Service and Maintenance
Service and
Maintenance
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Maintenance Replacement
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Maintenance Records
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-10
General Information
Notice: Maintenance intervals,
checks, inspections,
recommended fluids, and
lubricants are necessary to keep
this vehicle in good working
condition. Damage caused by
failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
keep the vehicle in good working
condition, improves fuel economy,
and reduces vehicle emissions for
better air quality.
Because of all the different ways
people use vehicles, maintenance
needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services.
11-1
Please read the information under
Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
the vehicle in good condition, see
your dealer/retailer.
The maintenance schedule is for
vehicles that:
.
Carry passengers and cargo
within recommended limits on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑12.
.
Are driven on reasonable road
surfaces within legal driving
limits.
.
Use the recommended fuel.
See Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑42.
11-2
Service and Maintenance
{ WARNING
Performing maintenance work can
be dangerous. Some jobs can
cause serious injury. Perform
maintenance work only if you
have the required know-how and
the proper tools and equipment.
If in doubt, see your dealer/
retailer to have a qualified
technician do the work. See
Doing Your Own Service Work on
page 10‑4.
At your General Motors dealer/
retailer, you can be certain that you
will receive the highest level of
service available. Your dealer/
retailer has specially trained service
technicians, uses genuine GM
replacement parts, as well as, up to
date tools and equipment to ensure
fast and accurate diagnostics.
The proper replacement parts,
fluids, and lubricants to use are
listed in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7 and
Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 11‑9. We recommend the use
of genuine parts from your dealer/
retailer.
Rotation of New Tires
To maintain ride, handling, and
performance of the vehicle, it is
important that the first rotation
service for new tires be performed
when they have 8 000 to 13 000 km
(5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire
Rotation on page 10‑50.
Scheduled
Maintenance
When the Change Engine Oil
Soon Message Displays
Change engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑8. An
Emission Control Service.
When the “Change Engine Oil
Soon” message displays, service is
required for the vehicle as soon as
possible, within the next 1 000 km/
600 miles. If driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system
might not indicate the need for
vehicle service for more than a year.
The engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and
the oil life system must be reset.
Your dealer/retailer has trained
service technicians who will perform
this work and reset the system.
Service and Maintenance
.
11-3
Brake system inspection (or
every 12 months, whichever
occurs first).
If the engine oil life system is reset
accidentally, service the vehicle
within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since
the last service. Reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑10.
Maintenance I
.
Engine coolant level check. See
Engine Coolant on page 10‑13.
.
Perform all services described in
Maintenance I.
When the “Change Engine Oil
Soon” message displays, certain
services, checks, and inspections
are required. The services
described for Maintenance I should
be performed at every engine oil
change. The services described for
Maintenance II should be
performed when:
.
Windshield washer fluid level
check. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑20.
.
.
Tire inflation check. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑44.
Steering and suspension
inspection. Visual inspection for
damaged, loose, or missing
parts or signs of wear.
.
Engine cooling system
inspection. Visual inspection of
hoses, pipes, fittings, and
clamps and replacement,
if needed.
.
Windshield wiper blade
inspection for wear, cracking,
or contamination and windshield
and wiper blade cleaning,
if contaminated. See Exterior
Care on page 10‑87. Worn or
damaged wiper blade
replacement. See Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 10‑26.
.
.
Maintenance I was performed
the last time the engine oil was
changed.
It has been 10 months or more
since the “Change Engine Oil
Soon” message has displayed or
since the last service.
.
Change engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑8. An
Emission Control Service.
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑50.
.
Rotate tires. See Tire Rotation
on page 10‑50.
.
Fluids visual leak check (or
every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). A leak in any
system must be repaired and the
fluid level checked.
.
Engine air cleaner filter
inspection (vehicles driven in
dusty conditions only). See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 10‑11.
Maintenance II
11-4
.
.
.
Service and Maintenance
Body hinges and latches, key
lock cylinders, hood latch
assemblies, secondary latches,
pivots, spring anchor and
release pawl, hood and door
hinges, rear folding seats, and
liftgate hinges lubrication. See
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7. More
frequent lubrication may be
required when vehicle is
exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone
grease on weatherstrips with a
clean cloth makes them last
longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak.
Additional Required Services
At Each Fuel Stop
.
Engine oil level check. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑8.
.
Engine coolant level check. See
Engine Coolant on page 10‑13.
.
Windshield washer fluid level
check. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑20.
Once a Month
.
Tire inflation check. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑44.
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑50.
Restraint system component
check. See Safety System
Check on page 3‑28.
Once a Year
.
Engine air cleaner filter
inspection. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑11.
See Starter Switch Check on
page 10‑24.
.
See Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control System
Check on page 10‑25.
.
See Ignition Transmission Lock
Check on page 10‑25.
.
See Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check on
page 10‑26.
.
Engine cooling system and
pressure cap pressure check.
Radiator and air conditioning
condenser outside cleaning. See
Cooling System on page 10‑13.
.
Exhaust system and nearby heat
shields inspection for loose or
damaged components.
.
Accelerator pedal check for
damage, high effort, or binding.
Replace if needed.
.
If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit, check the
sealant expiration date printed
on the instruction label of the kit.
See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 10‑59.
Service and Maintenance
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles
.
or delivery service. During
any maintenance, if a power
washer is used to clean mud
and dirt from the underbody,
care should be taken to not
directly spray the transfer case
output seals. High pressure
water can overcome the seals
and contaminate the transfer
case fluid. Contaminated fluid
will decrease the life of the
transfer case and should be
replaced.
Fuel system inspection for
damage or leaks.
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles
.
Engine air cleaner filter
replacement. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑11.
.
Automatic transmission fluid
change (severe service) for
vehicles mainly driven in heavy
city traffic in hot weather, in hilly
or mountainous terrain, when
frequently towing a trailer,
or used for taxi, police,
or delivery service. See
Automatic Transmission Fluid on
page 10‑11.
.
All‐wheel drive only: Transfer
case fluid change (severe
service) for vehicles mainly
driven when frequently towing a
trailer, or used for taxi, police,
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles
.
Automatic transmission fluid
change (normal service). See
Automatic Transmission Fluid on
page 10‑11.
.
Spark plug replacement and
spark plug wires inspection. An
Emission Control Service.
.
All‐wheel drive only: Transfer
case fluid change (normal
service). During any
maintenance, if a power
11-5
washer is used to clean mud
and dirt from the underbody,
care should be taken to not
directly spray the transfer case
output seals. High pressure
water can overcome the seals
and contaminate the transfer
case fluid. Contaminated fluid
will decrease the life of the
transfer case and should be
replaced.
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
.
Engine cooling system drain,
flush, and refill, cooling system
and cap pressure check, and
cleaning of outside of radiator
and air conditioning condenser
(or every 5 years, whichever
occurs first). See Cooling
System on page 10‑13. An
Emission Control Service.
.
Engine accessory drive belt
inspection for fraying, excessive
cracks, or obvious damage and
replacement, if needed. An
Emission Control Service.
11-6
Service and Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system.
•
•
Engine coolant level check.
•
•
Windshield washer fluid level check.
•
•
Tire inflation pressures check.
•
•
Tire wear inspection.
•
•
Rotate tires.
•
•
Fluids visual leak check.
•
•
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only).
•
•
Brake system inspection.
•
•
Steering and suspension inspection.
•
Engine cooling system inspection.
•
Windshield wiper blades inspection.
•
Body components lubrication.
•
Restraint system components check.
•
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions).
•
Service and Maintenance
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Hydraulic Brake System
Windshield Washer
Hydraulic Power Steering System
Automatic Transmission
Carrier Assembly — Differential
(Rear Drive Module) and Transfer
Case (Power Transfer Unit)
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the
American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst
symbol. To determine the proper viscosity for the vehicle's engine,
see Engine Oil on page 10‑8.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL ®
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on page 10‑13.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88862806,
in Canada 88862807).
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
SAE 75W‐90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678).
11-7
11-8
Service and Maintenance
Usage
Key Lock Cylinders
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Hood and Door Hinges and
Rear Folding Seat
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)
or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Service and Maintenance
11-9
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
15278634
A3083C
Engine Oil Filter
89017524
PF48
Spark Plugs
12611882
41-107
Front Driver – 62.5 cm (24.6 in)
15254805
—
Front Passenger – 53.0 cm (20.8 in)
15254804
—
Rear – 30.0 cm (11.8 in)
25820122
—
Wiper Blades
11-10
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,
and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
11-11
11-12
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
Technical Data
Technical Data
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Service Parts Identification
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3
This legal identifier is in the front
corner of the instrument panel, on
the left side of the vehicle. It can be
seen through the windshield from
outside. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
12-1
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is
the engine code. This code
identifies the vehicle's engine,
specifications, and replacement
parts. See “Engine Specifications”
under Capacities and Specifications
on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Service Parts
Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
.
Model designation
.
Paint information
.
Production options and special
equipment
Do not remove this label from the
vehicle.
12-2
Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Metric
English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Cooling System
10.8 L
11.4 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
5.2 L
5.5 qt
Fuel Tank
83.3 L
22.0 gal
Transmission Fluid* (Drain and Refill)
5.0 L
5.3 qt
190 Y
140 lb ft
Wheel Nut Torque
*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑11 for information on checking fluid level.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Technical Data
Engine Specifications
Engine
3.6L V6 Engine
Engine Drive Belt Routing
3.6L V6 Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
D
Automatic
1.10 mm (0.043 in)
12-3
12-4
Technical Data
2 NOTES
Customer Information
Customer
Information
Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Assistance Offices
(US, Can) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
(US, Can) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Roadside Assistance
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Scheduling Service
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Collision Damage Repair . . . 13-10
Service Publications
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-12
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to
the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-15
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16
Radio Frequency
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
13-1
Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
important to your dealer and to
Buick. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the
operation of your vehicle will be
resolved by your GM dealer's sales
or service departments. Sometimes,
however, despite the best intentions
of all concerned, misunderstandings
can occur. If your concern has not
been resolved to your satisfaction,
the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
with a member of dealership
management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level.
If the matter has already been
reviewed with the sales, service,
or parts manager, contact the owner
of the dealership or the general
manager.
13-2
Customer Information
STEP TWO : If after contacting a
member of dealership management,
it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without
further help, in the U.S., contact the
Buick Customer Assistance Center
by calling 1-800-521-7300. In
Canada, contact General Motors of
Canada Customer Communication
Centre by calling 1‐800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
(French).
We encourage you to call the
toll-free number in order to give your
inquiry prompt attention. Please
have the following information
available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
.
.
.
Vehicle Identification Number.
This is available from the vehicle
registration or title, or the plate
at the top left of the instrument
panel.
Dealership name and location
Vehicle delivery date and
present mileage
When contacting Buick, please
remember that your concern will
likely be resolved at a dealer's
facility. That is why we suggest you
follow Step One first if you have a
concern.
case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the
decision given in your case, you
may reject it and proceed with any
other venue for relief available
to you.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:
Both General Motors and your
dealer are committed to making
sure you are completely satisfied
with your new vehicle. However, in
the United States, if you continue to
remain unsatisfied after following
the procedure outlined in Steps One
and Two, you can file with the BBB
Auto Line Program to enforce your
rights.
You may contact the BBB Auto
Line Program using the toll-free
telephone number or write them at
the following address:
The BBB Auto Line Program is an
out of court program administered
by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive
disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may
be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the
program is free of charge and your
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business
Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all
50 states and the District of
Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
vehicle age, mileage and other
factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
Customer Information
STEP THREE — Canadian
Owners: In the event that you do
not feel your concerns have been
addressed after following the
procedure outlined in Steps one and
two, General Motors of Canada
Limited wants you to be aware of its
participation in a no-charge
Mediation/Arbitration program.
General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration
of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service
claims. The program provides for
the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and
may include an informal hearing
before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time
you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in
approximately 70 days. We believe
our impartial program offers
advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal,
quick, and free of charge.
For further information concerning
eligibility in the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.
Alternatively you may call the
General Motors Customer
Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English),
1-800-263-7854 (French), or you
may write to the Mediation/
Arbitration Program at the following
address. Your inquiry should be
accompanied by your Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication
Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
13-3
Customer Assistance
Offices (US, Can)
Buick encourages customers to call
the toll-free number for assistance.
However, if a customer wishes to
write or e-mail Buick, the letter
should be addressed to:
United States — Customer
Assistance
Buick Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33136
Detroit, MI 48232-5136
www.Buick.com
1-800-521-7300
1-800-832-8425 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-252-1112
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands
1-800-496-9994
13-4
Customer Information
Canada — Customer
Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer
Assistance
Please contact the local General
Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
Online Owner Center
General Motors de Mexico,
S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
Information and services
customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient
place.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users (US, Can)
To assist customers who are deaf,
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired
and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), Buick has TTY equipment
available at its Customer Assistance
Center. Any TTY user can
communicate with Buick by dialing:
1-800-83-BUICK. TTY users in
Canada can dial 1‐800‐263-3830.
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/
buick
.
Digital owner manual, warranty
information, and more
.
Online service and maintenance
records
.
Find Buick dealers for service
nationwide
.
Exclusive privileges and offers
.
Recall notices for your specific
vehicle
.
OnStar® and GM Cardmember
Services Earnings summaries
Customer Information
Other Helpful Links:
Buick — www.buick.com
Buick Merchandise —
www.buickmerchandise.com
Help Center — www.buick.com/
helpcenter
.
FAQ
.
Contact Us
My GM Canada (Canada) —
www.gm.ca
My GM Canada is a
password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save
information on GM vehicles, get
personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Here are a few of the valuable tools
and services you will have
access to:
.
My Showroom: Find and save
information on vehicles and
current offers in your area.
.
My Dealers/Retailers: Save
details such as address and
phone number for each of your
preferred GM dealers/retailers.
.
My Driveway: Access quick links
to parts and service estimates,
check trade-in values,
or schedule a service
appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your
driveway profile.
.
My Preferences: Manage your
profile and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gm.ca.
13-5
GM Mobility
Reimbursement Program
This program, available to qualified
applicants, can reimburse you up to
$1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment
required for your vehicle, such as
hand controls or a wheelchair/
scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very
limited period of time from the date
of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your
vehicle's eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM
Mobility Assistance Center at
1-800-323-9935. Text telephone
(TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
13-6
Customer Information
General Motors of Canada also
has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
for details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.
.
Model, year, color, and license
plate number of the vehicle
.
Odometer reading, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle
Roadside Assistance
Program
.
Description of the problem
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call
1-800-252-1112; (Text Telephone
(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).
Services are provided up to 5 years/
160 000 km (100,000 miles),
whichever comes first.
For Canadian purchased vehicles,
call 1-800-268-6800.
In the U.S., anyone driving the
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not
covered.
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance,
have the following information
ready:
.
Your name, home address, and
home telephone number
.
Telephone number of your
location
.
Location of the vehicle
owner or driver if they decide the
claims are made too often, or the
same type of claim is made many
times.
Services Provided
.
Emergency Fuel Delivery:
Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest
service station.
.
Lock‐Out Service: Service is
provided to unlock the vehicle if
you are locked out. A remote
unlock may be available if you
have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present
identification before this service
is given.
.
Emergency Tow From a Public
Road or Highway: Tow to the
nearest Buick dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be
driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in
sand, mud, or snow.
Coverage
Roadside Assistance is not a part of
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Buick and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
Buick and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
limit services or payment to an
Customer Information
.
.
Flat Tire Change: Service is
provided to change a flat tire
with the spare tire. The spare
tire, if equipped, must be in good
condition and properly inflated.
It is the owner's responsibility for
the repair or replacement of the
tire if it is not covered by the
warranty.
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
.
Fuel delivery: Reimbursement
is approximately $5 Canadian.
Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other
fuels are not provided through
this service.
Battery Jump Start: Service is
provided to jump start a dead
battery.
.
Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
registration is required.
.
Trip Routing Service: Detailed
maps of North America are
provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the
most scenic route. There is a six
request limit per year. Additional
travel information is also
available. Allow three weeks for
delivery.
Services Not Included in
Roadside Assistance
.
Impound towing caused by
violation of any laws.
.
Legal fines.
.
Mounting, dismounting or
changing of snow tires, chains,
or other traction devices.
.
Towing or services for vehicles
driven on a non-public road or
highway.
13-7
.
Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance: Must be over
250 kilometres from where
your trip was started to
qualify. General Motors of
Canada Limited requires
pre-authorization, original
detailed receipts, and a copy
of the repair orders. Once
authorization has been received,
the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help you make arrangements
and explain how to receive
payment.
.
Alternative Service: If
assistance cannot be provided
right away, the Roadside
Assistance advisor may give
you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will
receive payment, up to $100,
after sending the original receipt
to Roadside Assistance.
Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for
parts and labor for repairs not
covered by the warranty are the
owner responsibility.
13-8
Customer Information
Scheduling Service
Appointments
Courtesy Transportation
Program
When your vehicle requires
warranty service, contact your
dealer/retailer and request an
appointment. By scheduling a
service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your
transportation needs, your dealer/
retailer can help minimize your
inconvenience.
To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support
program for vehicles with the
Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada) and
extended powertrain, and hybrid
specific warranty in both the U.S.
and Canada.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled
into the service department
immediately, keep driving it until it
can be scheduled for service,
unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call
your dealership/retailer, let them
know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to
bring the vehicle for service, you are
urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the
same day repair.
Several courtesy transportation
options are available to assist in
reducing your inconvenience when
warranty repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a
part of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. A separate booklet
entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished
with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage
information.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be
completed while you wait. However,
if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by
providing several transportation
options. Depending on the
circumstances, your dealer can offer
you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred
means of offering Courtesy
Transportation. Dealers may provide
you with shuttle service to get you
to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule.
This includes one‐way or round trip
shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the
dealer's area.
Customer Information
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight
warranty repairs, and public
transportation is used instead of the
dealer's shuttle service, the expense
must be supported by original
receipts and can only be up to the
maximum amount allowed by GM
for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or
relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be
available. Claim amounts should
reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts. See
your dealer for information regarding
the allowance amounts for
reimbursement of fuel or other
transportation costs.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is
kept for an overnight warranty
repair. Rental reimbursement will be
limited and must be supported by
original receipts. This requires that
you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state/
provincial, local, and rental
vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements,
insurance coverage, credit card,
etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage
fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the
repair.
It may not be possible to provide a
like-vehicle as a courtesy rental.
13-9
Additional Program
Information
All program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at
every dealer. Please contact your
dealer for specific information
about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be
administered by appropriate dealer
personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to
unilaterally modify, change or
discontinue Courtesy Transportation
at any time and to resolve all
questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and
conditions described herein at its
sole discretion.
13-10
Customer Information
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a
collision and it is damaged, have
the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper
equipment and quality replacement
parts. Poorly performed collision
repairs diminish your vehicle's
resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised
in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new
parts made with the same materials
and construction methods as the
parts with which your vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice
to ensure that your vehicle's
designed appearance, durability,
and safety are preserved. The use
of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle
Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts
may also be used for repair. These
parts are typically removed from
vehicles that were total losses in
prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from
undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM
part, may be an acceptable choice
to maintain your vehicle's originally
designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of
these parts is not known. Such parts
are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also
available. These are made by
companies other than GM and may
not have been tested for your
vehicle. As a result, these parts
may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in
subsequent collisions. Aftermarket
parts are not covered by your GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and
any vehicle failure related to such
parts are not covered by that
warranty.
Repair Facility
We recommend that you choose a
collision repair facility that meets
your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer
may have a collision repair center
with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be
able to recommend a collision repair
center that has GM-trained
technicians and comparable
equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM
vehicle with comprehensive and
collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the
quality of coverage afforded by
various insurance policy terms.
Customer Information
Many insurance policies provide
reduced protection to your GM
vehicle by limiting compensation
for damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not
specify aftermarket collision parts.
When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your
vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is not
available from your current
insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing
company may require you to have
insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
Genuine Manufacturer replacement
parts. Read your lease carefully, as
you may be charged at the end of
your lease for poor quality repairs.
If a Crash Occurs
If there has been an injury, call
emergency services for help. Do not
leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of.
Move the vehicle only if its position
puts you in danger, or you are
instructed to move it by a police
officer.
Give only the necessary information
to police and other parties involved
in the crash.
For emergency towing see What
Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? on page 3‑35.
Gather the following information:
.
Driver's name, address, phone
number
.
Driver's license number
.
Owner's name, address, phone
number
13-11
.
Vehicle license plate
.
Vehicle make, model and
model year
.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
.
Insurance company and policy
number
.
General description of the
damage to the other vehicle
Choose a reputable repair facility
that uses quality replacement parts.
See “Collision Parts” earlier in this
section.
If the airbag has inflated, see What
Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? on page 3‑35.
13-12
Customer Information
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle
requires damage repairs, GM
recommends that you take an active
role in its repair. If you have a
pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there,
or have it towed there. Specify to
the facility that any required
replacement collision parts be
original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled
original GM parts. Remember,
recycled parts will not be covered by
your GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
but you must live with the repair.
Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may
initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
your repair professional, and insist
on Genuine GM parts. Remember if
your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
If another party's insurance
company is paying for the repairs,
you are not obligated to accept a
repair valuation based on that
insurance company's collision policy
repair limits, as you have no
contractual limits with that company.
In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as
long as cost stays within reasonable
limits.
Service Publications
Ordering Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis
and repair information on engines,
transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering,
body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions
to assist in the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle.
Customer Information
Owner Information
Owner publications are written
specifically for owners and intended
to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle.
The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all
models.
ORDER TOLL FREE:
1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday
8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web
at: helminc.com
Or you can write to:
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Owner Manual, and Warranty
Booklet.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for
delivery.
Without Portfolio: Owner
Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Current and Past Model Order
Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and
Manuals are available for current
and past model GM vehicles. To
request an order form, specify year
and model name of the vehicle.
Note to Canadian Customers: All
listed prices are quoted in U.S.
funds. Canadian residents are to
make checks payable in U.S. funds.
13-13
Reporting Safety
Defects
Reporting Safety Defects
to the United States
Government
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause
a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
13-14
Customer Information
of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may
call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor
vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
Government
If you live in Canada, and you
believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, notify Transport
Canada immediately, in addition
to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Reporting Safety Defects
to General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or
Transport Canada) in a situation like
this, please notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-521-7300, or write:
Buick Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33136
Detroit, MI 48232-5136
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
(French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Customer Information
Vehicle Data
Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of
sophisticated computers that record
information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven.
For example, your vehicle uses
computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission
performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment
and deploy airbags in a crash and,
if so equipped, to provide antilock
braking to help the driver control the
vehicle. These modules may store
data to help your dealer/retailer
technician service your vehicle.
Some modules may also store data
about how you operate the vehicle,
such as rate of fuel consumption or
average speed. These modules may
also retain the owner’s personal
preferences, such as radio pre-sets,
seat positions, and temperature
settings.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an airbag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a
vehicle's systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed
to record such data as:
.
How various systems in your
vehicle were operating
.
Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened
.
How far, if at all, the driver was
pressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal
.
How fast the vehicle was
traveling
13-15
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances
in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal
driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded.
However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the
EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
13-16
Customer Information
GM will not access this data or
share it with others except: with the
consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the
consent of the lessee; in response
to an official request of police or
similar government office; as part of
GM's defense of litigation through
the discovery process; or, as
required by law. Data that GM
collects or receives may also be
used for GM research needs or may
be made available to others for
research purposes, where a need is
shown and the data is not tied to a
specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation
system, use of the system may
result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and
other trip information. Refer to the
navigation system operating manual
for information on stored data and
for deletion instructions.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
Radio Frequency
Statement
RFID technology is used in some
vehicles for functions such as tire
pressure monitoring and ignition
system security, as well as in
connection with conveniences such
as key fobs for remote door locking/
unlocking and starting, and
in-vehicle transmitters for garage
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record
personal information or link with any
other GM system containing
personal information.
This vehicle has systems that
operate on a radio frequency that
comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with RSS-210/211 of
Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. The device may not cause
interference.
2. The device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
INDEX
A
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-42
Adjustments
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-11
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Airbag System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
Airbag System (cont.)
What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-35
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-31
Airbags
Adding Equipment to the
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-17
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Servicing Airbag-Equipped
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Alarm System
Anti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-24, 9-28
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Antenna
Multi-Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Anti-Theft
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-37
i-1
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Appearance Care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
Armrest Stoarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Assistance Program,
Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21, 7-27
Audio System
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-44
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Automatic
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-24
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Shiftlock Control System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
i-2
INDEX
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-26
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-29
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and
Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
C
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
California
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Cargo
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Tie Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Cautions, Danger, and
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
CD
DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-1
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-18
Check
Engine Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Ignition
Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-25
Child Restraints
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-53
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60, 3-62
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49
Where to Put the Restraint . . .3-51
INDEX
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Cleaning
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
Climate Control Systems
Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7, 8-8
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Cluster, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-10
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Compressor Kit, Tire
Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Coolant
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Engine Temperature Gage . . . .5-15
Engine Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Covers
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4
Customer Information
Service Publications
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-12
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
i-3
D
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-10
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-15
Daytime Running Lamps/
Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Door
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
i-4
INDEX
Drive Systems
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-24, 9-28
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Driving
Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-8
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Dual Automatic Climate
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
DVD
Rear Seat Entertainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36
DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
E
Electrical Equipment,
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Electrical System
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Check and Service Engine
Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Coolant Temperature Gage . . .5-15
Coolant Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Engine (cont.)
Cooling System Messages . . .5-33
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Overheated Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-24
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Engine Oil
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-15
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
INDEX
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . .10-11
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Fog Lamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Front Seats
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-43
Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-42
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Requirements, California . . . . .9-43
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Fuel Economy
Driving for Better . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Fuses
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
i-5
G
Gages
Engine Coolant
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Warning Lights and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Gasoline
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
General Information
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
i-6
INDEX
H
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Headlamps
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Daytime Running Lamps/
Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Delayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-24
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
High Voltage Devices and
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-8
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
I
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Ignition Transmission Lock
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Infants and Young Children,
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Instrument Panel
Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 7-1
J
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
K
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-35
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-37
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Lamps
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-19
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
LATCH System
Replacing Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-59
Latch, Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Liftgate
Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
INDEX
Lighting
Adaptive Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Delayed Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Delayed Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Lights
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning . . . . . . .5-23
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-16
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-23
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Locks
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH
SYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
M
Maintenance
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10
Maintenance Schedule
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-19
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
i-7
Messages
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .5-37
Battery Voltage and
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-33
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Object Detection System . . . . .5-36
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
i-8
INDEX
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Monitor System, Tire
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21, 7-27
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
N
Navigation System
Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
O
P
Object Detection System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Off-Road
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Oil
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-44
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Operation, Infotainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Outlets
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Overheated Engine
Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Park
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Parking
Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-26
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-23
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-37
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
Phone
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-46
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-19
INDEX
Power (cont.)
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Pregnancy, Using Safety
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Privacy
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16
Program
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-8
Proposition 65 Warning,
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
R
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-16
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Radios
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Rear Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7, 8-8
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Rear Seat Entertainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-44
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-36
Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-6
Rearview Mirrors
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Records
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10
Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Reimbursement Program,
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-3
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
i-9
Replacement Parts
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-44
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-14
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Ride Control Systems
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Roadside Assistance
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3
Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
i-10
INDEX
S
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-29
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-27
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-14
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-8
Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Seats
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Heated and Ventilated Front . . . 3-8
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-3
Seats (cont.)
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Secondary Latch System . . . . . 10-77
Securing Child
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60, 3-62
Security
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Service
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4
Engine Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-10
Maintenance, General
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1
Publications Ordering
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-8
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-42
Shifting
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Sidemarker and Stoplamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Signals, Turn and
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Spare Tire
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Specifications and
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . . 5-23
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Storage Areas
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Cargo Management System . . . 4-3
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
INDEX
Storage Areas (cont.)
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
System
Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
System Check
Automatic Transmission
Shiftlock Control . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Taillamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-13
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Third-Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Tires
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-46
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-45
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Sealant and Compressor
Kit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Secondary Latch System . . . 10-77
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
i-11
Tires (cont.)
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-56
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Towing
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-47
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-47
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-84
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Transportation Program,
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Turn Signal,
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
i-12
INDEX
U
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-35
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-47
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
V
Vehicle
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Vehicle Care
Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-67
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Service Parts Identification
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Voltage Devices, and
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Voltmeter Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
W
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 5-39
Wheels
Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Where to Put the Child
Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Windshield
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-26
Wipers
Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Wiring, High Voltage
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Download PDF
Similar pages